Category: Volume 15 – Number 1 – September 2004

  • Aesthetics without Art: The Para-Epistemic Project of Kant’s Third Critique

    Christopher Forster

    English Department
    University of Virginia
    csf2g@virginia.edu

     

    Review of: Rodolphe Gasché. The Idea of Form: Rethinking Kant’s Aesthetics. Stanford: Stanford UP, 2003.

     

    When poststructuralists return to “classics” of Western philosophy, it is often in a spirit of revision. When Lacan turns his attention to Kant, it is to insist, against prevailing wisdom, that Kant must be read “avec Sade.” When Foucault reads Kant’s “What is Enlightenment?” it is largely to appropriate a notion of enlightenment for Foucault’s own project. Rodolphe Gasché’s project in The Idea of Form is decidedly different. More in the tradition of the explication du texte than that of the hermeneutic of suspicion, Gasché returns to the Critique of Judgment in order to reinforce its position within the Kantian corpus.

     

    Gasché shares with his poststructuralist peers a practice of meticulous close reading which guides The Idea of Form. Having published books on Derrida and Paul de Man, Gasché’s credentials may ally him with deconstruction. The Idea of Form, however, is not a “deconstruction of the Third Critique.” Rather than borrowing his vocabulary from deconstruction, or any other critical tradition, Gasché offers a thoroughly Kantian reading of the Third Critique. Gasché attempts to take seriously Kant’s famously obtuse claim that the Third Critique completes the critical project of the first two critiques. Judgment, Kant claims, is “suitable for mediating the connection of the domain of the concept of nature with that of the concept of freedom, as regards freedom’s consequences, inasmuch as this harmony also promotes the mind’s receptivity to moral feeling” (Kant 38). Gasché focuses on what he calls the “para-epistemic” role of the faculty of judgment, exploring the capacity of aesthetic judgment to mediate between the realm of the understanding (deterministically governed by laws) and the realm of reason (which is the domain of freedom and morality).

     

    While Gasché is not the only critic to take seriously Kant’s claim that the Third Critique bridges the chasm between the other two, his analysis nevertheless operates as a helpful corrective to the manner in which we may normally understand the Third Critique.1 Too often the province of the First Critique is taken to be epistemology, that of the Second morality, while the Third, a somewhat inexplicable addition, is thought to deal with aesthetics. This model is an oversimplification that does not respect the complexity of Kant’s texts, yet it remains the prevailing model. Gasché offers a compelling corrective, demonstrating how Kantian aesthetics emerges from the subject’s confrontation with objects for which it has no concepts.

     

    As its title suggests, the Third Critique is not primarily concerned with aesthetics, but with the faculty of judgment. Kant explains, “judgment in general is the ability to think the particular as contained under the universal” (18). As it appears in the Critique of Pure Reason, judgment is at the disposal of the understanding as the faculty which subsumes the particular, which is given from intuition, under the universal concepts of the understanding. In the Third Critique, Kant identifies this type of judgment as “determining” or “determinative” and posits another form of judgment. “If the universal (the rule, principle, law) is given, then judgment, which subsumes the particular under it, is determinative. . . . But if only the particular is given and judgment has to find the universal for it, then this power is merely reflective” (Kant 18-19). Reflective judgment provides most of the subject matter for the Critique of Judgment, and it is as a form of reflective judgment that aesthetic judgment emerges in the Third Critique.

     

    Reflective judgment has the singular function of securing a minimum level of cognition when the subject confronts a seemingly uncognizable object. Gasché explains,

     

    in the case of certain objects of experience or empirical representations, determining–that is to say, cognitive–judgments are at a loss . . . and thus reflective judgment, whether aesthetic or teleological, is needed. The task of such judgment consists in nothing less than “discovering” concepts and rules that the particular obeys. In short, the task of reflective judgment, as distinct from the task of determining judgment, is to render intelligible what is particular and contingent by showing it to have a unity that is thinkable by us, although it does not rest on the objective rules that are, of course, the prerogative of determining judgment. (16)

     

    It is this peculiar epistemic situation that Kant’s aesthetics seeks to address, and it is in this situation that judgment discovers its “para-epistemic” task as reflective judgment. “Such judgment is not ‘ante-‘ or ‘proto-‘ epistemic, since these qualifications would suggest, of course, that its achievements precede epistemic accomplishments properly speaking. . . . But the accomplishments of aesthetic reflective judgment stand beside and on a par with cognitive accomplishments; thus aesthetic judgment holds its place as equal to cognition” (Gasché 4). Explaining precisely how the particular and contingent, for which the mind has no concept, comes to be interpreted by purely subjective principles provides the bulk of the material of both the Third Critique and The Idea of Form.

     

    At the end of the published introduction to the Third Critique, Kant provides a table which lists the three cognitive powers (understanding, judgment, reason) alongside each other (38). Such a schema seems to suggest that each of these “cognitive powers” is somehow equal, legislating over its own domain. In the first two critiques, Kant goes to great lengths to demonstrate how reason and understanding each legislates over its own domain. The reader of the Critique of Judgment might easily be misled into believing that the judgment is just another faculty, with its own distinct sphere of legislation. While capable of autonomy in aesthetic judgments, judgment is typically at the service of the understanding:

     

    However autonomous reflective judgment may be, we must recall that its autonomy exists only in distinction from the reflection that takes place in the understanding. In mere reflection upon particulars without objective concepts, the exercise of autonomy remains a function of the judgment’s divestment of something that it ordinarily achieves. (Gasché 24)

     

     

    The Third Critique itself, like the judgment, is not simply another critique, but is comprehensible only in terms of the other critiques. The judgment emerges as the unifying faculty, and the Third Critique proves the completion of the Kantian system, only once we understand that the failure of determining judgment opens up the possibility of another level of judgment, predicated upon an a priori principle that is subjective, rather than the objective concepts of the understanding. It is only its status as “mere” reflection, operating as not quite a faculty, as a para-epistemic power, that allows reflective judgment to unify the reason and the understanding.

     

    In an act of brilliant textual analysis, Gasché highlights the peculiar position of reflective judgment by tracing the qualifiers by which Kant describes it, particularly the German adjective bloss, normally translated as “mere.” Over and over again, Kant speaks of “mere judgment” or of judgments upon the “mere form” of an object. “Mere” captures the way in which reflective judgment represents an achievement in the wake of determining judgment’s failure. Gasché explains,

     

    I believe that his abundant use of these restrictive terms betrays the difficulty of the task faced by Kant in this last critical work–the difficulty of isolating, with the required purity, the realm to be delimited. It could thus well be that rather than occurring incidentally in Kant’s texts, merely is used for systematic reasons, and that its status is that of a philosophical concept comparable, say, to that of the pure. (19)

     

    In The Idea of Form, Gasché charts the development of the Kantian “mere” as one of his key terms.

     

    The sense of “mereness” is captured when Gasché suggests that the a priori principle which governs reflecting judgment, the principle of purposiveness, is “one principle more.” In his discussion of teleological judgments, Gasché highlights purposiveness as something merely added to a failed determining judgment. After differentiating determining judgments from reflecting judgments, Kant further divides the latter category into aesthetic and teleological judgments. By placing his discussion of teleological judgments at the beginning of The Idea of Form, Gasché reverses the order in which Kant discusses the different forms of reflective judgments, and in doing so suggests that aesthetic judgments are of greater concern in the Third Critique. Gasché establishes the priority of the aesthetic by pointing out that only in aesthetic judgment is the judging faculty completely free of the understanding:

     

    Aesthetic judgment precedes all conceptual understanding of the object and hence has its determining basis in the power of judgment alone, free from any admixture of the other cognitive faculties. Teleological judgment, on the other hand, is based on “the concept of a natural end” (27)

     

     

    Faced with an object to which no concept of the understanding applies, the reflective judgment attempts to secure a minimal cognition of the object. In the case of teleological judgments, this is achieved by adding the rational principle of “inner purposiveness” to the perception of the object.

     

    Teleological, rather than aesthetic, judgment imposes itself when confronted with objects of nature, with “its life forms and organisms. From the perspective of the understanding (which knows only mechanical causality), the forms of such objects of nature are contingent, since it cannot come up with any necessary concepts for these natural phenomena” (28). While such objects cannot be comprehended by the understanding, they nonetheless seem as if they are governed by some concept. Teleological judgment operates by adding “one principle more” to the otherwise incomprehensible object–the principle of a natural purpose. “In order to make the organized forms of nature available to possible observation and investigation, teleological judgment follows a guideline, which is the rational concept of a thing as a natural purpose (Naturzweck)” (30). As Gasché points out, because teleological judgment borrows its principle from reason, it is not, like aesthetic judgment, “a faculty that really has its own distinctive and a priori principle” (27). Its principle is, instead, borrowed from reason. Even though the “Critique of Teleological Judgment” is included within the Critique of Judgment, it could as easily have been “appended to the theoretical part of philosophy” (Kant qtd. in Gasché 27).

     

    One implication of this claim, which Gasché’s analysis seems to imply, though he does not comment on it, is the unified epistemic ground of science and aesthetics. Such a unification would not be a facile return to the vainglorious dream of a “scientific” form of aesthetics (as in the more vulgar claims of structuralist literary criticism). In fact, it suggests quite the opposite–that science and aesthetics, while sharing the common ground of reflective judgment, are two clearly demarcated domains: the domain of aesthetic judgment and the domain of teleological judgment. Sciences such as biology and to some extent physics require precisely the sort of assumption that teleological judgments make–assumptions of rationality, comprehensibility, and systematicity in nature. With such an assumption, phenomena are rendered “susceptible to observation and investigation” (Gasché 31). The a priori principle which governs all reflective judgments, that of purposiveness, undergirds both aesthetic and teleological judgments. It is at this level that science and aesthetics are unified within the Kantian framework.

     

    Just as the Third Critique may offer an epistemic model that unifies science and aesthetics, it dissolves any strict division between art and nature. Against most understandings of aesthetics, Kant’s is not particularly concerned with art.

     

    The meaning of “aesthetic” in [the Third Critique], moreover, bears little resemblance to what is known under that title in the history of aesthetics, both before and after Kant. As Kant uses the term it does not refer to artistic representation at all, but to that which concerns the senses in judgments, and is subjective. (90)

     

     

    One consequence of Kant’s subjective criteria is the irrelevance of the origin of the aesthetic object. Aesthetic judgment arises when the mind is confronted with an object for which it has no determinate concept, and yet experiences pleasure in its judging of that object. It is therefore as likely to occur in the presence of objects of nature (such as Kant’s perennial example of the beautiful–a flower) as in the presence of human art. By defining aesthetics with reference to subjective experience, Kant radically reorients the domain of aesthetics. Among other pesky aesthetic issues that Kant sweeps aside is the question of the ontological status of art. Kantian aesthetics, as epistemic phenomenology, is concerned with the entire realm of experience. In place of the question of ontology, as Gasché argues, the central preoccupation of the Third Critique is the nature of the beautiful.

     

    The notion of the beautiful is likely to strike the reader as quaint and unimportant for whatever we might describe as “contemporary aesthetics.” The Third Critique, upon first examination, is likely to seem hopelessly mired in the eighteenth century. Yet, if Kant speaks of the sublime and the beautiful, and fastidiously divides the realm of aesthetic experience into a hierarchical catalog, he nonetheless breaks with eighteenth-century aesthetics in many significant ways. One such break is the complete absence of any notion of “perfection” from the beautiful. More broadly, the Kantian beautiful provides no standards or rules for evaluating art. Instead, what a judgment of the beautiful “is concerned with is exclusively whether the objects under consideration have an indeterminately purposive natural form; in other words, whether they have the form of an object of empirical experience at all” (Gasché 80).

     

    The key word here, and the key to Gasché’s book, is the notion of form–“beauty resides in the form of an object” (60). As Gasché is at pains to demonstrate, this does not make Kant’s aesthetics formalist, in the usual sense of the term. Kant’s sense of form completely evades the form/content division. “Rather than being opposed to content, form, in [Kant’s] sense, gestures toward what is otherwise than form and content–an exuberance of indeterminateness prior to any fixing of objective meaning and its constraining formal characteristics” (Gasché 66). Kant’s formalism refers to the para-epistemic place that aesthetic judgments occupy within his framework.

     

    We must remember that aesthetic judgment, as a type of reflective judgment, concerns objects for which the mind has no concept. If, in spite of the absence of any determinate concept, an object may be judged purposive, “this is because this object displays form” (Gasché 80). Such a display of form occurs when the power of imagination (which apprehends the empirical object as a perception) unites harmoniously with the understanding–but only in a free, undetermined way. If the union of understanding and imagination were determining, the judgment would not be aesthetic at all.

     

    Under the condition that the merely apprehended intuitive manifold of a single object lends itself to being collected into the presentation of a concept in general, a harmonious agreement of the imagination and the understanding takes place, and thereby represents the minimal condition for cognition in general. (80)

     

     

    Like “mere,” the qualifier “in general” highlights the strange position occupied by the aesthetic. While it is not determined, it has the property of determinability, purposiveness without purpose.

     

    A beautiful object is not determined by a concept, nor is it simply undetermined; it is “marked by open determinability” (Gasché 81). As Gasché states,

     

    to put it bluntly, what is found beautiful in the judgment upon the mere form of an object is that the thing judged conforms to the form of an empirical object or thing (irrespective of what it is), rather than refusing itself to such representation (and consequently to representation as such). (80)

     

     

    Beauty is therefore pleasure in the cognizability of an uncognized object, the determinability of an undetermined object. Gasché captures the nature of the Kantian beautiful most succinctly when he writes that “a judgment of taste savors not the phenomenal nature of what is judged but its susceptibility to empirical concepts. Because of its form, a beautiful object is, as it were, exquisitely cognizable” (80). More than any other, the notion of an object that is exquisitely cognizable captures the pleasure that inheres in the act of judging an object. The very act of judging becomes pleasurable, even as the work of judgment is undetermined and necessarily incapable of completion.

     

    Against the beautiful, which resides in form, the sublime is formless. While this sounds like a straightforward recapitulation of the traditional opposition between the beautiful and the sublime, Gasché provocatively re-reads this division. While postmodern criticism has largely forgotten the “beautiful” in favor of the notion of the sublime, Gasché not only reasserts the place of the beautiful, but relegates the category of the sublime to an appendicular position, neither equal nor alternative to the beautiful, but an “appendage to the beautiful” (121).
    Formlessness is only capable of being judged sublime, however, when it also exhibits totality. “Boundless chaos is not enough to suggest sublimity; it must be such that it allows thinking to add (hinzugedacht wird) totality to it. If Kant’s strict terminology did not prohibit it, one would be inclined to say that boundless formlessness must have the ‘form’ of a whole, in order for it to be sublime” (Gasché 123-4). As in judgments on the beautiful, determining judgment fails in the face of the sublime. This failure is experienced as sublime only when the notion of totality can be added to the perception of formlessness.

     

    The notion of totality, however, does not arise in the judgment, but comes from the reason. “In the sublime, there is a presentation of a power that subtends cognizability and its intelligibility, namely reason. This presentation takes place precisely at moments when a given thing not only cannot be subsumed under given concepts but refuses even to be a presentation of the powers of cognition in general” (Gasché 125). The beautiful, while it fails to be subsumed under any particular concept, harmoniously unites the powers of cognition in general. The sublime, on the other hand, represents the complete failure of such powers. The subject, when faced with such failure, nevertheless feels its own power beyond cognition through the reason. This experience of its own power allows the subject to experience formless objects as sublime. “What is judged sublime is the mind’s capacity to form an apprehension of something that thwarts even the possibility of minimal objectification” (Gasché 127). This apprehension only occurs through the intervention of the reason. Strictly speaking, only feelings, and not objects, may be properly judged sublime. The objects which inspire sublimity, inspire only incomprehensibility. Yet reason (through the rational concept of totality) masters this incomprehensibility, leading to an experience of pleasure in the subject as it experiences its own ability to overcome formlessness.

     

    Judgment on the sublime is “an aesthetic judgment at the very limits of aesthetics. . . . it gestures toward something else, namely, practical reason and morality” (Gasché 154). The intervention of reason, necessary for the experience of sublimity, lends a moral dimension to the sublime. Judgments on the beautiful remain pure judgments of taste, representing a harmonious relation between the imagination and the understanding, while judgments on the sublime enter into a relation with the faculty of reason.2 It is this adding of reason to failed judgment that makes the “Analytic of the Sublime” an appendix to the “Analytic to the Beautiful.”

     

    The appendicular nature of “The Analytic of the Sublime” thus consists also in this: that it adds the problematic of reason . . . to the analytic of the reflective aesthetic judgment that has been illustrated by privileging the beautiful. In the discussion of the sublime, it becomes clear that there is an autonomous kind of reflective judgment in which reason, rather than the understanding, plays the major role. (130)

     

    Gasché reorients our understanding of the Critique of Judgment by revealing the para-epistemic role of judgment in cognition and re-centering the text around the “Analytic of the Beautiful.” While the primary division in Kant’s text is the division between the “Critique of Aesthetic Judgment” and the “Critique of Teleological Judgment,” Gasché compellingly argues for the centrality of the former. And while Kant divides aesthetic judgments into judgments on the sublime and judgments on the beautiful, Gasché insists that the former is simply an appendix to the latter. Kant’s text, in eighteenth-century fashion, takes as its province the entire faculty of judgment and proceeds to catalog every appearance of that faculty. Gasché’s focuses the energy of Kant’s text, revealing the centrality of the beautiful in the Third Critique and, more specifically, the notion of form which undergirds it. By doing so, Gasché fleshes out the claim that the Third Critique is not concerned with aesthetics as a theory of art, but with the para-epistemic task of representing an object for which judgment has no concept.

     

    Gasché proceeds to discuss Kant’s notion of interest and disinterestedness, how reason and aesthetic judgments interact, and what special provisions must be made for our understanding of the fine arts in contradistinction to nature. The final chapter, on the role of the rhetorical figure of “hypotyposis,” though a previously published essay, manages to distill and collect much of what has come before. In discussing poetry, in this closing chapter Gasché writes,

     

    the free play of imagination produces only presentation as such, that is, not determinate intuitive fulfillment of concepts but their fullness, their vivid lively filling out in general. This indeterminate, intuitive fullness of the concepts that occurs in the play of the imagination in poetry livens up the mind. It conveys life to the mind, a life yet indeterminate, but purposive to the extent that it brings about the minimal arrangement of the faculties necessary for cognition in general. (204)

     

    It is hard to imagine a clearer, more concise statement of Gasché’s argument for a para-epistemic reading of the role of judgment in Kant’s aesthetics.

     

    Gasché accomplishes a great deal largely as a function of his ability to wed close textual analysis brilliantly to a philosophical discussion of Kant’s system. The drawback of such an approach is its tendency to insulate itself. Gasché explains,

     

    I have also sought to avoid, whenever possible, a critical debate with the various and often contradictory interpretations that these and the related issues have received in Kant scholarship. Rather than challenging Kant’s commentators, I have endeavored to think with Kant. (11)

     

     

    Yet without an engagement with a larger critical discourse the reader is left wondering what implications Gasché’s reading of Kant might have for larger critical debates. Gasché suggests cryptically that the Critique of Judgment “is important for the understanding of the fine arts, and particularly of modern and postmodern art” (3). Yet exactly how it is important he never makes clear.

     

    As a reading of the Third Critique, The Idea of Form is a difficult but compelling account of the Critique of Judgment. Its failure to engage larger conversations within Kant criticism or contemporary aesthetics leaves the significance of Gasché’s re-thinking of Kant’s aesthetics largely undetermined. Gasché highlights a number of aspects of the Third Critique which seem resonant with contemporary critical theory. Kant’s subject-centered aesthetic theory is consistent with that strain of contemporary theory interested in artistic consumption rather than production. Kant’s stress on an aesthetic treatment of nature would seem to be useful for eco-criticism. For my own part, what is particularly compelling about Gasché’s vision of Kant’s aesthetics is its success as a description of our actual experience of aesthetic objects. Eschewing any normative judgment on the role of art, the aesthetic object according to Kant’s model becomes absolutely individual and semantically rich. Because it is indeterminability which defines the work of art, such work enjoins endless interpretation. It is, therefore, the very possibility of infinite interpretability that defines the Kantian beautiful.

    Notes

     

    1. Gilles Deleuze’s lucid, and notably concise, Kant’s Critical Philosophy: The Doctrine of the Philosophy, similarly locates the Third Critique as the capstone of Kantian philosophy.

     

    2. It worth noting, however, that the relation between judgment and reason in judgments on the sublime is not symmetrical with a relation established between the reason and the understanding in judgments on the beautiful. Kant’s schematic style might lead one to this incorrect conclusion, for which Gasché’s reading is a helpful corrective.

    Works Cited

     

    • Deleuze, Gilles. Kant’s Critical Philosophy: The Doctrine of the Faculties. Trans. Hugh Tomlinson and Barbara Habberjan. London: Athlone, 1984.
    • Kant, Immanuel. The Critique of Judgment. Trans. Werner S. Pluhar. Indianapolis: Hackett, 1987.

     

  • How Postmodern Is It?

    Mark A. Cohen

    French Department
    Sarah Lawrence College
    mcohen@slc.edu

     

    Review of: Maurice Blanchot, The Book to Come. Trans. Charlotte Mandell. Stanford: Stanford UP, 2003.

     

    The Book to Come was published in 1959 and is composed entirely of articles written for the Chroniques section of the Nouvelle Revue Française between 1953 and 1958.1 It came at a particular juncture in Blanchot’s career, marking the end of his period of “retreat” into literature. After his passionate involvement with right-wing journalism, which had culminated in anti-Semitic articles against the Blum government in 1936-37, Blanchot refrained from making any direct political statements for another two decades. Instead he became a highly productive and widely recognized literary critic and novelist. In the 1950s alone, he wrote a hundred articles as well as four novellas or récits (as Blanchot called them then). Although these reflections on literature incorporated philosophical and political references, the latter always remained subordinate to literary concerns. In 1958, however, what Blanchot considered to be De Gaulle’s legalized coup d’état and the revelations of French war crimes in the Algerian conflict roused him to enter the political arena once more, this time on the left wing. Over the next three decades his writing and activities become more broadly engaged with issues that went beyond the strictly literary, in particular in the form of anguished reflections on the Holocaust and “Jewishness,” understood more as an existential category than as one restricted to a real historical or religious group. He also participated actively in the événements of 1968 on the side of the insurgent students. In a similar move toward engagement, responding to new art forms and philosophies, he abandoned fiction for a hybrid form of discourse that incorporated criticism, dialogue, and the fragmentary, becoming in turn a highly influential figure for radical French philosophy and writing of the 1960s and 70s.

     

    The Book to Come represents then the purest version we have of Blanchot littérateur in what proved to be his last major work of literary criticism. Emblematic of its exclusiveness in this regard was its close association with the NRF, which began publication in the 1950s after a ten-year hiatus. It became a flagship for a certain small-scale, even “provincial” variant of modernism in its apolitical promotion of a “pure” literature untethered to either ideological statements or grand projects. Under the guidance of the legendary Jean Paulhan, it promoted an investigation of the workshop of writing, printing short excerpts of novels, notebooks, diaries, and reflections by writer-aestheticians like Caillois, Cioran, Jouhandeau, Malraux, and others. Blanchot’s tortuous avoidance of direct reference to his prewar mésalliance has been dealt with at length by American critics. Steven Ungar, for one, finds in the title of The Book to Come an uncanny repression of one of Blanchot’s fascist essays of 1938 entitled “The Revolution to Come.” Indeed, looking at the structure and institutional self-identification of The Book to Come affirms just how comfortable he was in his attachment to the literary. The NRF was a tolerant milieu, defiantly indifferent to partisan, résistant polemics, and thus accommodating of former right-wingers like Blanchot. He quickly came to occupy a special role in the review, becoming what amounted to its house critic during the 1950s, well-placed to create an audience for his own fiction and that of others working in the same vein. The secure position he enjoyed is evidenced in a prefatory note that not only foregrounds his dual activities as both writer and critic but gives biographical information (however exiguous) that is completely uncharacteristic of his habitual reticence about such matters: “Maurice Blanchot, novelist and critic, was born in 1907. His life is wholly devoted to literature and the silence unique to it.”2 Equally unprecedented in the Blanchot corpus is a postfacial note referring to the essays’ provenance–“A little modified, these texts belong to a series of little essays published starting in 1953, in La Nouvelle Revue Française.”

     

    In comparison with his other nonfiction prose, The Book to Come lacks the central theoretical essay of its predecessors Faux pas (1943) and The Work of Fire (1949), the high level of abstraction and metaphysical drama of its sister-work The Space of Literature (1955), and the broad cultural-philosophical sweep of The Infinite Conversation (1969) and Friendship (1971).3 To be sure, the roughly contemporaneous Space of Literature shares with The Book to Come the same abyssal view of literature, a common metaphorics, and rhapsodic style. Nevertheless the former operates on a far more rarified level of ontology, in which a dramatic metaphysics of solitude, death, inspiration, and experience are programmatically interconnected with one another throughout the book as a whole. The Book to Come‘s essays, in contrast, converge toward the same end but separately. Even the opening essay, a retelling of the Sirens myth that describes how narrative works, is immediately followed not by a look at Kafka or Mallarmé’s treatment of Sirens, of which Blanchot was well aware, but by a specific case study of narrative in which Sirens have no obvious place: a review of Proust’s Jean Santeuil. This ad hoc alternation of general and particular is typical throughout.

     

    The essays in The Book to Come can be conveniently divided into three types: 1) the study of an individual author’s path to his Blanchottian masterpiece, including a subset of shorter pieces on contemporary works (by Beckett, Duras, Robbe-Grillet) that, as Blanchot sees it, simply perform in one way or another the essence of literature; 2) the generic study of narrative, notebook, diary, correspondence as they limn, resist, and adumbrate the same; 3) more general meditations on reading, a speculation on the “last” writer, symbolic interpretation, and publicity. It is precisely the relative dispersion of its essays and their corresponding embeddedness in the practical activity (as opposed to the ontology) of writing that reveals Blanchot’s aims so well. In The Book to Come we witness what amounts to an inductive procedure of collecting quite a wide range of examples of authors and genres with the intention of analyzing them in such a way that they confirm his own theoretical insights, literary historical intuitions, and fictional practices.4 The random spread of the monthly reviewer dovetails with the forging of an artistic credo. Many of these authors–Musil, Broch, Borges, and Hesse, for example–did not form part of Blanchot’s preferred modernist canon, and he never wrote about them again. An illustration of this more “professionalized” emphasis can be gleaned from a brief comparison of statements written more or less contemporaneously on the same topic taken from each of the respective books. In The Space of Literature, “to write is to enter into the affirmation of the solitude in which fascination threatens” (33); in The Book to Come, “every writer feels called to answer alone, through his own ignorance, for literature, for its future” (201). It is the difference between an ontological state in which one exists and a specific condition in which one fulfills a task, between space and time.

     

    The stakes of The Book to Come are well captured in the opening lines of “The Disappearance of Literature , ” the essay that begins the fourth section: “Where is literature going? . . . towards itself, its essence, which is disappearance” (195). Blanchot’s criticism from the 1950s charts this strangely circular journey to extinction and explains that literature must be understood to take place in a wholly other time and space than we are accustomed to. Because, strangely, it is precisely literature’s weakness that is its strength or rather its being. It brings a difference into human life in which the systems and ontologies that govern the real world of everyday exchange and rationality no longer apply. But this opposition is not underwritten by the ideology of the Romantic artist or utopian dreamer. The imaginary world is not a better world or more authentic–indeed it can only be truly critical of the existing world by not assuming any such implicit mastery. For substantive critique would require literature to take up the modalities of the non-literary, which for Blanchot means the successful carrying out of a project, the desire to represent, to claim authority, relay tradition, or move others to feel or do. Instead modern literature now tends to examine itself, the nature of the fictive act, and all this entails in terms of speaker, addressee, thought, and temporality/ies. (The difficulties of fitting this into any standard literary history are not something Blanchot examines with any rigor.)

     

    The basic trope governing the Blanchottian ontology of literature in The Book to Come might be called the recursive future and can be described in a simple equation: x = not-yet x. The equation works in both directions, both as a logical and as a temporal description. The being of x is only truly grasped as not yet existing. Any attempt (the result of what Blanchot calls “impatience”) to finish something and achieve it once and for all means that one will fail to do so. Only by realizing that it would be impossible does one do justice to it. This leaves us with the approach to the object and the experience of approaching. The whole linear apparatus of plan, execution, and goal is no longer applicable. The future of a book armed with this consciousness is not in its worldly future–who will read it, the world it will create, the imitators it will spawn, its place in literary history–but the reiteration of its quest to become literature, which is, paradoxically, a search for its original moment of emergence from the silence. Its future is a now that searches back in the past. The eponymous “book to come” then is not only the future of literature in history (though Blanchot does think that on some level), but books like Blanchot’s fiction that in conventional terms never end or even begin. The past here, likewise, does not mean the publicly historical past but the past that is always presupposed as the past in relation to this present moment in which we are reading. Such an unwonted order of temporality also has repercussions for all the components of the world that are presented (if not represented) in texts: the self in literature is always a moment within the text, a fading-reappearing instance of enunciation rather than a substantial, well-defined character; the encounter with others is always impossible yet framed by desire and curiosity; the event is no longer something represented as if it had existed but is the ever-receding quest for its own existence as we experience it in the performative instant. In this intensively temporalized view of literature there is no place for literature as a monumental achievement. Reversing the usual worldly valuations, in Blanchot’s view success in fulfilling one’s projects would be failure in terms of the search for literature and vice versa. As a result, in the The Book to Come‘s penultimate essay, Mallarmé’s oeuvre is said to be most truly formed not from a triumphant sequence of masterpieces but from the detritus of his never-carried-out plan to write an encyclopedic sequence of works to replace the world. According to Blanchot, its wild ambition is realized not because it does replace the world with another but because it reveals so clearly literature’s inevitable failure to do so. Similarly, in the essay on Artaud, Blanchot homes in on the fact that it is Artaud’s failed poems that arouse Jacques Rivière’s interest. Ultimately, it is the penumbra of the poem, his correspondence with Artaud about the latter’s state of mind, that ends up becoming a successful work.

     

    Each of the authors surveyed is shown in The Book to Come arriving at the same conclusions about the nature of literature as Blanchot, whether consciously or unconsciously. The works Blanchot discusses and celebrates are shown to triumph when they have successfully avoided two temptations of the modern writer that are metaphysically impossible to attain and in any case undesirable: the Scylla of immediacy, a return to nature or pure self-expression, and the Charybdis of reference (novelistic “thickness,” the evocation of a milieu, encyclopedic completeness) or culture (copying the great styles of French literature). This tale is retailed over and over again. Proust in Jean Santeuil is caught between a wish to transcribe simple unconnected moments of experience and the desire to provide a detailed depiction of France during the Dreyfus Affair. Broch wants his great work to cover both scientific rationality and cultural dissolution. Rousseau oscillates between the desire for immediacy and the hope of communicating his great vision of human justice, which necessarily requires the adoption of social conventions and so on. In each case what they have to learn is that the right path for them to take as writers is the path that leads in neither of these directions, one that in fact leads to the full assumption of literary language and the depersonalized form of open, mobile temporality that comes with it. Something in each writer resists the final step but their masterpieces take it.

     

    In the generic essays (as I called them above), Blanchot articulates the idea that the specific temporality of literature is opposed to that of everyday life and rational calculation and that literature is able nevertheless to seep into the world surreptitiously–not necessarily to substitute for the everyday but rather to be always available to problematize it unremittingly. In the essay “Diary and Story,” for instance, diaries and notebooks are clearly separated from the work by Blanchot, who sees them as tied to the everyday because they use dates and events to act as a timorous defense against the radicality of what he considers the truly literary. Yet by the end of this essay, the diary’s “quest without concern for results” looks a lot like a Blanchottian work, whereas the quotidian is now said to be infected by literature once it has been reconfigured as diary (188). This whirligig of apparently separate categories that end up intermingling offers an early, abstract template for Blanchot’s complex and obscure “politics” of literature.

     

    The famous opening essay, entitled “Encountering the Imaginary,” uses Ulysses’s non-meeting with the Sirens to reveal how even as he, the man of technique, can experience the reality of a dangerous discovery, he makes sure he is in no real danger.5 By employing his technology in the form of wax in the ears of his men and ropes to hold himself fast, he in fact ensures that no meeting took place.6 Yet as Blanchot views it, Ulysses loses out anyway because he ends up telling the story of the Sirens and becomes Homer in the process. He tells of his failure to reach them even as they have arrived and keep on arriving in the imaginary medium of his discourse. This now-installed impossibility of completion gives birth to its own genre-to-come: the récit. Technique is something that operates in the world of everyday exchange and the linear temporality of calculation. It lends itself quite comfortably to the creation of narratives, too, describing exciting events, and holding the interest of its listeners. But Blanchot shifts the focus from the telling of an adventure (Ulysses meeting the Sirens) to the defeat of the adventure genre itself from within (Homer-Ulysses telling his story). The revelation of the literariness of the adventure story means that the adventure itself becomes interminable in the constant possibility of its retelling (on the syntagmatic plane) and of its being told differently (on the paradigmatic plane). This is Blanchot’s mythic retelling of his own coming to narrative. The non-meeting of Siren and Navigator is structurally parallel to the basic setting of Blanchot’s novellas of the 1950s: two or three individuals approaching, exploring, but never finally knowing each other. It is one more sign of how closely The Book to Come is linked in practical terms to Blanchot’s contemporaneously written fictional works–his own books to come in both senses of the expression–that in this opening chapter he is actually defining the genre of his own fiction, the récit: “Narrative [récit] is not the relating of an event but this event itself, the approach of this event, the place where it is called on to unfold” (6). Elsewhere in his critical pieces, he virtually never refers to his fictional work, even obliquely.

     

    It is one of the fervent hopes of the “Crossing Aesthetics” series, edited by Werner Hamacher, to promote the passage for aesthetics to politics from within deconstruction itself and thereby preserve the halting, involuted complexity of deconstructive reading in the public sphere. Blanchot can fairly be considered the series’ most honored figure: no fewer than three of his books are represented in its catalogue as well as a number of others that are inspired by or directly devoted to him. Yet we should note that this much desired passage does not occur in The Book to Come, which figures politics only in filigree. Blanchot is truly an uncanny precursor for deconstruction here because his politics remain obstinately veiled, retaining a troubling and insistent vehemence that is, as always, coupled with an equally unflappable lack of specificity. A number of the more general essays do allude to important Blanchottian notions of questioning and resistance, that is, the refusal to accept anything as such, a sort of anarchic negativity without any positive component or utopian hope beyond it. Literature is said to make all events equal and equally possible, thus challenging–implicitly–all fixed hierarchies and established values. The fundamental opposition of literary modes of operation to those of the bourgeois world with its goal-oriented work, time, and technology is clear but left without any details or applications to the contemporary context. The beginnings of Blanchot’s deep critical engagement with Judaism, which is an essential element in his politics of the 1960s, can certainly be discerned in the titles of the essays “Prophetic Speech” and “The Secret of the Golem”–but only in their titles. “The Secret of the Golem,” for instance, discusses the confident use of symbolism in literature as emblematic of wrong-headed attempts to make language represent the world. Jews and “Jewish-ness” as such are otherwise absent.

     

    The most overtly political moment in The Book to Come comes at the end. The final essay, “The Power and the Glory,” does bring up an important cultural theme very much in the air in France in the 1950s: the relationship of the writer to mass culture. Blanchot in effect compares the alienation imposed on the reader by literature with that of the public on the individual. What might in Heideggerian terms look like a fall into the “they” or more conventionally and nostalgically the loss of identifiable human beings (“friends”) who might read one’s books is actually embraced by Blanchot as a happy meeting of the twain. In his closing lines, he is implicitly celebrating the equalizing powerlessness that language can, if understood properly, induce us to accept and thus clearing the ground for his, the writer’s, return to politics. In a rarely remarked allusion to Orpheus that is no longer that of The Space of Literature, where it is used as an allegory of Blanchottian creation, here the poet is said not to find the artwork by losing its object but to arrive at his speech by joining the flow of his song with the indifferent murmur of public culture:

     

    If today the writer, thinking of going down to the underworld, is content with going out into the street, that is because the two rivers [the underground and above-ground Styx] . . . passing through each other, tend to be confused. . . . the profound original rumor . . . is not unlike the unspeaking speech . . . the "public mind." (250)

     

     

    Notes

     

    chercher, recherche, navigation
    1. With the exception of his brief review of Bataille’s Madame Edwarda.
    2. “Maurice Blanchot, romancier et critique, est né en 1907. Sa vie est entièrement vouée à la littérature et au silence qui lui est propre.” The expression “lui est propre” could also be translated “which belongs to it” or “which is properly its own.”
    3. The latter two books contained essays from the 1950s as well as the 1960s that Blanchot had not collected in book form at the time but were philosophical and cultural in nature and so more congruent with his later interests.
    4. Space does not permit any detailed consideration of the numerous echoes of his 1957 récit Le Dernier Homme. One essay, for instance, is about “The Death of the Last Writer.”
    5. Mandell’s felicitous translation for “La rencontre de l’imaginaire.”
    6. The French word Blanchot uses is technique, which recalls Heidegger’s 1953 essay attacking the nihilism produced by modern Technik.

     

    Work Cited

     

    • Blanchot, Maurice. The Space of Literature. Stanford: Stanford UP, 2003.

     

  • Danger Mouse’s Grey Album, Mash-Ups, and the Age of Composition

    Philip A. Gunderson

    English Department
    San Diego Miramar College
    pgunders73@hotmail.com

     

    Review of: Danger Mouse (Brian Burton), The Grey Album, Bootleg Recording

     

    Depending on one’s perspective, Danger Mouse’s (Brian Burton’s) Grey Album represents a highpoint or a nadir in the state of the recording arts in 2004. From the perspective of music fans and critics, Burton’s creation–a daring “mash-up” of Jay-Z’s The Black Album and the Beatles’ eponymous 1969 work (popularly known as The White Album)–shows that, despite the continued corporatization of music, the DIY ethos of 1970s punk remains alive and well, manifesting in sampling and low-budget, “bedroom studio” production values. From the perspective of the recording industry, Danger Mouse’s album represents the illegal plundering of some of the most valuable property in the history of pop music (the Beatles’ sound recordings), the sacrilegious re-mixing of said recordings with a capella tracks of an African American rapper, and the electronic distribution of the entire album to hundreds of thousands of listeners who appear vexingly oblivious to current copyright law. That there would be a schism between the interests of consumers and the recording industry is hardly surprising; tension and antagonism characterize virtually all forms of exchange in capitalist economies. What is perhaps of note is that these tensions have escalated to the point of the abandonment of the exchange relationship itself. Music fans, fed up with the high prices (and outright price-fixing) of commercially available music, have opted to share music files via peer-to-peer file sharing networks, and record labels are attempting in response to coerce music fans back into the exchange relationship. The Grey Album and the mash-up form in general are symptomatic of an historical moment in which the forces of music production (production technology, artistic invention, and web-based networks of music distribution) have greatly exceeded the present relations of production expressed by artist/label contracts, music property rights, and traditional producer/consumer dichotomies.

     

    The Forces of Production

     

    Mash-up artists such as Danger Mouse have shown how the recording industry has been rendered superfluous by advances in music production technology. Artists once had to play the record companies’ games in order to gain access to precious time in a recording studio; today, a “bedroom producer” can create a professional sounding album with a personal computer alone. (Brian Burton is known to have used Sony’s Acid Pro.) Indeed, insofar as they want to survive, real studios have had to integrate “virtual” studios into their setup. Many commercial production houses incorporate software into their own environments so that their customers will be able to transfer their work between PC and studio, where it can be further processed. One is tempted to speculate that late capitalist society is on the cusp of the “composition” stage of musical development, as described in Jacques Attali’s Noise: The Political Economy of Music. Attali argues that music’s social function has passed through three distinct stages: sacrifice (the assertion of control over violence), representation (the creation of socially meaningful works), and repetition (the reproduction and dissemination of music apart from social context). The fourth and final stage, “composition,” is essentially utopian: the production of music by and for its own consumers. The traditional opposition of the active producer and passive consumer disappears in the age of composition. Although music production software remains far from universally accessible (most of the planet’s population does not have easy access to a telephone, let alone a computer), the increasingly wide availability of powerful computers in advanced capitalist countries suggests a gradual democratization of technology that does foster utopian impulses.

     

    This change in the material conditions of production has significant aesthetic consequences. Noodling about in a studio was not an option except for the wealthiest bands (such as the Beatles), and, as a result, most artists treated the recording environment more as a mimetic recording instrument, as a means of capturing a live musical performance or at least creating the semblance of a live musical performance, than as a musical instrument in its own right. Liberated from the traditional recording studio (and its institutional supports), the contemporary musician is free to experiment at his or her leisure with ideas and recording techniques that would have been considered too unconventional and even risky in the past. The Grey Album is a perfect example of the kind of artistic experimentation that can result: combining a capella tracks of a famous rapper with pop classics by a band whose record label has never licensed samples of their music for use by other artists is something that would not have happened in a professional recording studio under any circumstances. When artists cease to be constrained by the demands of the market (which include both studio executives’ demands for a hit single and the restrictive demands of today’s consumer, who has been conditioned to dislike any music that makes its own demands on the listener), they may pursue other logics internal to their work. In Attali’s age of composition, the idea of aesthetic autonomy appears on the horizon.

     

    The audio cut-and-paste, pastiche technique of The Grey Album might seem an unlikely candidate for such a modernist notion as “aesthetic autonomy,” but in a culture saturated by sham originality (and the actualization of art in the commodity form) the only viable gesture towards autonomy would have to be the representation of cultural contradiction itself. The Grey Album, with its violation of copyright laws, realizes the extent to which said laws have been put to purposes in contradiction with their original intent. That is, the original function of copyright was to encourage social advance by giving creators a financial stake in their work and by insisting that intellectual property become, after a reasonable period of time, public property. Walt Disney has long since been dead, but his intellectual property, Mickey Mouse and friends, has passed on to another legal “person,” i.e., Disney, Inc., who/that has successfully fought to extend copyright protections for reasons of “personal” profit. Public benefit has been effectively factored out of current copyright law. Monopoly capital has turned a legal spur to innovation and creativity into a tool for artistic repression.

     

    Although its title might suggest a homogenizing synthesis of opposites (the admixture of black and white to form grey–a dialectical fog in which all musicians are grey, as it were), part of The Grey Album‘s vibrancy comes from the way it highlights the culture industry’s specious opposition of white 1960s Brit-pop and twenty-first century black American hip-hop. In the contemporary climate of administrated music, in which radio bandwidth has been exploded into a stelliferous system of synchronic generic differences (classic rock, alternative rock, “urban,” classical, country, etc.) and which interpellates a corresponding “type” of consumer, The Grey Album‘s juxtaposition of the Beatles and Jay-Z takes on the character of a musical contradiction in terms. That The Grey Album can be regarded as such a novelty (even as a musical miracle) belies the extent to which the enforcement of categorical differences in administrated music discourages critical reflection on–and simple awareness of–the history of popular music and its innate syncretism, its vital habit of “borrowing” across the lines of race, class, gender, and national identity. Danger Mouse’s Grey Album forcibly reminds its listeners of the diachronic becoming of popular music. By mashing-up Jay-Z and the Beatles, Danger Mouse, himself a black Briton, highlights the fact that African American hip hop is in many ways a direct descendent of sixties-era British rock–and that British rock is largely a descendent of early twentieth century African American blues, which in turn owes something to Christian spirituals sung on plantations. Introspective listeners will recognize the album’s dialogic structure, and some may even be moved to ask questions about the asymmetrical relations of power that saturate the evolution of popular music.

     

    The Grey Album is not, however, only a history lesson–it is itself an act of resistance. It is, to employ Deleuzian terminology, a kind of “war machine” at work within and against the edifice of mass music. It is rhizomatic in the way it forms transversal relations between genres that have been arborescently structured by the recording industry. The bastard births of the mash-up form–the offspring of forbidden sonic cross-pollinations–tangle the genealogical lines of musical descent, thus leading to the common disparagement of sampling as a form of musical incest. Indeed, the very metaphor of the “mash-up” suggests a process of destructuring, an introduction of confusion, a production of indistinction in which this cannot be told from that. One could look askance at mash-ups, viewing them as puerile, disrespectful mucking about with other people’s property, but one could also celebrate that very puerility insofar as it is anti-oedipal–insofar as it short-circuits the culture industry’s normally enforced boundaries between disparate genres of music. The sense of humor immanent to a good mash-up (such as Soulwax’s “Smells Like Booty,” a fusion of Nirvana and Destiny’s Child), seems particularly amenable to explanation in terms of Freud’s theory of humor as a mechanism that relies on the sudden lifting of the repression on psychic energy. Our smiles and laughter signify our liberation from an excessively restrictive horizon of musical expectations. Psychic energy that had been channeled into rote pathways suddenly streams in unpredictable directions across the surface of culture. The mash-up artist is not at all the sad militant bemoaned by Foucault in his preface to Anti-Oedipus but rather an ethicist in the most Spinozist sense, perpetually in battle with the sad passions that prevent our bodies from realizing their affective powers.

     

    Another undeniably “puerile” pleasure in the mash-up form (in addition to its proclivity for crossing genres) is its willingness to dance on the graves of pop music’s forbears. Danger Mouse’s gesture with The Grey Album is in some ways analogous to Duchamp’s gesture with L.H.O.O.Q. Just as Duchamp scandalized bourgeois fetishists of Renaissance art by painting a mustache on the Mona Lisa (and implying with his title that the original model had a “hot ass”), Danger Mouse zeroes in on the musical institution the Beatles have become and appropriates their sounds into a new, critical context. If art is to move forward, both artists seem to be implying, it can only do so when repressive pieties are broken down and humor injected into the mix.

     

    Distribution Networks

     

    Danger Mouse initially produced a few thousand copies of The Grey Album for friends and distributed copies to independent music retailers. The modest scale of production suggests that the artist’s motivations were far from mercenary. Danger Mouse stood to gain little profit, if any, from his efforts. The Grey Album CD featured Jay-Z in the foreground with his “backing band” arrayed behind him:

     

    Figure 1: The Grey Album
    Design © 2004 kaos
    <worldofkaos.com>

     

    As soon as it became aware of the compact disc, EMI issued cease-and-desist papers to Brian Burton–he was not to produce additional copies of the album and all distributors were to destroy any copies remaining in their possession. EMI’s ham-fisted attempts at repression provoked a grass-roots Internet campaign that effectively demonstrated the ability of peer-to-peer file sharing technology to supplant the distribution of data encoded physical media (CDs, tapes, records, etc). On 26 February, “Grey Tuesday,” nearly two hundred websites defied EMI and posted the entirety of The Grey Album in MP3 file format for easy, free download to any computer connected to the Internet. Well publicized by word of mouth, popular media, and the Web, Grey Tuesday was an unqualified (and unauthorized) success. Disobedient consumers, who had not been given the option of purchasing the album through “legitimate” commercial channels, downloaded in excess of one million Grey Album tracks. Had it been available for purchase at a brick-and-mortar store, such numbers would have put the album firmly in Billboard’s Top Ten.

     

    Grey Tuesday, in its scope and success, can be taken as something akin to the dawning of a consumer class consciousness–members of the Internet community had the collective knowledge and means to put a popular work of art into circulation without the support or permission of the recording industry. One could say that consumers have taken over the distribution of musical goods and services to the detriment of those who have heretofore controlled the means of musical production. The near-instantaneous, viral replication of information on a global network renders moot the legal formalities of trademark and copyright. The traditional radio station, with its fixed formats and mind-numbingly repetitive playlists, has been effectively displaced by technologies that allow music fans to specify what they want to hear and when they want to hear it. Radio and online broadcasting remain useful avenues for discovering new artists, but control over the music is no longer contingent upon the exchange of cash. In the age of digital communism, a song’s exchange value evaporates as soon as that song hits the network.

     

    And it is a matter of communism. Although file-sharing has been besmirched with the label of “piracy” by the institutional purveyors of pop, the phenomenon actually suggests a heartening generosity on the part of consumers. As much as consumers are taught to fetishize status symbols (commodities that identify one as a member of the “haves” as opposed to the “have-nots”), file-swapping suggests that they are inclined to share whenever they stand to lose nothing. The record labels will, or course, respond that consumers will collectively lose when the industry can no longer afford to develop and market new talent. To this objection one may answer that the atrophy of one arm of the culture industry hardly amounts to public hardship. As consumers become accustomed to looking for good music online, they will need to rely on commercial tastemakers less. They may, indeed, find the industry’s “pushing” of mass entertainment increasingly odious. To approach the same issue from a slightly different angle, file sharing threatens to dispel musical ignorance and the industry that profits there from. Music fans trained to think that the major labels are the only sources of music worth listening to discover in the Internet a repository of innovative, challenging music–music, indeed, whose only evident failing has been that it is perhaps too innovative and too challenging for benumbed Clear Channel Communications listeners.

     

    If Attali is correct that music acts as a harbinger of social change, then artists like Danger Mouse may be taken as cultural prophets. They preach a new economics: the communism of simulacra, the unrestricted sharing of digital copies without originals. This new economics deterritorializes the culture industry; it threatens all industries that have traditionally profited as the producers and gatekeepers of information. Whereas communist regimes in the previous century could not withstand the onslaught of cheap commodities from capitalist countries, today we find capitalist countries increasingly vulnerable to the world’s data commies–Danger Mouse, Linus Torvald, Shawn Fanning, and all those who are dedicated to the free flow of information.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Attali, Jacques. Noise: The Political Economy of Music. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1985.
    • Deleuze, Gilles, and Félix Guattari. Anti-Oedipus: Capitalism and Schizophrenia. New York: Viking, 1977.
    • Freud, Sigmund. Jokes and Their Relation to the Unconscious. New York: Norton, 1963.

     

  • Theory’s Hubris

    Andrew Timms

    Department of Music
    University of Bristol
    A.Timms@bristol.ac.uk

     

    Review of: Helmling, Steven. The Success and Failure of Fredric Jameson: Writing, the Sublime, and the Dialectic of Critique.Albany: SUNY P, 2001.

     

    While Fredric Jameson’s status as Marxism’s leading theorist of postmodernity is secure–and his influence on many arts and humanities disciplines undeniable–his work, when considered as a whole, has provoked comparatively little secondary literature.1 There are several possible explanations for this situation, not the least of which is the fact that Jameson is still a very active writer. Recent years, for instance, have witnessed the production of a theoretical study of modernity and modernism (A Singular Modernity), as well as the publication in the New Left Review of several important articles (“Globalization and Political Strategy,” “The Politics of Utopia”) covering issues that have long awaited an extended Jamesonian treatment. Significantly, this recent work has tended to add something new to the critical mix. One suspects that Jameson’s theoretical position is not yet completely unfurled, which makes it hard for the critic to treat his oeuvre in terms of any finalized trajectory. But it is surely the sheer difficulty of Jameson’s writing that has discouraged critics from engaging with it at length. Steven Helmling’s excellent recent study, The Success and Failure of Fredric Jameson, is not the first book devoted to Jameson, but it is the first to capture and address the peculiar nature of this difficulty, which Helmling recognizes as arising not merely from the complexity of Jameson’s ideas but, to an even greater extent, from the special qualities of his style. Helmling gives this difficult style of writing a convincing theoretical exegesis and defense, one that grows out of Jameson’s own work in a manner that is intensely enjoyable. The result is a study that should set the tone for future treatments of Jameson, whether or not one agrees with its final evaluation.

     

    Helmling’s Success

     

    What Helmling latches onto first of all is the extraordinary degree to which, in Jameson’s work, style is written into the very textures of the ideas that it carries. As anyone who has ever tried to summarize Jameson’s seminal text on postmodernism will know, the attempt leads only toward an unsettling and wholly unsatisfactory scholarly asymptote. If you condense or restate a passage from Jameson, you seem to lose all its meaning, its force, its gestural value. As with other figures in the Western Marxist tradition–most notably Theodor Adorno–the very notion of secondary literature thus becomes intensely problematic: the critic must manage to acknowledge the inconsumable nature of the text while at the same time consuming it for his or her own purposes. And, as also with Adorno, no thoughtful reader can deny, even in the midst of these obstacles to paraphrasis or assimilation, the formidable agitation, depth, insight, and provocation of the writing. Indeed, the underlying appeal of Jameson’s work, at a time when synchrony and surface predominate–a time, in other words, that no one has theorized more adequately than Jameson himself–might well be one final glimmer of the essential redemptive promise of Marxist culture-criticism. Somehow, almost despite itself, each one of Jameson’s books tempts the reader even while inevitably proving too testing, too damn high-handed, too beautiful for its own good.

     

    No doubt this all sounds faintly ridiculous to analytical Anglo-American ears. Straight-talking–the markets hate uncertainty–can surely get the job done. What place might Jameson’s texts, packed full of qualifiers, pitfalls, reversals, subordinations, find in the world of just-in-time delivery? The answer is: a rather small one. To those who have no time for Jameson, one can only reply, with heavy heart, that Jameson’s writing might at least inform them why they have no time for it; certainly one can agree with Helmling when he says that the “smallest of Jameson’s detractors–the ones, say, who establish a ‘bad writing’ contest for the express purpose of annually awarding him the first prize–need not detain us” (143). It seems more appropriate to acknowledge Perry Anderson’s assessment of Jameson: “we are dealing with a great writer” (72). But this itself must be radically contextualized by Jameson’s own frequent assertions that the time of the daunting modernist styles, the great auteurs, has passed. What might underlie the dizzying interplay of intellectual cross-currents in such a situation?

     

    At the very least, we have come a long way from Jameson’s early Marxism and Form, whose conclusion remarked that even “if ours is a critical age, it does not seem to me very becoming in critics to exalt their activity to the level of literary creation, as is loosely done in France today” (415). Later, in his 1982 Diacritics interview, Jameson remarked that while

     

    I don’t share the widely spread and self-serving attitude that today criticism and theory are as “creative” as creative writing used to be, still there is the private matter of my own pleasure in writing these texts; it is a pleasure tied up in the peculiarities of my “difficult” style (if that’s what it is). I wouldn’t write them unless there were some minimal gratification in it for myself, and I hope we are not yet too alienated or instrumentalized to reserve some small place for what used to be handicraft satisfaction, even in the composition of abstract theory. (88)

     

    The much more recent The Cultural Turn, however, casts matters in an altogether different light: the difference between creation and criticism is merely an “old anti-intellectual distinction,” which casts only a “dreary light” on our present situation (85). One of that volume’s most powerful essays, “‘End of Art’ or ‘End of History’?,” argues that “theory emerged from the aesthetic itself, from the culture of the modern” (85)–a phrase that one can imagine functioning in the future as yet another Jamesonian sound-bite–so the transferral of creative energies from one to the other, particularly in those theorists such as Barthes and Derrida (not to mention Jameson himself) whose writing is calculatedly stylized in ways that suggest modernist experimentation, turns out to be much more significant than the younger Jameson once expected.

     

    Not everyone would accept the supposed narrowing of this gap between criticism and creativity, of course. But regardless of whether this theory is at all convincing, it does at least point back to one of Marxism and Form‘s most persistent themes, namely, the difficulty of dialectical thought. In that early study, the links between criticism and its object were typically construed so as to allow dialectical thought its intransigent, challenging resistance as a corollary of the inherent contradictions of its objects. This resistance was designed to highlight the possible ideological function of much bourgeois criticism, with its “anaemic transparency” (in Terry Eagleton’s words [68]), but it was also quite specifically deployed against the frictionless surfaces of Anglo-American contemporary cultural experience–“a dream world of artificial stimuli and televised experience,” to quote Jameson’s prescient, almost Baudrillardian phrase (Marxism and Form xviii). Another of Jameson’s most evocative sentences from Marxism and Form‘s memorable preface puts this in rather more physical terms: “real thought demands a descent into the materiality of language and a consent to time itself in the form of the sentence” (xiii). It is ironic that Jameson himself thus offers the most persuasive analysis of the effects of his own texts, for there can be no better way than this to conjure up the aching appeal of Jameson’s books in situations far more unreal than was ever the case in 1971; faced with the essential triviality of contemporary Anglo-American life, each of Jameson’s volumes tempts us cruelly with promises of a redemption for which few have time or a care. How many people do not toss Postmodernism aside (no mean feat!), turning instead to the cherry-picking anthologies which really are “intended to speed the reader across a sentence in such a way that he can salute a readymade idea in passing” (Marxism and Form xiii), wondering why this pretentious stylist could not say what he has to say in a fraction of the space, and without constructing such a trenchant, brick wall of knowledge–the brusque authority of style itself, with all its gnarled roots and branches?

     

    This, at least, is one possible and probably frequent reaction to Jameson’s writing–that is, according to Helmling, the “not uncommon view that Jameson’s work is important despite the turgid writing” (146-47). Helmling’s survey of Jameson’s work and achievement foregrounds in what seems to be a wholly novel manner the centrality of Jameson’s writing to his critical enterprise, and claims with considerable justification that such readings as I have here caricatured are “failed reading[s] altogether, and of a peculiarly ironic sort.” For

     

    Jameson himself insists that “dialectical” writing itself must be the measure and the authentication of any project of critique, and to miss that–not as a talking point but as the very quick and shudder of the experience of reading Jameson–is to miss very nearly all. (147)

     

    This “quick and shudder” must surely be some logical descendant of the dialectical shock explicated so warmly in Marxism and Form. Helmling, however, takes this effect further and demands it of critical responses to Jameson just as it is a feature of Jameson’s critical writing.

     

    What Helmling proposes here is not a kind of endless dialectical torture, or undue critical agitation or difficulty for the mere sake of itself: instead, his study manages cogently to explain why such responses cut straight to the heart of the Jamesonian matter. Central to this is what Helmling terms the dialectic of the scriptible: this familiar term of Barthes (from S/Z) originally designated those types of text whose very writing invited, encouraged, or forced the reader into a creative role of actually producing the text while reading it, as opposed to the more consumable lisible text, one written to read itself, as it were (Helmling 22-3). Helmling shows how Jameson subtly transfers the meaning of scriptible from that of reading to writing; so in Jameson, the scriptible comes to designate “sentences whose gestus arouses the desire to emulate it, sentences that make you want to write sentences of your own” (“The Ideology of the Text” 21), or as he puts it in Signatures of the Visible, “Barthes thought certain kinds of writing–perhaps we should say, certain kinds of sentences–to be scriptible, because they made you wish to write further yourself; they stimulated imitation, and promised a pleasure in combining language that had little enough to do with the notation of new ideas” (2). The scriptible thus foregrounds the sentence and the style which is manifested in–as well as created by–such sentences. In such a way do we begin to read off from a writer’s semantic units the fundamental historical marker–style–through which the various contradictions of a moment will be agitated, repressed, or dealt with in any number of ways.

     

    This, then, is something like Jameson’s use of the notion of scriptible, and one which, as Helmling points out, is far from the more fashionable ideas of intertextuality or the heavily aestheticized écriture. It should be quite obvious that the scriptible is thus, for want of a better mode of description, a way in which dialectical criticism can, literally, get close to its objects–and, remembering Marxism and Form, work through the insights of various “competing” theories before subsuming them in some larger body of thought that can adequately theorize both their advantages and their limitations. And as Helmling notes, in Jameson’s study of Sartre,

     

    “style” finally means something like the total meaning or (better) the cumulative authorial “gestus,” the characteristic movement, the (as it were) authorial carriage, the verbal body language, of an oeuvre–a way of conceiving literary labor (and success) rooted in the thematics of the writer as culture-hero, a producer of “works”–indeed, in all its most fully-blown romantic/modernist senses, an “author.” (24)

     

    So the scriptible does not imply a sell-out in the face of the various slogans proclaiming the death of both authors and even subjects; in fact, Jameson purposefully refashions it into a much more nuanced tool, one that is fundamental to the dialectical method.

     

    But the scriptible is, to be sure, some kind of measure of influence, although (as Helmling cautions) it works in no simple causal manner: compare, for instance, the very different mannerisms of Barthes and Jameson: “no particularity of Jameson’s verbal style or mannerism would ever ‘remind’ anyone of Barthes” (25). And it clearly does not measure ideological influence or sympathy, since Jameson has written with considerable brio on Wyndham Lewis (a study subtitled “The Modernist as Fascist”), and he has retained throughout his career an interest in Heidegger, even going so far as to admit having “some sneaking admiration for Heidegger’s attempt at political commitment, and find[ing] the attempt itself morally and aesthetically preferable to apolitical liberalism (provided its ideals remain unrealized)” (Postmodernism 257)–a statement that truly makes one blink, even if its sentiment–the value of commitment over hands-off liberalism–is familiar enough. Instead of simple homage, the scriptible seems often to be prompted by and to entail difficulty: the figures to whom Jameson is attracted are often, especially in his earlier writings, authors whose work is calculatedly impenetrable, from Heidegger to Lyotard, from Deleuze and Guattari to Lacan (Helmling 26). The sheer effort that these writers’ prose demands becomes a style that Jameson’s work will also deploy.

     

    Evidently, however, the scriptible as a mode of criticism, even when “successfully” executed, risks failures of various kinds. The most signal of these is the implication that such a writerly style may be regarded as mere ornament: hence the possible view that Jameson is profound despite his style. Another of the more obvious ways in which such a criticism might fail is by its reversion to a mere promotion or evocation of textuality, the sort of aestheticizing mentioned earlier that might aim to distort the underlying contradictions that motivate the text’s form, or even to bracket them (and reality) altogether (Helmling 27). More damaging still is what Jameson calls “thematization,” by which it seems he means the sort of undialectical analytical habits so beloved of Anglo-American intellectuals, whereby positions are briskly summarized with none of the hard graft of Jameson’s laborious workings, which typically give opponents their due. In other words, the resistance to thematization is closely related to a resistance to commodification in particular and mystification more generally–and with this we begin to see that the entire problematic is ultimately that of reification itself.

     

    These are some of the ways in which critical practice might fail in its pursuit or cautious emulation of a scriptible; Helmling, however, adds to these by considering the particular styles of Barthes and Adorno, two of Jameson’s most important influences. From Barthes it is clear that style itself can become a Sartrean piece of historical baggage, merely a marker of the guilt that literature brings with itself. Barthes’s notion of white writing, an ascetic, style-less style, is one attempt to renounce this guilt or at least deal with it in some way that remains utopian; but such a style cannot be hypostasized, and sooner or later it falls beneath the feet of history to be imprinted with the stamp of its own distinctive moment. What had been a utopian gesture is gradually estranged, in the Brechtian sense, to become just another stylistic convention among others. Adorno, however, is a very different matter: he does not express utopian thoughts so openly, even where they scar and bruise the skin of his texts. Here the question of failure is asked with troubling urgency, and the failures themselves are asserted “so potently that even the most ‘numbed’ or conscienceless reader cannot help [feel] their sting” (Helmling 37):

     

    some kinds of “success”–the kind likeliest to be acclaimed as such by the dominant culture apparatuses–are of interest only as symptoms, if they aspire to no more than a facile manipulation of audience responses; whereas some kinds of “failure”–what the culture apparatuses ignore or shrug off–achieve something more dialectical and authentic precisely because (or to the extent that) they eschew such easy aims to probe, to force themselves up against, the limits of the possible itself. . . . The truest “success” . . . results from a calculated, deliberate, and self-conscious embrace of failure–though that way of putting it (indeed, any way of putting it that so baldly uses the word “success”) risks seeming to have mistaken the point of the exercise. (Helmling 39)

     

    Criticism cannot free itself from the problems of ideological failure or the guilt inherent in art, even if Barthes thinks that “literature itself just might” (Helmling 43). In this way the dialectic of the scriptible is really a rewriting of what Jameson (in The Political Unconscious) calls the dialectic of utopia and ideology, the way in which utopian visions are perpetually challenged by their propensity to dissolve into ideology. But as Helmling notes in a marvellous passage that radiates signs of its author’s own attraction to Jameson’s scriptiblesentences,

     

    Jameson’s own writing re-enacts the exemplary failures he identifies in Barthes and Adorno, thereby securing (or “emulating”) some measure of the success he praises them for. That is, there is an emancipatory leavening of “linguistic optimism” in the scriptible that can enact necessity and failure, yet still attest at least some (utopian) possibility of their being overcome. Hence the excitement of Jameson’s early prose: it can project a failure imperative so bracingly as to seem to loosen its strictures. Those labyrinthine sentences, zigzagging between qualifiers and hedges, subordinations and sub-subordinations, feeling their way as if to a period not foreseen when the sentence began, whose surprises prompt fresh departures in their turn, enact the obstacles, limits, or contradictions they pursue and confront, but also, paradoxically, suspend or “neutralize,” ad lib., some of the law-like force of those very contradictions and limits that ought to have proscribed such suspensions or neutralizations in the first place. (45)

     

    From difficulty, in other words, comes a faint glimmer of redemptive light.

     

    All of this changes as postmodernism gradually comes onto the scene. Helmling argues that the earlier stoic and tragic style gives way to something that feels very different: “the prose remains as allusive and inward as ever, but with an affective charge much larger and more accessible, more immediate (in the colloquial sense) than before” (122). Anyone who has read Marxism and Form will immediately notice the very different texture of the famous essay on postmodernism (Postmodernism 1-54), over whose surface it is so much easier to skid (which presumably accounts to some extent for the essay’s wide dissemination). In fact, the Postmodernism book is arguably anomalous in Jameson’s output: there is simply nothing like it, barring perhaps The Cultural Turn. That the Postmodernism book is something of a one-off as well as simultaneously the volume through which many people first encounter Jameson should give us pause: one wonders how many people have an inaccurate or inadequate appreciation of Jameson as a result. But regardless of the different feel of Postmodernism, it is still characteristically difficult, even if it deploys that difficulty in different ways. In fact, Helmling claims convincingly that, once again, we have to read the difficulties as part and parcel of the writing of the criticism itself. So whereas in the early works the dialectic of ideology and utopia loomed large through a scriptible that retained hope, however faint, of redemption, in Postmodernism the possibility of this redemption has gradually faded, even though it is more or less explicitly a theme of the closing sections of both the famous essay and the book’s huge conclusion. This situation is foregrounded by the problem of textual determinism, by which is meant the power of theoretical models to become so compellingly total as to bludgeon the reader into a submission from which no resistance can emanate. In Jameson’s elegant formulation,

     

    it is certain that there is a strange quasi-Sartrean irony–a “winner loses” logic–which tends to surround any effort to describe a “system,” a totalizing dynamic, as these are detected in the movement of contemporary society. What happens is that the more powerful the vision of some increasingly total system or logic–the Foucault of the prisons book is the obvious example–the more powerless the reader comes to feel. Insofar as the theorist wins, therefore, by constructing an increasingly closed and terrifying machine, to that very degree he loses, since the critical capacity of his work is thereby paralyzed, and the impulses of negation and revolt, not to speak of those of social transformation, are increasingly perceived as vain and trivial in the face of the model itself. (Postmodernism 5-6)

     

    The very status of totalizing dialectical thought is plagued by anxieties of a slightly different kind from the ones that haunt the dialectic of ideology and utopia. But it is also possible to read this passage as a moment of searing candor in which we see the doubts Jameson has about the sorts of theoretical models he himself constructs. For there is a take-it-or-leave-it terseness about some of Jameson’s early theorizing (not that he would see it that way: for Jameson, one can only “leave” dialectical problems at the cost of rediscovering them later), particularly in that unconvincingly worded moment when he argues that the pleasure of (Adorno’s) dialectical thought is “not . . . a question of taste, any more than the validity of dialectical thinking is a question of opinion; but it is also true that there can be no reply to anyone choosing to discuss the matter in those terms” (Marxism and Form xiii-iv). In light of this, the hesitation in the essay on postmodernism can be read as a revealing moment of equivocation.

     

    As Helmling realizes, this theoretical impasse becomes extraordinarily tense, even as its working-out provokes ever more supercharged Jamesonian writing. By the time “The Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism” is assembled, an important change has occurred, however, in which fairly suddenly the problems have been found to be figurable in a way that leaves some space for the theorist to enjoy himself. This moment of ease is, I should hasten to add, comparative; the book on Postmodernism is still a challenging read, but some of it is a good deal less difficult than the contemporaneous Late Marxism, Jameson’s book-length study of Adorno. Some passages in Postmodernism even present a level of private reflection that Jameson has, with career-long discipline, normally eschewed–notably his comments on his friend and former Yale colleague Paul de Man, but also his remark that he writes as “a relatively enthusiastic consumer of postmodernism, at least of some parts of it” (298).

     

    Helmling reads this momentary relaxation as a corollary of Jameson’s discovery of the notion of the sublime as a suitable representative/unrepresentable figure for postmodernism. At a time when the possibility of critique is seemingly problematized as never before–not just because of the abolition of critical distance, but also because of the hesitancy over totalizing theoretical models–Jameson turns to the very dynamics of representation itself to dramatize the dilemmas posed by the transition into what he calls full postmodernism (Helmling 107-10). As the sublime is re-motivated as the unfigurable networks of global capitalism, the resultant conspiracy-theory-like schizophrenia (in its poststructural sense) marries off our dread and foreboding with a most unlikely Jamesonian idea: relief. As he himself writes, “I think we now have to talk about the relief of the postmodern generally, a thunderous unblocking of logjams and a release of new productivity that was somehow tensed up and frozen, locked like cramped muscles, at the latter end of the modern period” (Postmodernism 313). Quite apart from this description, conspicuous enough in its use of the word relief to characterize a period of ever more systemic capitalism, postmodernism becomes ever more difficult to figure because it completes the movement of modern theory away from meaning (Helmling 115-6).2 Indeed, using the sublime as a way of theorizing the postmodern actually reinscribes one of Jameson’s earlier problems, namely, how to interpret the unrepresentable (Helmling 118). Failure again of a familiar sort, then, but one that points back toward The Political Unconscious, with its Althusserian placement of history in some realm beyond knowledge–with all the Lacanian and Kantian resonance of the ultimately unknowable. As Helmling argues, the great metaphysical spin-offs of these concerns seem all the more meaningless in a world that is so outwardly unconcerned with sublimity; to quote one of his purpler patches once again,

     

    this globally oppressive atmosphere of muzak and of bar-codes, of transnational designer logos as legible “fashion statement” or willing self-commodification, of smiley-faces and franchiser’s manual courtesies, where shopping is the only leisure activity there is, and for increasingly large numbers of people, the only leisure activity they are “good at”–how to make the narcosis of such a commodity-scape interesting at all, let alone juice it up with the excitements of “the sublime”? . . . Alas, “boredom” and “waning of affect” seem rubrics all too adequate to the postmodern vécu. (116-17)

     

    If this historicizes Jameson’s sublime, then the sheer unlikeliness of the sublime’s use only makes Jameson’s deployment of it that much more devastating; and it is in this highly distinctive embrace of the motif of the sublime, however brief, that some of the postmodernism essay’s longevity is surely founded.

     

    One other way that the sublime might be invoked in a discussion of Jameson’s style, however, is from the standpoint of the reader (Helmling 122). The totalizing dynamics of dialectical thought continually shift us to ever-widening horizons;

     

    the moments are quite frequent in Jameson when the reader can feel engulfed by the threatened onset of an ideational congestion, a cerebral meltdown or synaptic overload, a sense of argumentative threads and suggestions, themes and variations, multiplying beyond any hope of keeping track of them, an intellectual levitation at once exhilarating and daunting, illuminating and befuddling. (Helmling 122)

     

     

    Difficulty remains, as do the dialectical shocks, and it might be revealing to juxtapose the persistence of this difficulty with a couple of remarks made by Jameson in his 1982 Diacriticsinterview. When Leonard Green notes that “one feels at times to be pushing against an almost encyclopaedic accumulation of knowledge in your work,” Jameson replies:

     

    I’m in a poor position to judge the difficulty of my own work or to defend its stylistic qualities, particularly since with more time and work no doubt even the most complicated thoughts might have been made more accessible. If one defends difficulty a priori (as I have allowed myself to do occasionally), this can be taken as an ominous pretext for all kinds of self-indulgence. But in a general way (and leaving myself out of it), it is always surprising how many people in other disciplines still take a relatively belle-lettristic view of the problems of culture and make the assumption, which they would never make in the area of nuclear physics, linguistics, symbolic logic, or urbanism, that such problems can still be laid out with all the leisurely elegance of a coffee-table magazine (which is not to be taken as a slur on high-class journalism, of which we have little enough as it is). But the problems of cultural theory–which address the relationship between, let’s say, consciousness and representation, the unconscious, narrative, the social matrix, symbolic syntax and symbolic capital–why should there be any reason to feel that these problems are less complex than those of bio-chemistry? (Green, Culler, and Klein 87-8)

     

    Jameson himself appears to speak of difficulty here in the accessible rhetoric of the higher journalism. And yet, it is notable that even in this comparatively simple reply we may discern a whole nest of assertions and counterclaims: one begins to wonder on what level difficulty is to be shunned in favor of clarity; or whether the latter must always be regarded as too naïvely utopian, too easily programmed to the logic of the sublime system of late capitalism.

     

    Helmling has an answer for this and several related questions, but it is one that is more provocative than the rest of his study, and it latches onto the change in the assessment of theory’s creativity with which I began this discussion of Jameson’s style. For there is in Helmling’s view a further change in Jameson’s style after Postmodernism. In essays such as “The Existence of Italy” (Signatures of the Visible 155-229), “The Antinomies of Postmodernity” (The Seeds of Time 1-71), and particularly the powerful “‘End of Art’ or ‘End of History’?” (The Cultural Turn 73-92), the largely Hegelian-Marxist concerns of the earlier work return in all their glory, branded anew, or so the postmodernist might imagine. It will be clear that this return is nothing more than a resurfacing of career-long concerns, and that even “The Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism” never constituted a very sharp departure, much less any sort of repudiation. All the same, there does seem to be a marked change of emphasis in the work of the 1990s, from Late Marxism onward. Specifically, Helmling explains this as a return “to the supposedly retro interests (Hegelian, Marxist, phenomenological) that Postmodernism had seemed to downplay or eschew” (138). But there is something else that has dropped out of Jameson’s writing, in Helmling’s opinion–something that has once again freed Jameson’s criticism from its earlier tragic accents: namely,

     

    the inexorable “winner loses” logic of “inevitable failure” that Jameson in The Political Unconscious posited as the necessary condition, the specific “vision” incumbent upon “dialectical historiography” as such. (142)

     

    What has gradually become less and less visible has been the Adornian constraints that seemed to charge critical writing with a necessary failure. Instead of this deadlock, Jameson has been able to substitute a

     

    discussion able to proceed with evident confidence in the programs it proposes for itself, the ambitions it entertains, the desires it hopes to realize, operating in the process a renewal of the genuine utopian potential of “the sublime” and of sundry other critical projects or “desires”–including not least that generic hybrid, or hubristic genre, where critique aspires to sublimity, in “theory” itself. (142-3)

     

    Later on it becomes clear just how important this rapprochement with theory is:

     

    It is customary these days to deplore criticism’s vainglorious usurpation of the privileges properly attaching to “literature,” but, our well-advertised “information glut” notwithstanding, just what “literature” is there, these days, for people like us to read? . . . for me it is a simple statement of fact that “the way we live now”–or at least the way some of us read and (try to) write now–becomes actually exciting almost nowhere else than in the writing of a very few highrolling superstar professors. . . . for a few centuries now our culture has produced a minority audience that hungers to see the challenges of its own time written about in relevantly challenging ways. The greats of the past are still great, but they are not our greats. Nor is there any question of Derrida being “as great” as Joyce, or Goethe or whomever; it is rather that the sort of intellectually ambitious reader who sought out Joyce or Goethe in their day is the sort of reader who today will find the challenges of Derrida or Jameson more demanding, the difficulties more difficult in pertinently “contemporary” ways, the rewards proportionally more complicatedly satisfying, than those of Don DeLillo, Toni Morrison, or–who you will. (Saul Bellow?) (147-8)

     

    I have here indulged Helmling’s own indulgence (as he himself describes it [148]), partly because it is moving and revealing on its own terms, but also because it poses interesting questions about (and of) criticism and theory. It is quite obvious when reading The Success and Failure of Fredric Jameson that Helmling must surely have intended to finish at this point: the ending of the “Jameson Post-Postmodernism” chapter is saturated with closural elegance, winding up his lucid study with a slightly more personal assessment of Jameson’s writing than at any other place in the book. But as Helmling admits in his coda–“Beyond Success and Failure”–his closing of the book was continually problematized by Jameson’s continuing productivity. It says much for Helmling’s ideas that they can so easily be tweaked to accommodate Jameson’s recent study Brecht and Method, which exhibits a style somewhat different from that of most of the rest of his oeuvre. But the coda nevertheless sits rather uncomfortably next to the grand claims quoted above, and it is to these–to theory’s hubris–that I shall now turn.

     

    Helmling’s Failure?

     

    A study, then, that begins by remarking that the “American cultural system affords its intellectuals no eminence of prestige and controversy comparable to that of Derrida in France, or Habermas in Germany” ends up by elevating Fredric Jameson to this premier status, albeit–thankfully?–without igniting any real controversy along the way (1). In doing this Steven Helmling has produced a major piece of interpretative literature on one of the foremost intellectuals of our time, and even those who mock and mimic the verbal contortions of contemporary literary criticism would admit that this study employs such a language with no little style of its own. For that we can all be more or less grateful; but in broader terms the study, pleasurable and successful as it is, seems to want to be included within the ambit of its own concerns: in Helmling’s terms, it is as if his own scriptible text is a peculiarly reflexive one, much as he judges Jameson’s achievements by the very terms on which Jameson conducts his work and writes his texts. And with this concern we are propelled onto perhaps an inevitable but also one of the most pressing terrains of all, at least for Marxist intellectuals: the tortuous relations between theory and practice.

     

    The problems revolve primarily around Helmling’s conclusion. Here, it will be recalled, Jameson is seen as offering the type of difficult experience that it was formerly the business of the greatest writers to provide. This argument–that the difficult theory that swept over the Anglo-American world in the 1970s and 80s is the place to which “high” artistic creativity ultimately migrated–is certainly not implausible. Indeed, in “‘End of Art’ or ‘End of History’?” it is deployed by Jameson himself. But while I do not wish to dismiss the argument, it seems to me that in the very way he presents it Helmling invites strong challenge. And there are, I believe, some respects in which defending difficult theory on the grounds of its aesthetic creativity may ultimately be incompatible with the aims of a truly radical criticism.

     

    There would seem to be at least four lines of challenge, all of them certainly interrelated, but each with slightly different emphases and concerns. First of all, one might challenge the sheer self-serving hubris of such a position. It must be reassuring to learn that one is working on the deepest thinkers of the age; and since, as a salaried academic, one is paid to teach and explicate this great material, one’s own validation of it becomes implicitly a validation of one’s own admittedly subordinate status. Of course, we all need to convince ourselves in various ways that what we are doing is worthwhile and constructive; but when working on someone like Jameson, few people, perhaps nobody at all (Perry Anderson excepted), would reckon themselves able to evaluate the claim that he is one of the great writers of our age, so an element of circularity creeps into the position of the critic who is simultaneously one of the few people to designate him as worthy of study and one of the few people actually qualified to study him. But this is only one cynical view of a much bigger problem, which is a return of all sorts of issues that tend to get designated as modernist rather than postmodernist. The elevation of Jameson’s difficulty, something that feeds the needs of the eminent intellectuals of our age, seems to ensure that he remains a minority pursuit, not least because if we follow Helmling, then to sweep away the difficulty in Jameson would be to miss the point and merely fall victim to the various paradigms of clarity or thematization that Jameson’s prose intransigently sets itself against. To caricature the situation (but certainly not Helmling’s own position), it is my dialectical brilliance versus your reified ignorance; that is why I see this stuff as wonderful dialectical prose, whereas you find it turgid nonsense. And since I have already realized that this writing is the most profound intellectual challenge of the age, what does that say about you?

     

    These are not new intellectual issues and I raise them not because one must accept them as the final word on the value of theory, but merely because they seem to cause ripples in all sorts of unexpected places. The sort of status that Helmling wants to accord to Jameson seems to be the very plausible accolade of being a great thinker. But since the Jamesonian text sets itself so resolutely against any form of mass consumption, to recognize that he is a great thinker seems to elevate him to the position of the academic high-priest who alone can see clearly to the contradictions of the age. Seeing as we are ultimately dealing with a seminal theorist of postmodernism, that sticks in the throat somewhat: has so little changed? Or is the position of the theorist one of the remaining vestiges of modernism in the new era of the postmodern? What would a postmodernist theory of postmodernism look like?3 (The question is surely valid, because earlier on it seemed as if Jameson’s “The Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism” was not just a theory but also an exemplar; clearly this now seems more questionable.)

     

    To say this, however, is to garnish a modernist position with a healthy dollop of avant-garde problematics: would mass dissemination of Jameson risk its status? But mass dissemination is as good as impossible (unless dialectical thinking suddenly stages an unexpected resurgence in its popularity), since if it happened, one would simply claim that the theory had been commodified, thematized, separated from the way in which it is expressed, and so on. Theory quite clearly does not risk that sort of popularity, but it does risk the relative popularity of a wide dissemination within the academy. So do we simply see here a recapitulation of the problems of certain anti-institutional movements, whose success rests on their very failure and obscurity, rather than canonization and elevation to the status of institutional doctrine? Perhaps the one thing that could really dent the radical edge of Jameson’s theory would be the type of academic hysteria that has attached itself to figures such as Derrida–and this is presumably why there has been so much righteous anger from the left that the revolutionary aspects and indeed foundations of much of Derrida’s own work were quietly removed in the course of its American reception and translation (Eagleton 52-3). Seen in this way, the notion of scriptible serves its masters well, since it ensures a transferral of difficulty and close dialectical reading to one’s own criticism (for which few have time or patience), while at the same time designating it as the master key to Jameson’s work.

     

    So at length we arrive at the inevitable question: what has this theory achieved? What might it achieve? The pragmatic argument, addressed by Helmling, might “blow the whistle” on the whole affair and simply see it as melodrama, because Jameson has enjoyed institutional privilege in a distinguished academic career (125). This, as Helmling notes, can be easily answered as a far too simple acquiescence in “the reifications of a system that, in other precincts of its operation, daily inflicts, on a mass scale, violences for which Prometheus’s torment is if anything too soothing a figure” (125). But this answer is as unsatisfactory as it is compelling: we simply arrive at notions of reification and false consciousness that are always, for a rather vulgar Marxism, going to win the argument, since not to realize this is to fall victim to the problems they solve. In other words, we have clambered, I hope dialectically, onto the untranscendable horizon of Marxist theory itself, which will not go away no matter how familiar or tediously inevitable it seems. Difficulty runs through this field as surely as blood pumps through our veins: “difficult texts, difficult issues, difficult problems, a (very) difficult history, difficult political conditions, difficult rhetorical burdens–a dauntingly overdetermined multiplicity of ways, in short, in which Marxist critique might succeed or fail” (Helmling 3). Most pressing of these is surely the brutal question of what theory can do to change the world: some would argue, simplistically but not ineffectively, that if Jameson’s work has peered into and theorized the darkest corners of our contemporary cultural experiences, it might yet be time–for the acolytes, at least–to put down the pen and make the move from thinking about the world to actually altering it.

     

    Who could doubt that this is difficult and depressing? Like any revolutionary, Jameson utilizes the system he is opposing in order to defeat it (or at least to critique it); but when that system has triumphed so conclusively, when it can afford eminence even to those who are, basically, plotting its downfall, one is entitled to ask whether any of their efforts could be called successes. The bleakest alternative is the horrible thought that perhaps Jameson’s work has already been defused of its radical dynamite, softened and subsumed by the very system it has theorized so cogently. Yes, of course Jameson succeeds in the tortuous dialectical ways that Helmling says he does; but these successes seem to be undercut by the greater failure of Western Marxism. In the end, one cannot help but wonder whether this failure might not derive from the profound lack of accordance between academic theory and lived experience in the contemporary West, and whether the speculative daydreams of theory, institutionally viable though they undoubtedly still are, might be rather more proximate to our problems than to their solutions. To entertain such dismal questions is to confront a failure that is Jameson’s but, of course, not only his. As for “success”–whether institutional, theoretical, aesthetic, or otherwise–to speak undialectically of that would be sheer delusion, the mark of a failure altogether more serious than that of the scriptible.

     

    Notes

     

    1. The principal texts are those by Homer, Anderson, Burnham, and Roberts.

     

    2. The “contradiction” here is obviously the ideological effect of the postmodern: the theory both encapsulates and describes the predicament, a choice raised by Jameson himself in the book’s preface (Postmodernism x).

     

    3. Clint Burnham’s study, The Jamesonian Unconscious, might well be taken as an answer to this question.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Anderson, Perry. The Origins of Postmodernity. London: Verso, 1998.
    • Barthes, Roland. S/Z. Trans. Richard Miller. Farrar: New York, 1974.
    • Burnham, Clint. The Jamesonian Unconscious: The Aesthetics of Marxist Theory. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 1995.
    • Eagleton, Terry. “Fredric Jameson: The Politics of Style.” Against the Grain. London: Verso, 1986. 65-78.
    • Green, Leonard, Jonathan Culler, and Richard Klein. Untitled interview with Fredric Jameson. Diacritics 12:3 (1982): 72-91.
    • Homer, Sean. Fredric Jameson: Marxism, Hermeneutics, Postmodernism. Cambridge: Polity, 1998.
    • Jameson, Fredric. The Cultural Turn. London: Verso, 1998.
    • —. “Globalization and Political Strategy.” New Left Review 4 (2000): 49-68.
    • —. “The Ideology of the Text.” The Ideologies of Theory. London: Routledge, 1988. 17-71.
    • —. Marxism and Form. Princeton: Princeton UP, 1971.
    • —. “The Politics of Utopia.” New Left Review 25 (2004): 35-54.
    • —. Postmodernism, or, the Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism. London: Verso, 1991.
    • —. The Seeds of Time. New York: Columbia UP, 1994.
    • —. Signatures of the Visible. London: Routledge, 1992.
    • —. A Singular Modernity. London: Verso, 2002.
    • Roberts, Adam. Fredric Jameson. London: Routledge, 2000.

     

  • Identity Poetics? or, The Norton Anthology of Modern and Contemporary Poetry

    V. Nicholas LoLordo

    Department of English
    University of Nevada at Las Vegas
    lolordov@unlv.nevada.edu

     

    Review of: Ramazani, Jahan, Richard Ellmann, and Robert O’Clair, eds. The Norton Anthology of Modern and Contemporary Poetry.3rd ed. New York: Norton, 2003.

     

     

    Authors are the sentimental background of literature.

     

    –Laura (Riding) Jackson

     

    poets are retreating into–or is it out of?–academia, beset by the
    usual pit-bulls and well-meaning little old ladies in tennis shoes. And discovering
    and assimilating new bastions of indifference and comprehension. What else?
    That was some storm we had last week. The webs intersect at certain points where baubles
    are glued to them; readers think this is nice. What else? Oh, stop badgering–
    where were you in the fifties?

     

    –John Ashbery, Flow Chart

     

    Ten years ago, in his long poem Flow Chart, John Ashbery surveyed the literary landscape with a mild surmise: so much for the poetry wars. Yet the critic can hardly afford to greet missionary zeal with this melancholy bemusement. The position of the academic anthologizer is still more difficult. It has long since become common knowledge that the “anthology wars” (marked by the appearance of Donald Allen’s 1960 anthology The New American Poetry and Hall, Pack, and Simpson’s New Poets of England and America) divided American poetry into two armed camps. (A recent update on this tradition of conflict is provided by Marjorie Perloff’s “Whose New American Poetry?: Anthologizing in the 1990s.”) John Guillory’s work on canon formation assumes the university literature department to be the institutional locus of canonization, but to my mind such a claim becomes increasingly untenable in the post-WWII U.S. poetry scene, where the aforementioned anthologies, among others, testify to the co-presence of academic canons and anti-academic poets’ canons, a pairing best seen in the context of various related sets of polemic adversaries from the recent literary past: Beat vs. academic, raw vs. cooked, margin vs. mainstream, and so on.1 Given this history, a basic problem remains for any teaching anthology published in 2003 that seeks to encompass the past century’s poetry: on the one hand, its own institutional frame is academic; on the other, it must acknowledge contemporary poetry’s foundational narrative of division, this blesséd or curséd break, seeking to contain (in both senses of the word?) both sides within its bipartisan pages. Jahan Ramazani seems to meet the challenge head on: he opens the second volume of the new Norton Anthology of Modern and Contemporary Poetry with substantial selections from Elizabeth Bishop and Charles Olson, a pairing straight from central casting. Olson’s harpoon, Bishop’s bit of ivory: the lady, in the role of minimus, gets more pages.

     

    A prefatory observation: in what follows, I’ve chosen to neglect the question of cuts. Even a not entirely cynical critic might believe, with Marianne Moore, that “omissions are no accident,” while noting that they are also invisible to theory: the experience of classroom teachers is always invoked to explain them. We are more forthright about discovering neglected poetry of value than about discovering that what we once thought valuable no longer seems as necessary. The relative number of poets from Canada and Great Britain has dropped considerably in the latest Norton. (Writing, for this moment, as a Canadian, I note that Earl Birney, A.M. Klein, Irving Layton and Al Purdy have been expunged; P.K. Page, Margaret Atwood, and Michael Ondaatje remain; Anne Carson has been added.) This particular set of cuts might suggest that gender was an important factor; but other decisions I find arguable obey different logics. To name only one: Ramazani is unwilling to remove even relatively minor poets associated with the New Criticism or with the Movement–to name a few: Ransom, Tate, Winters, Penn Warren, Delmore Schwartz, Davie, Amis–poets peripheral to the revival of modernist studies in whom I can hardly think my own generation of university teachers is heavily invested.

     

    This newly revised Norton appears at a moment when “mainstream” poetry is marked by a bewildering heterogeneity, while questions of eclecticism, pluralism, rapprochement have been the subject of much debate at the “margins.” The entry of a number of writers identified with “Language-centered writing”–Lyn Hejinian, Bob Perelman, Barrett Watten, Charles Bernstein–into academic positions has been taken to mark the end of the movement as a cohesive avant-garde, yet in this “post-language” moment an oppositional understanding of the poetic field remains possible, as is indicated by, for example, the recent volume published by the University of Alabama Press, Telling it Slant: Avant-Garde Poetics of the 90s, which collects critical and polemical work by writers very few of whom at date of publication had a volume of poetry in print from an established press. (I note two exceptions, Elizabeth Willis and Juliana Spahr. The original publication dates of these pieces span the era between the 2nd and 3rd editions of the Norton, 1988-2002.) And these oppositional understandings–those associated with, to list the most commonly used terms, radical innovative, experimental, or avant-garde practice–typically seek to legitimate themselves through readings of modernist tradition.

     

    But such binaries can seem increasingly quaint, relics of the Poetry Wars–a battle that, as Jed Rasula has observed, anthologizers continued to reenact, as if in period dress, into the 1990s. The new Norton gives U.S. Eliot’s modernism carried on by Tate, Schwartz, and Lowell side by side with the modernism of Stein carried on by Zukofsky, Bernstein, and Hejinian; whether we speak of the modernisms of metaphor and of metonymy or of Symbolism and Objectivism, it would appear that both sides are fairly accounted for. Indeed, the book’s treatment of modernism registers as one of its most significant corrections. Added to the first volume of this new edition are Mina Loy, Charles Reznikoff, Laura (Riding) Jackson, Lorine Niedecker, Louis Zukofsky, George Oppen; the acknowledgment of experimental modernist registers–along with English-language modernist writing outside of the U.S., Britain, and Ireland–constitutes the revision’s primary accomplishment. But what is the position of this text, within the poetic field I’ve roughly sketched out? To whom does it speak?

     

    Here, I will argue, the book’s selection of contemporary poets is of particular significance. For literary academics, the brand “Norton” and canonicity are synonymous; each published sigh or murmur of dissent, it might be argued, only confirms this status. Oxford’s recent set of anthologies of modern poetry (Cary Nelson’s American and Keith Tuma’s British and Irish) lays claim to much the same terrain, but the new Norton attempts to cover the entirety of English-language poetry since modernism. This should be seen in the context of Anglo-American modernism’s decline as a category–Norton both occupies this declining place and revises it. Another apparently fading category, at least within discussions of poetry and poetics, is instanced by a volume now almost ten years old, Paul Hoover’s Postmodern American Poetry: A Norton Anthology. Note the properly postmodern indefinite article, which attempts to finesse the awkward fact that there is only one Norton anthology of such poetry! “From the modernism you want,” observed David Antin in a remark often quoted, “you get the postmodernism you deserve”; but the implicit abandonment of the latter concept by the Norton suggests that such teleological claims about literary history have been shelved: from a still-ideologically charged “modern,” we move to a neutral “contemporary.”

     

    Which is not to say the anthology tries to be apolitical. The Norton now for the first time registers a meeting between postcolonial studies and twentieth-century poetry. Its first edition represented poetry from the U.S., Britain, Ireland, Canada, Australia, and New Zealand; to the work of Derek Walcott in the 2nd edition, the 3rd edition adds poems of other English-language poets–African, Indian, and Caribbean (ten in all). In his preface, attached to both volumes, Ramazani summarizes the anthology’s mission: to present “an international vision of modern and contemporary poetry in English …. many key poets of the 20th century led migratory lives …. Like these transnational lives, literary influence has … continually crossed national boundaries, so that much modern poetry is transatlantic, and much contemporary poetry is in its bearings global.” A qualification follows: “Not that this anthology aims to give equal representation to every anglophone nation. Produced in the United States, its center of gravity is American” (1, xxviii).

     

    This last phrase is intriguing. Certainly, the book’s literary-historical imagination–as in the Bishop/Olson juxtaposition–tends to work with the myths of American poetry. But my concern is with the rhetoric of “representation.” For Ramazani’s disavowal of “equal representation” is puzzling. What would be the internationalist political source of this reference to every anglophone nation; in what geopolitical terms are all anglophone nations commensurate? The very strangeness of this denial of equal representation calls attention to a politics of comparative representation characteristically invoked not in international, but in American contexts. In other words, the metaphor calls up the paradigm we know as identity politics–a particularly American paradigm. I want to suggest that the 3rd Norton is in this sense doubly American-centered; if its selection is consciously weighted in favor of poets from the U. S., at the same time contemporary “American values” govern the anthology as a whole. (Nationality is after all a predicate of poets as subjects before it develops the complexly nuanced meaning that issues in a term like “American poetry.”) In its treatment of recent poetry, the new Norton embodies a particular version of academic leftism: identity politics, a doctrine, as Guillory has argued, itself related to the tradition of American pluralism. The anthology’s place of origin and intended market, the North American university, governs not merely the numbers of poets, but the very language of representation underlying anthologization.

     

    On one level this is hardly surprising: any overtly academic anthology will necessarily be governed by the representational logic of the academy. But if the dominant logic of the academy is pluralism, how do the pluralistic predicates of social identity interlock with poetic values? Poets exist for the anthology as subjects marked by the predicates of identity before they exist as the embodiment of any particular poetics. While the new Norton borrows a strategy from Allen’s anthology, that of including “poetics statements,” none of the younger American poets on whom I’ll be focusing have such statements included.

     

    Ramazani’s account of the priorities that motivated changes made in the current Norton reinforces this logic of identity. Three priorities are particularly relevant to my concerns: First, to “represent the accelerated globalization of English-language poetry in the second half of the twentieth century, particularly in the work of postcolonial poets who creatively hybridize indigenous traditions with British and American influences”; second, to “welcome into the anthology what John Ashbery has called an ‘other tradition’–experimental poetry by modern avant-garde writers…extending to the contemporary avant-garde”; third, “to present various modern and contemporary poets who have only recently emerged into prominence” (xxix). Different notions of anthologizing agency are in play here: the Norton, accurately if perhaps inexplicitly, portrays itself as both judging and validating or reproducing received judgments. To “represent” postwar postcolonial poets acknowledges their having been present within anglophone poetry as an ongoing process of creative hybridization; the “welcome” extended to avant-garde poetry, somewhat differently, would seem to bring it into the fold while still preserving its separate status, apart from the polity of modern and contemporary poetry within or alongside which it exists; finally, the inclusion of “recently emerged” modern and contemporary poets indicates that the anthology sees itself as recognizing preexisting judgments–judgments, of course, which its own acknowledgment will considerably, at least for a time, solidify.

     

    The Norton’s “emergent” poets have themselves been sorted into groups, and the criteria of their emergence prove to be primarily criteria of identity: “poets of the Harlem Renaissance and African American modernism,” “female modern poets…and their contemporary counterparts,” “poets of ethnic American minorities,” “poets of Ireland and Northern Ireland,” “poets of gay experience,” “poets influenced by European surrealism and East Asian literature,” “an influential poet of World War I,” and “an eminent Australian” (xxix). In such descriptions, identity and subject matter generally seem to coincide. But one should notice a crucial and neglected asymmetry. Poets who wrote at an earlier historical moment do not “emerge” as contemporary poets do, having been positioned within the literary field of their own moment; rather, revisions to literary history allow them to come into focus. The conditions of reception under which any poet will be seen to “emerge” are specifically contemporary ones, but the conditions that make available both contemporary and historical poets as the subjects of such a process vary. The poets of the Harlem Renaissance and of African-American modernism (and of which, one might ask, was Jean Toomer?) are, after all, African-American poets–and might thus be included within the set of “poets of ethnic American minorities.” Such a separation of terms here acknowledges, without examination, the fact that “modernism” and the “Harlem Renaissance” are complex signifiers, dense with sedimented aesthetic history. The notion of “ethnic American minorities,” by contrast, implying as it does a certain commensurability, evokes the discourse by which races are compared–the discourse of racism. This of course is not to accuse the anthology of any such attitudes, but to notice that category of minority identity is organized around the experience of oppression (one aspect of which, of course, might be under-representation at the level of canonical textbooks).

     

    One must, then, derive the poetics of identity inductively from the examples at hand. Just as the anthology’s national breakdown does not aspire to equality, its breakdown of American identities does not seek to “represent” the current demographic diversity of the United States, or even of those Americans who write poetry; rather, the overall image of the canon is adjusted in the direction of contemporary values, and the nature of these values will be most clearly visible in the selection of new poets. As the conditions of canonicity change, they interlock with the (limited) availability of historical writers who embody these changing values. A list of the American poets under 50 included in the new Norton may suffice to suggest that we remain in this historical moment. These names are given in order of appearance in the second volume; I have appended to each name bracketed descriptions in the language of the anthology:

     

    • Charles Bernstein [born “in New York City, his father the head of a dressmaking company”]
    • Carolyn Forché [born “in Detroit, Michigan”]
    • Jorie Graham [born “in New York, to an Irish American father and a Jewish American mother”]
    • Joy Harjo [of “Muskogee Creek Heritage”]
    • Gary Soto [a “Chicano writer”]
    • Rita Dove [“African American”]
    • Alberto Rios [a “Chicano poet”]
    • Mark Doty [ born “in Maryville, Tennessee,” he “works in the tradition of American autobiographical poetry”]
    • Thylias Moss [“African American”]
    • Louise Erdrich [“French Ojibwa” mother and “German-born father”]
    • Lorna Dee Cervantes [“Chicano/a,” “of Mexican and Native American ancestry”]
    • Marilyn Chin [quoted: “I am a Chinese American poet”]
    • Cathy Song [“born … in Honolulu, Hawaii to a Chinese American mother and a Korean American father”]
    • Dionisio Martinez [born “in Cuba … he grew up in Glendale, California”]
    • Henri Cole [“Beset with contradictions between his homosexuality and his Catholicism”]
    • Li-Young Lee [born “to Chinese parents in Jakarta, Indonesia, [he] is one of the preeminent poets of the East Asian diaspora in the United States”]
    • Sherman Alexie [“A ‘registered’ (in the bureaucratic jargon) Spokane/Coeur d’Alene Indian, Alexie is a master of the trickster aesthetic”]

     

    Insofar as individual poets, rather than poems, are selected for anthologizing, they become to a degree commensurate: one may be tempted to count them. (No prominent teaching anthology has yet decentered the poet.) Nevertheless, a list like the one I’ve just presented can hardly be produced, let alone discussed, without a certain awkwardness.2 What stands out here, I hope, is not any sense that I’ve quoted insidiously, but rather the sheer variety of formulations that may be subsumed under the category of “social identity.” Any such collection of poets can only be seen as a marvelous example of diversity–yet the particular version of diversity as instantiated by the Norton deserves closer examination. The cited phrases that follow each name are meant to suggest the variety of national, racial, ethnic, class, and gender identities explicitly or implicitly predicated to the poet as subject. I cite language about every poet, language which may or may not suggest their affiliation with a “marked” identity. I do not introduce what seemed more interpretive comments: that Carolyn Forché writes a poetry “of psychological and sexual experience” (915), for example. If we attempt to reduce this bewildering complexity of identities to the question of marked and unmarked identities, among these seventeen American poets the “unmarked” identity of the white male is conspicuous by its relative absence–Doty, Cole, and Bernstein. And the former two of these poets are marked as interpreters of gay experience (Cole in the cited note, Doty in his authorship of the powerful “Homo Will Not Inherit.”) But Bernstein is not only the one straight white male among these poets; he is also the only experimentalist–the only one of these poets who, given the “two traditions” symbolically represented by the juxtaposition of Bishop and Olson, would be taken by critics generally to stand in the latter line (and the only one of these contemporaries whose “poetics statement” is included in the anthology).

     

    The Norton, I would argue, gives its presumptive audience an alternative perspective on its own selection of recent poetry, as when Ramazani summarizes Bernstein’s stance: “Despite its pretense of diversity, ‘mainstream poetry’ assumes a restrictive norm in which a single voice expresses personal feeling” (909). In this sense the Norton, in however limited a sense, does attempt what Gerald Graff has referred to as “teaching the conflicts.” Given this opportunity, I’ll now take advantage of Ramazani’s (pluralist) generosity of spirit by introducing the wedge of a still more pointed quotation, from Bernstein’s “States of the Art,” the first essay in A Poetics: “Too often, the works selected to represent cultural diversity are those that accept the model of representation assumed by the dominant culture in the first place…I see my yiddishe mama on Hester street / Next to all the pushcarts I can no longer peddle” (6). The word “representation” marks the spot where political and anthological discourses coincide.

     

    This is not to say that Ramazani sees himself as engaged in an aesthetics of partisan representation. Ramazani introduces the question of identity very differently in different contexts; moreover, the anthology’s headnotes are consistently concerned to assert that no single social identity can exhaust poetic motivation. Thus Gary Soto “both emerged from this cultural moment [Chicano nationalism] and felt distinct from it” (969); Rita Dove “wants less to separate the African American aesthetic from other cultural traditions than to offer a synthesis” (975); Li-Young Lee’s work “bears the imprint of his Chinese background [but] it should not be exoticized” (1040); Thylias Moss “says she avoids ‘imposing certain agendas’ on her poems, such as those of ‘identity’ politics” (999). These, of course, are admirable cautions–but, in the context of the anthology, a remark such as Moss’s is perhaps deceptive, insofar as it misidentifies its own adversary. To what extent might identity politics be primarily an “agenda,” imposed upon the poem with presumably crushing effect? At the most literal level, one might think of a poem that plays with precisely that question, Amiri Baraka’s “SOS,” which I’ll quote in full:

     

    Calling black people
    Calling all black people, man woman child
    Wherever you are, calling you, urgent, come in
    Black People, come in, wherever you are, urgent, calling
    you, calling all black people
    calling all black people, come in, black people, come
    on in. (Reader 218)

     

    Baraka’s lyric seeks to call black subjects into existence–more precisely, to hail “Black” subjects, in the specific Black Arts racial-nationalist sense of that designation. This brotherly hailing is itself a complex process; its double address is attested to by a palpable shift, emphasized by the final line-break, from the abstract, neutral repetitions of “come in” to the spoken–even ideolectal, I’d suggest, potentially Black–invitation: “come on in.” The poem’s very purpose, its insistence on its own status as performance (its own awareness, one might say, of the difference between address and apostrophe) poses a dilemma: can Baraka call directly and efficaciously to “all black people,” thus transcending the mediation not just of the white world but of the “poetry world”?

     

    Such questions adamantly resist a formalist reading, pointing us back out into the world of publishers, audience, and ever-widening circles of context where the effect of a poem as such an action might conceivably be measured. But such poems are rare. Insofar as Ramazani chooses not to anthologize them–works that in a real sense reject the reader who cannot respond to such an address–he is consistent with the stance implied by Thylias Moss’s words. But in so doing he does not reject the discourse of identity politics: far from it. In the realm of poetry, identity politics is more usefully conceived of as an agenda whose effects are visible at the level of canon formation. In this sense, what individual poets think about identity politics doesn’t matter: the selection of contemporary poetry as a whole issues out of liberal pluralism, the scheme of representation by which our society negotiates the relations between competing identities. Ramazani’s own editorial remark is particularly revealing: he suggests that the “neoconfessional mode that seems to have lost much of its force for Anglo-American poets has been renewed and adapted by poets such as [Li-Young] Lee, Alberto Ríos, and Joy Harjo, who write poems that straddle the introspection of confessional poetry and the communal reach of ‘identity poetry’ ” (2, lxvii). Of course, one can find enormous numbers of American poets who still work in a neoconfessional mode, but what I find striking is how the sample of (non-Anglo-American) poets Ramazani has gathered privileges introspection over “communal reach,” a phrase, indeed, more aptly attached to Baraka’s “SOS” than to virtually any of the “identity” poems anthologized in this Norton.

     

    The idea that the poem, possessed of “voice,” provides unmediated access to experience must also be maintained if the relation between particular subjectivities and particular lyrics is to remain stable. After all, the lyric poem–which, among other things, is the poem of a length amenable to anthologizing–has long been conceived of as the bearer par excellence of experiential particulars. Given such a conception, one might argue the liberal-pluralist canon logically follows. Indeed, the narrative of identity–of immigrant experience–is perhaps the literary genre par excellence in the contemporary American academy. I conclude by considering the poetics of identity–the way in which poetic language “represents” the subject–and by considering briefly, by way of contrast, a poet for whom identity is constituted within language.

     

    Certainly, Ramazani does not regard identity as immutable. Yet if one looks for a recent poem in the Norton that treats the relation between language and identity as a problem, the pickings are slim. Poem after poem uses its particular diction, pared-down or lush, formal or colloquial, to narrate a slice of life. On one poetic occasion, however, the arbitrariness of the signifier does appear as a social fact–as does the institution where the anthology will be used. This is Exhibit A: Li-Young Lee’s “Persimmons” (1041-42):[e]

     

    In sixth grade Mrs. Walker
    slapped the back of my head
    and made me stand in the corner
    for not knowing the difference
    between persimmon and precision.
    How to choose

     

    persimmons. This is precision.
    Ripe ones are soft and brown-spotted.
    Sniff the bottoms. The sweet one
    will be fragrant. How to eat:
    put the knife away, lay down newspaper.
    Peel the skin tenderly, not to tear the meat.
    Chew the skin, suck it,
    and swallow. Now, eat
    the meat of the fruit,
    so sweet,
    all of it, to the heart.

     

    The topic of “difference,” for Lee’s poem, begins with language: with two metrically identical English words (one Latinate, the other a corruption of an Algonquin name)–and with a scene of discipline by which the difference between the two words is enforced. Mrs. Walker, representing the educational institution, seeks to correct the boy’s imprecise use of language, or to enforce the status–slow, backward–to which such imprecision dooms him. The second stanza, as it unfolds in a kind of manual for the persimmon, continues to provide double evidence of mastery: the speaker’s assumed familiarity with the “exotic” fruit modulates into a display of familiarity with the musical resources of English. To “choose” persimmons, in this sense, is to select them as fit subject for lyric meditation–as the full-ripened signs of a particular ethnic identity.

     

    Donna undresses, her stomach is white.
    In the yard, dewy and shivering
    with crickets, we lie naked,
    face-up, face-down.
    I teach her Chinese.
    Crickets: chiu chiu. Dew: I’ve forgotten.
    Naked: I’ve forgotten.
    Ni, wo: you and me.
    I part her legs,
    remember to tell her
    she is beautiful as the moon.

     

    Other words
    that got me into trouble were
    fight and fright, wren and yarn.
    Fight was what I did when I was frightened,
    fright was what I felt when I was fighting.
    Wrens are small, plain birds,
    yarn is what one knits with.
    Wrens are soft as yarn.
    My mother made birds out of yarn.
    I loved to watch her tie the stuff;
    a bird, a rabbit, a wee man.

     

    This dynamic–the linguistic failure of the immigrant speaker replaced by a mastery on other levels–characterizes the poem’s movement. Moving from scenic memory to more generalized recollections, the poet as language learner attempts to separate language from experience: pairs of near-homonyms are further confounded as they prove to stand for associated experiences. Yet again, the slippage of the signifier is halted by the introduction of primal, childhood realities: mother’s handiwork is an art of confident connectivity: once given form, her yarn will not unravel. The poem then returns to the schoolroom–and when teacher imagines, as teachers will, that her classificatory powers over the signifier extend to the referent itself, the poet gains a certain revenge:

     

    Mrs. Walker brought a persimmon to class
    and cut it up
    so everyone could taste
    a Chinese apple. Knowing
    it wasn’t ripe or sweet, I didn’t eat
    but watched the other faces.

     

    The poem ends with the son’s return home, where he looks “for something I lost”–thus adult poet allegorizes immigrant child’s search for origins. Now blind, his father waits on the stairs as he searches for and finds his father’s precise painting of persimmons:

     

    Some things never leave a person:
    scent of the hair of one you love,
    the texture of persimmons,
    in your palm, the ripe weight.

     

    The precision of the father’s painting and the precision of his son’s poem are drawn together: “this” is “Persimmons.” Precision, incarnated in the persimmon, its subject, ripens with time; record of the hand, the father’s precision, passed on to the son, will stand. The adult speaking-self, throughout the poem, will clarify distinctions–will, quite exactly, “choose” precision, writing a masterful lyric organized around a central image. And so the slippery signifiers of childhood by poem’s end are nowhere to be found. The deictic This of presence is mobilized against loss, even as the question of loss is shifted from the linguistic register to the anticipated loss of a beloved parent who has already lost his sight. In the headnote to his selection of Lee’s poetry, Ramazani comments: “Imperfectly grounded in English as a child, the adult speaker, likewise unable to remember some Chinese words, is completely at home in neither language” (1039). Yet what Lee writes stabilizes the language of poetry in a lyric conclusion that takes shelter in tangible experience.

     

    What makes the Norton‘s emphasis on such poetry seem a partial reading of the contemporary is its own treatment of historical modernism. After all, the writing of non-native speakers has come to be seen as increasingly fundamental to our definition of poetic modernism: Gertrude Stein, Mina Loy, Louis Zukofsky (all of whom in childhood used at least in part a language other than English)–modernist experimentation can be said to stem from the explosion of unified national poetic traditions. Indeed, all these aforementioned poets are included in the first volume of the new Norton. But the story this anthology tells us about our own moment is of the replacement of modernist mongrelism with a standardized workshop dialect–a dialect spoken by the current generation of immigrants, a dialect of which their mastery can signify successful poetic assimilation even as they thematize the ironies and complexities of double consciousness.

     

    The larger irony here is that the contemporary experimental scene–if it can even be thought of as a single scene–is anything but an old boys club. Take, for example, Harryette Mullen. Hardly an obscure avant-gardiste, she teaches African-American literature at UCLA. In an essay first published in 1996, “Poetry and Identity,” Mullen suggested that “minority” and “experimental” poets were equally marginal with regard to the centers of poetic authority, though minority poets might be gaining ground. Her prediction looks prescient. Mullen’s own work is simultaneously traditional and experimental; I’ll quote a few stanzas from the book-length sequence Muse and Drudge:

     

    hooked on phonemes imbued with exuberance
    our spokeswoman listened for lines
    heard tokens of quotidian
    corralled in ludic routines

     

    slumming umbra alums
    lost some of their parts
    getting a start
    in the department of far art

     

    monkey’s significant uncle
    blond as a bat
    took off beat path
    through tensile jungle (Mullen 49)

     

    The poem is perfectly “teachable”–and teachable within frameworks that Americanists, or African-American literature scholars, will be ready to use. Mullen’s quatrains are densely packed with cultural signifiers of African-American experience, yet almost never become abstract or preachy. Even more crucially, she does not assume the self-possessed speaking subject as the starting point of her verse; rather, the play of language generates positions which are quickly abandoned. The formation of the voice–most often, in this text, the African-American voice–is for Mullen a legitimately lyric subject. For sincerity, she substitutes signifying. The “monkey’s significant uncle” is a creation possible only in poetry, generated, as he is, out of play with concepts–from pseudo-Darwinian racism to African trickster mythology–and phonemes and from their unpredictable overlap. Monkey’s uncle, significant other, signifying monkey, and, finally, signifying other: the chain of displacements finally leads us to the otherness of signification–which is to say, of language–itself: not the “I” that speaks, but the languages that speak us as we speak and, so doing, are spoken for.

     

    Mullen, or her spokeswoman, has heard those who have “found their voice” and are singing its melody (or malady?) on the quotidian stage of the self, the repeat performance of identity playing itself out. And yet offbeat paths are available to us, perhaps more of them now than ever. I won’t attempt to claim that had the Norton chosen such a path, at the turn of the millennium, it might have made all the difference–for how much power can a single anthology, however institutionally buttressed, really have? Rather, I’ll say, with Gertrude Stein, looking at the still-flourishing life of the poetic world that this otherwise admirable anthology has left for dead: “the difference is spreading.”

     

    Notes

     

    1. See Alan Golding’s From Outlaw to Classic (esp. 41-113) for the distinction between poet’s canons and school canons.

     

    2. Joe Amato uses the identical tactic in reviewing Cary Nelson’s Oxford Anthology of Modern American Poetry. Offering a catalog very similar to my own, Amato remarks that “readers are likely to infer from these headnotes the now familiar, if problematic, equation at work throughout: viz., that a poet’s identity, as determined by her social experience–the structural and personal consequences of ethnic or racial lineage, gender, sexual orientation, familial circumstances, class status, occupation, place of birth, and so forth–corresponds to a poet’s social (and sometimes socialist) agenda, and accounts for the work’s having been written the way it is, and published (and critically received, or no), in the first place.” Amato’s review as a whole brilliantly exemplifies the difficulties in articulating commitments to both left politics and experimental poetics within the contemporary academy.

     

    3. Interestingly, the persimmon as signifier of ethnicity (of, in this case, “Japanese-ness”) appears in the (in)famous Doubled Flowering, a collection of poems by the Hiroshima survivor Araki Yasusada–who, it was discovered after their publication in a wide variety of leading literary magazines, was an invented figure (most now would say Kent Johnson, though Johnson, who has been called the “Yasusada-poet,” has not taken credit for the work).

     

     Works Cited:

     

    • Amato, Joe. “It Was the Best of Tomes, It Was the Worst of Tomes: Cary Nelson’s Anthology of Modern American Poetry.” Rev. of Anthology of Modern American Poetry, edited by Cary Nelson. Jacket 11 (April 2000). <http://jacketmagazine.com/11/nelson-by-amato.html>.
    • Ashbery, John. Flow Chart. New York: Knopf, 1992.
    • Bernstein, Charles. A Poetics. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1992.
    • Golding, Alan. From Outlaw to Classic: Canons in American Poetry. Madison: U of Wisconsin P, 1995.
    • Guillory, John. Cultural Capital: The Problem of Literary Canon Formation. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1993.
    • Hall, Donald, Robert Pack, and Louis Simpson. New Poets of England and America. New York: Meridian, 1957.
    • Harris, William J. ed. The LeRoi Jones/Amiri Baraka Reader. New York: Thunder’s Mouth, 1991.
    • Hoover, Paul. Postmodern American Poetry: A Norton Anthology. New York: Norton, 1994.
    • Mullen, Harryette. Muse & Drudge. Philadelphia: Singing Horse, 1995.
    • Nelson, Cary ed. Anthology of Modern American Poetry. New York: Oxford UP, 2000.
    • Perloff, Marjorie. “Whose New American Poetry?: Anthologizing in the 1990s.” Electronic Poetry Center. <http://wings.buffalo.edu/epc/authors/perloff/anth.html>.
    • Rasula, Jed. The American Poetry Wax Museum: Reality Effects 1940-1990. Urbana: National Council of Teachers of English, 1994.
    • Tuma, Keith ed. Anthology of Twentieth-Century British and Irish Poetry. New York: Oxford UP, 2001.
    • Wallace, Mark, and Steven Marks, eds. Telling it Slant: Avant-Garde Poetics of the 90s. Tuscaloosa: U of Alabama P, 2001.
    • Yasusada, Araki. Doubled Flowering: From the Notebooks of Araki Yasusada. New York: Roof, 1997.
  • On Media and Modules

    Stephen Dougherty

    Fine Arts and Humanities Division
    Elizabethtown Community and Technical College
    stephen.dougherty@kctcs.edu

     

    Review of: Tabbi, Joseph, Cognitive Fictions. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 2002.

     

    Cognitive Fictions is a sophisticated and fascinating book that asks difficult questions about the place of literature and the literary artist in the age of digitized mass media. The answers Joseph Tabbi provides are equally difficult, although the reader’s trouble on this score will depend in part on whether or not he or she ascribes to some of the guiding assumptions that motivate the inquiry. To its credit, this is a book that provokes an emotional response. However, Tabbi’s reliance on the modular theory of mind (more on this later) elicits considerable discomfort even for a reader who does not consider himself or herself a traditional humanist.

     

    But first things first: Cognitive Fictions represents an important contribution to U.S. literary studies. Tabbi rightly insists that in a global culture literary studies must engage more with science and with media studies. Taking issue with what he sees as a predominantly unmediated situation of literature studies in its geopolitical framework, Tabbi suggests another approach: we must develop closer and more detailed “connections with the sciences and with those communications media whose recent expansion and unprecedented integration into everyday life made a global culture possible . . . in the first place” (xviii). Thus, if the novel is to continue to possess a recognizable cultural diversity and historical specificity, and if we are to continue to respect it for such differences, then “it first needs to define itself within and against those more globalizing powers and distribution networks that threaten to erase the novel’s medial difference” (xix).

     

    This is the task that Tabbi has set for himself. In a time when all forms of communication (image, sound, text) can be digitized, and at a point in cultural history when irony, once the hallmark of the postmodern literary, has been wholly subsumed by advertising culture, he asks along with the small group of U.S. writers he investigates: What is the novel for? What does it do? Why does our culture continue to produce and consume works of fiction? For Tabbi, the contemporary novelist’s purpose has nothing to do with nostalgia for the Real; it is not about the recovery of an “authentic” America, because in a world where electronic mass media has penetrated so deeply into the collective consciousness that distinction no longer has any value, if it ever did. The purpose of the fiction writer is rather to re-purpose or re-mediate the complex social/communications systems within which our minds and bodies are enmeshed through the processes of observation, or rather, observation of observation.

     

    Tabbi’s inspiration here is the autopoesis of Maturana and Varela, and the work of Niklas Luhmann as well. Just as “autopoesis describes a way of establishing and maintaining a system’s boundary by selecting meaningful elements (distinctions the system can use) out of an otherwise indistinct, ‘noisy,’ environment” (xxii-xxiii), the writers that Tabbi examines (at least in the latter portion of his book) obsessively observe and take notes in journalistic fashion, or rather their protagonists do. Such close observation of the social systems that constitute them makes (or marks) a difference that becomes useable as a platform for fresh insight about those systems. Tabbi explains:

     

    In recognizing the absolute closure of the system . . . , these narrators create a new distinction, which then enters into the system it describes and alters it. So the moment a narrator recognizes the possibility of keeping a "journal of the journal," or turning one's isolated inconsequential notations into an "absolutely autobiographical novel," the narrator can re-enter the system at another level (and at a later time), and thus keep things going. The distinction (analogous to what cognitive science would term a "gap" and literary theory might call the "aporia") between rhetoric and meaning, the writer/observer and the writing/system under observation, is no longer a distinction between inside and outside. Rather, by imagining oneself as "outside," the observer introduces a new distinction within the writing-system. Hence the possibility of moving the system (not necessarily "up") to a different level of complexity, so that it can function differently within the environment (because it is now structurally capable of making new distinctions and hence seeing things within the environment that were not visible before). (xxii)

     

    Here Tabbi urges that we must distinguish between autopoesis and an autotelic theory of the literary that insists upon the absolute isolation of the literary work from the hum of background noise. Autopoetic art encloses itself in and as a world of words, but it does so in relation to the outside. The distinction between the autopoetic and the autotelic is critical for Tabbi, given his desire to save for the literary artist a purpose or a value that the self-reflexive modernist lost in a hall of mirrors no longer offers us. Writers such as Paul Auster in his New York Trilogy, David Markson in Wittgenstein’s Mistress, and Harry Matthews in The Journalist are not out of touch, and they certainly don’t go about conjuring a world elsewhere in the New Critical sense. But then the real issue for Tabbi is what it means to be in touch, and how one goes about mediating reality (as a novelist) in a world where human perception is already so profoundly mediated: “Reflexivity in contemporary fiction, like autopoetic closure in cognitive science and in systems theory, is not a shutting out of the world,” Tabbi insists. “[I]t is rather a way of establishing an identity that is better able to connect with the world at particular points, when one is able, while writing, to re-cognize and put on hold one’s own literary distinctions and categories long enough to see how they might answer to distinctions in the environment” (80).

     

    The application of systems theory to literary study is promising, and it is likely that Tabbi’s project will prove inspirational for many readers and critics. Nevertheless, the difference between the autotelic and the autopoetic is often quite difficult to grasp in Tabbi’s readings; which is to say that it is hard to tell what practical value his authors and/or their protagonists get out of the close observations that constitute their textual interventions. Perhaps this is inevitable, given that Tabbi’s concern is with states of consciousness, which are of course rather ineffable stuff. Nevertheless, one is left with the distinctly unsettling impression that on Tabbi’s account we are in a world so utterly homogenized through mediation that there is no space for resistance. That is not because of his use of systems theory. If the fundamental lesson of systems theory is that human cognition is a moving blind spot, then as a theoretical framework within which to understand behavior, systems theory converges in some significant ways with other theoretical frameworks that trouble but do no obviate the value of talking about cultural resistance, such as the psychoanalytical. Blind spots are one thing, but Tabbi’s mobilization of the cognitive scientific model of mind represents in itself a discrete aspect of his theoretical strategy, and we must separate this out from systems theory.

     

    My main grouse with Cognitive Fictions has to do with Tabbi’s uncritical acceptance of what is known as the modular theory of mind, the idea that the mind/brain is made up of systems whose resources are site-specific, so to speak, or “encapsulated” with respect to the data that each contains. According to this theory, information in the brain is stored in independent modules which have either very limited or no knowledge of what goes on outside, in surrounding domains. But as Jerry Fodor has most vigorously argued in recent books, while the modular theory may indeed get the architecture of local mental states right–those that pertain to beliefs, desires, and other forms of thought that can be expressed propositionally–it explains nothing about global, or conscious, states. Fodor writes in The Mind Doesn’t Work That Way:

     

    Since the mental processes thus afflicted with globality apparently include some of the ones that are most characteristic of human cognition, I'm on balance not inclined to celebrate how much we have so far learned about how our minds work. The bottom line will be that the current situation in cognitive science is light years from being satisfactory. (5)

     

    Without getting into the considerable complexities of Fodor’s arguments, which in any case pertain mainly to the logical and empirical misgivings he has about the modularity thesis, suffice it to say that Fodor sees far greater virtue in blending domain-specific and domain-general cognitive architectures. For if the mind is entirely modular, as cognitive science is wont to argue; if “there is a more or less encapsulated processor for each kind of problem that it can solve”; and if “there is nothing in the mind that can ask questions about which solution to a problem is ‘best overall,’ that is, best in light of the totality of a creature’s beliefs and utilities,” then for Fodor cognitive science has not gotten us very far in the study of human consciousness (64). This assertion on its own is a powder keg, and I do not want to endorse it so much as to use it to point toward a problem that dogs Cognitive Fictions on another level.

     

    Following McLuhan, Tabbi assumes from the start that our electronic media are extensions of the human sensorium; in effect his book is a complex and sophisticated study of the relation between those media on the one hand and “the human measure” on the other. Whereas McLuhan in the sixties believed he confronted, as Mark Hansen puts it, “‘a situation in which the prostheses we adopt to cognize and intervene in the technologically driven material complexification of the universe only seem to expand our experiential alienation’” (x), Tabbi re-envisions the relation between human beings and their electronic prostheses, or their media environments, based on the discoveries of cognitive science. His next assumption, and it is the value rather than the accuracy of this one that I question, is that the findings of cognitive science refute McLuhan’s thesis that there is a poor fit between our media and our psychical economies. Digital information processors do of course work on the architectural principle of modularity. But instead of accepting neutrally that “emerging sciences of the mind have produced detailed descriptions of similarly communicating agents, modules, and distributed networks in us” (x), Tabbi could have more fully questioned from the start the motivations that have produced these discoveries, which are in effect metaphorical associations. In other words, what Cognitive Fictions lacks is a substantial rhetorical analysis of its cognitive science, because it is by no means a necessary correlative of systems theory. Neither is it necessarily a good fit.

     

    Tabbi’s decision to foreground systems theory and to background the cognitive theory has a practical payoff because it is a relatively safer critical strategy. It is even likely that it was the right decision, given that it frees him to pursue systems-theoretical insights rigorously. We should not be surprised, however, that it produces a big blind spot. For Tabbi fails to see the trouble into which his under-theorized articulation of cognitive science with systems theory gets him right from the start, even in spite of his explicit statement of the problem. Here is the statement, which refers back to the prior announcement of the modularity thesis: “With the coming together of these two systems–call them the mind and the medial ecology–prospects for achieving a critical distance, never hopeful in a postmodern context, seem increasingly unlikely” (x). True enough. But the prospects for achieving the kind of distance from our media ecology that would allow for truly productive critical inquiry into its conditions and effects, which is what Tabbi seems at least wistfully to hope for in this passage, are radically undermined precisely by the uncritical acceptance of the modularity thesis. If we do not assume that the mind is “coming together” with media systems by virtue of deep structural affinities, then we will invariably find ourselves talking about some other kind of interface between them–one perhaps, with more friction at work; and one, perhaps, where there is a greater possibility of achieving a productive critical distance from media forces. Tabbi is not entirely unaware of the problem. In fact he acknowledges it head on in his chapter on Pynchon and cognitive science:

     

    For a humanism that wishes to read signs of community in a multi-voiced and multicultural past, the implications [of modularity] remain disturbing: when consciousness, like corporate power, is itself composed of a collection of partially connected modules or media, what resistance is possible? .... Just as cognitive theories of the modular mind require no self, the proliferating connections among voices and identities in Pynchon's two most recent novels require no community. (52)

     

    But surely it is not only the humanists who ought to worry about the failure of community, or about the dangerous erosion in the postmodern world of any space for meaningful resistance. Tabbi does not claim that we ought to accept such an erosion blithely. Still, the particular variety of cognitive science he chooses to articulate together with systems theory leads him to recreate on the critical-theoretical level some of the same problems he insightfully exposes in the fictions he studies.

     

    Work Cited

     

    • Fodor, Jerry. The Mind Doesn’t Work That Way: The Scope and Limits of Computational Psychology. Cambridge: MIT P, 2000.

     

  • Postmodern Archaic: The Return of the Real in Digital Virtuality

    Gerald Gaylard

    Department of English
    University of the Witwatersrand, South Africa
    geraldgaylard@languages.wits.ac.za

     

    Our entire linear and accumulative culture would collapse if we could not stockpile the past in plain view.

     

    –Jean Baudrillard, Simulations 19

     

    The standard spin given to digital virtuality in our era, and not just by advertising copywriters, is that of naïve optimism. Jaishree Odin, for instance, describes hypertext as effecting a radical shift “from the linear, univocal, closed, authoritative aesthetic involving passive encounters to that of the nonlinear, multivocal, open, non-hierarchical aesthetic involving active encounters,” adding that this latter aesthetic is more capable of “representing postcolonial cultural experience since it embodies our changed conception of language, space, and time” (599). While one can certainly endorse the call for more polyglot, less rigidly hierarchical modes of practice, we should be skeptical about the role of hypertext in advancing that project. Indeed, as I will argue here, if we look past the utopian hype we can discern a tendency toward the healthy survival, even flourishing, of realist tropes and mores within digital virtuality, a tendency with a number of disturbing connotations for “postcolonial cultural experience.”

     

    Perhaps surprisingly, the digital virtuality industry today often emphasizes its naturalism and realism; it is an industry that currently sells itself less on its ability to abstract than on its increased high-focus representational resolution. In other words, digital virtuality’s initial promise to create the new, to reify the imagination, has often led rather toward more reification and objectifiction than expanded imagination. This is not only visible in some digital technology (for instance, “motion capture” in which actual human motion is the original data for “realistic” animation) and in the leagues of advertising copy in the vein of “never seen before,” “digital reality creation,” “zero defect,” “and everyone’s invited,” but also in the recently prominent quasi-surveillance of home videos and “reality TV”; docu-soapies; documentary films such as The Great Dance; films such as The Blair Witch Project, The Truman Show, The Sixth Sense, Series 7: The Contenders, and The King is Alive; atavistic rhythms in digital techno and trance music; some “new ageism,” as in Terence McKenna’s The Archaic Revival; and so on. I hope that it is clear therefore that I am using virtuality in the widest sense to include any kind of interactive digital cultural products, or any artifacts that utilize digital technology (from miniature cameras to computer games to films to internet web pages). Moreover, I am arguing that virtuality is not confined to technology, but involves a wider set of cultural practices that tend to rework the “real” in the service of commodification. I want to call these cultural practices the “postmodern archaic” because they use the enablements and blandishments of digital technology to test and ratify current notions of virtuality and reality by comparison with a version of the past. How are we to understand this plethora of digital products and practices, all raising in some way reality and realism and the relationship between them?

     

    My sense is that this technology tends to raise issues of representation in the same general way that all technological innovations require cultural adaptation to their potentials. Indeed, it might even be asserted that the quality of cultural production declines when new technologies are introduced as producers have to spend time exploring, understanding, and integrating those technologies. It is a commonplace, for instance, that when “talkies” were first introduced, they were of low quality content-wise; a similar decline from prevailing standards of quality was all too apparent when computer-generated imagery first came into vogue. So my contention is that cultures are perpetually in oscillation, or at least subject to wave-like ebbs and flows, with the rush to new and potentially less representational forms invariably precipitating a resurgence of normative realisms.

     

    To appreciate this curious give-and-take logic in the forms and technologies of representation, it is helpful to survey the major historical analyses of realism. Many of these are concerned with the genesis of modernity, with Renaissance and post-Renaissance painting, and with the novel–in particular the nineteenth-century realist novel of Balzac, Flaubert, Tolstoy, Austen, Hardy, et al. Such critics as Lukács, Auerbach, Watt, Levin, and Alter point out that narrative realism in the novel initially took the form of exhaustive, not to mention exhausting, adjectival description, particularly focusing on domestic minutiae. Typically, such novels were located in the lounge, parlor, and kitchen, although they seldom made it into the bedroom. Hence, despite the different manifestations of realism, from the classical geometries of Renaissance realism to the social realism of the nineteenth century, realism tended to take the form of mimesis or objective verisimilitude: imitation, representation, referentiality. Such belief and practice were also manifest in the early days of the cinema with Kracauer, Bazin, and others lauding celluloid for its unprecedented representationality. Television too has been a mimetic form, reflecting the spread of multinational technocracy for Langer, Kroker, and Cook, among others, and is now the format of a peculiarly postmodern form of realism: the illusion of participatory democracy fostered by “reality TV.” As Bourdon and Fetveit argue, the raison d’être of television is the promise of its being live and therefore authentic, a contract with audiences that involves them in “a specific interpretive community, and, beyond . . . a national audience” (Bourdon 550). Thus realism has been characterized, I think correctly, as the belief in the ability of signs to represent an objectively verifiable world accurately.

     

    Of course, the signs that are taken to be realistically representative are culturally specific, so the heritage of realism that concerns us here was not merely an aesthetic phenomenon but was also the cultural aspect of a massive social upheaval beginning in the West but ongoing to this day throughout the globe; ontologically this belief in disinterested representation was termed empiricism, which was reciprocally reliant upon science, industrialization, and colonialism. As Mary Louise Pratt notes, scientific exploration, involving the systematizing of nature and indigene in the eighteenth century as part of the imperial project, relied upon representation. Hence empiricist and realist disinterestedness was not culturally innocent and produced a systematization or mapping under the hegemony of the Western bourgeoisie and the authority of print. A wide diversity of critics has seen both the novel and film as bourgeois genres in thrall to a realist mode which, as Nash remarks, is “anthropocentric” (13). Realism, at least in its early days, was Western, empiricist, materialist. Readers, viewers, and writers co-founded an ordered and rational world–a world of stability in the midst of industrialism’s maelstrom, a secular humanist substitute for religion’s ontological reassurance. Realism was fuelled by the desire of the rising and insecure bourgeoisie to embed and reify its ideology, a reification perhaps most evident in the technological media artefact of the imagination of mass consumer culture, the novel, a reification that was arguably to find its most recent apogee in television. The point here about realism is not so much that the form is inherently wrong-headed, but simply that it has a specific history, a history which has not been altogether kind to non-Western worlds.

     

    Now it may seem like a large leap from the nineteenth-century realist novel to virtuality, but the essentially materialist critique of realism can still be legitimately invoked in the context of digital culture. Even in the context of new media, realism serves to provide a coherent and comforting narrative by offering an apparent anchorage in actuality. This recurrence of realism within postmodern culture becomes clear if we perform even a very brief materialist critique of Survivor, the exemplary instance of reality TV and “the most popular show in the United States.” Survivor does not utilize digital technology in particularly overt ways, though it is clearly present in the capture and playback of video and audio, editing and title sequences. Rather, as is typical of hypertext and reality TV, the series utilizes notions of accurate representation, surveillance, fame, and democracy.

     

    Survivor attempts to fuse elements of the soap-opera (a compressed series of struggles over friendship, intimacy, and betrayal within a small community, a lot of close-up emotional-response shots), the tourism show (like Lonely Planet), the eco show (wildlife documentaries), the game show (a million dollars are up for grabs in a competitive format), the detective program (“whodunnit,” or perhaps that should be “whowinsit”?), and the newer genre of reality show or infotainment docu-soap-opera (in which events and emotions are apparently spontaneous and unscripted). The plot of Survivor is rather similar to a pilgrim’s progress: via a series of tests and votes, some survive while others are eliminated and eventually, via tasks that supposedly bring the survivors closer to the elements, the environment, and the indigenous culture, the final three are “initiated” into the local tribe, though of course there is only one “sole survivor” who wins the million.

     

    Survivor is not just realistic; its realism has the incontrovertible gravitas of spontaneity under the objective gaze of the unedited lens. So the first aspect of this “new” realism is what I want to call the “illusion of spontaneity.” There was a time when the tag “based on a true story” was a lure for viewers, but now that seems no longer enough; what viewers want is the true story itself. What contemporary realism seems to demand is not only density of description, of space, of objects, in order convey verisimilitude, but also spontaneity of time, possibly because spatiality has become so hyper that time is seldom linear. So the early realist emphasis on place and linear time in the novel or on exhaustive texture in the film has shifted to an emphasis on globalized space and synchronic time, and particularly unmediated time, spontaneity. This is evident if we examine the credit sequence at the end of the show: along with the usual roll-call of post-production and casting for the Africa season were bush managers, psychologists, safety coordinators, as well as fourteen editors, eighteen cameramen, and fifteen audio personnel. At no stage are any of these production personnel or processes foregrounded in the final aired product. The illusion of spontaneity is required for television to appear live and therefore authentic and is an inheritance from the instrumental empiricism that informed the novel. Moreover, credibility fostered by immediacy is further structured by the dramatic tension so germane to novelistic narrative, a dramatic tension that is provided by accidents, revealing comments by participants, and particularly by the tribal council at the end of each episode when participants are voted off the show. The frisson of the unexpected, and therefore the live, that these moments provide further fetishizes the epistemological structures of conventional realist narrative; in other words, consumers are programmed by the rhetoric of spontaneous spectacle, the exceptional, and the individualism that underpins realism. Indeed, the placement of the unscripted, unscriptable, moment of tribal council at the end of the show provides a climax that keeps viewers watching.

     

    The second aspect of this realism, inextricably intertwined with the illusion of spontaneity, is its spatiality, which in this case is the archaic surroundings of what the narrator Jeff Probst calls “a land virtually untouched by the modern world.” The first point about these surroundings is that they are an actual physical location, a place, and physicality is always the last refuge of the authentic, the real. However, this place is also a space, a space which I want to call the “postmodern archaic.” I have chosen the word archaic because it does have a sense of spatiality as well as of time, suggesting the primitive, the old and outdated, as well as ancient habitation, ruins, or simply nature or the bush. Now of course the archaic is nothing new. Indeed, one might say that the archaic is as old as nostalgia, and, therefore, it seems important to keep in mind that the archaic is hardly a new trope in cultural production, particularly Western cultural production, and here one might cite the Bible, through Rousseau to Ruskin, Mollison and beyond. Indeed, nature or “the natural” is an invention of culture and inevitably recurs as culture becomes more and more palimpsestic, recurs as a symbolic ballast to the layered excesses of culture. As Raymond Williams has it:

     

    By "residual" I mean something different from the "archaic," though in practice these are often very difficult to distinguish. Any culture includes available elements of its past, but their place in the contemporary cultural process is profoundly variable. I would call the "archaic" that which is wholly recognized as an element of the past, to be observed, to be examined, or even on occasion to be consciously "revived," in a deliberately specializing way. What I mean by the "residual" is very different. The residual, by definition, has been effectively formed in the past, but is still active in the cultural process, not only and often not at all as an element of the past, but as an effective element of the present. (122)

     

    In the case of the postmodern archaic, the archaic isthe residual, for in its guise as nature and the corporeal it is continually available for the specialized purpose of testing and confirming contemporary culture. To put this differently, we might regard the postmodern archaic as the residual in the guise of the archaic; contemporary repurposing of the residual makes it appear original, archaic, and incontrovertible. In the theatre of this archaic we discover our “roots,” a sense of pristine organic holism, shorn of culture’s detritus. As Marianna Torgovnick argues,

     

    the metaphor of finding a home or being at home recurs over and over as a structuring pattern within Western primitivism. . . . this line of thought about the primitive takes us full circle and returns us to the earliest meanings of the word primitive as the original state of something--biological tissue, church organization, social organization. For "going home," like "going primitive," is inescapably a metaphor for the return to origins. . . . For the charm to work, the primitive must represent a common past--our past, a Euro-American past so long gone that we can find no traces of it in Western spaces. . . . The primitive must be available or our 'origins' may no longer be retrievable, re-creatable. (185-87)

     

     

    So the archaic is a sign of an authentic common past, a home that soothes modernity’s homelessness.

     

    The archaic is visible in the forgeries utilized by artists to obtain the appearance of archaic authenticity: artificial worm-holes in wood, oil paintings darkened by candle smoke, outmoded language in novels. The sense of authenticity was to be particularly important in the Modernist primitivism of Picasso, Yeats, Lawrence, and Joyce. At another level, what child has not imagined what would happen if all the technocultural scaffolding and paraphernalia of contemporary life were to disappear? Hence the archaic has been particularly prevalent in depictions of childhood and fantasy, and the corollary is also true, that the archaic is often infantilized. So the archaic has a past, and its present can be identified in any number of contemporary cultural phenomena, including neo-tribalism, neo-paganism, aspects of the ecological movement, conservation, concern for the endangerment of tribals and their lifestyles, certain religions, reality television, and so on. At the postcolonial level, the long history of the archaicization of Africa, for instance, can be traced back to at least early cartography, nineteenth-century imperial romances as in Rider Haggard, the ethnicization of the female primitive in Saartje Bartmann, the fetishized images of the bushman and frontiersman, the work of Laurens van der Post, wildlife documentaries, recreations of dinosaurs and so on. Such archaicization is also prominent in the frontier theme so dominant in America, particularly in the Western. These images and stories tend to preserve the bush and its aboriginal denizens as pristine, primeval, authentic, and as a commodity for consumption. The archaic can also be found in the reaction of various nationalisms to these imperial images in the valorization of indigenous cultures, traditions and landscapes. Nevertheless, what is postmodern about this archaism in contemporary culture is the extent to which it is reified as a simulation, a Baudrillardian simulation. Jameson notes that

     

    nostalgia film, consistent with postmodernist tendencies generally, seeks to generate images and simulacra of the past, thereby--in a social situation in which genuine historicity or class traditions have become enfeebled--producing something like a pseudo-past for consumption as a compensation and a substitute for, but also a displacement of, that different kind of past which (along with active visions of the future) has been a necessary component for groups of people in other situations in the projection of their praxis and the energizing of their collective project. (137)

     

    What makes this archaic postmodern is the extent to which it is apparently real, spontaneous, live; the extent that technology has become fast enough to capture or outpace reality. The “postmodern archaic” in this case is the utilization of a reservoir of symbolic archaic value as the backdrop and test for “progress”; in other words, the desert island, the outback, the savannah, are yardsticks to measure how far modern people have come from their “roots,” and to determine whether they can still functionally return to them. The pristine is so appealing because in an era of vertiginous change it can be made to be a relative constant, and because it can act as an empiricist, realist litmus test and, hopefully, validation of contemporary hyperculture. In other words, the postmodern archaic might be seen as part of the ongoing human attempt to cleanse and stabilize nature and the visceral, to control the messiness of the flesh, and what is particularly postmodern about this is that it is technology that is the agent of the sanitizing sublimation. Hence I am using a Jamesonian distinction between the postmodern (as in the sociohistorical era) and postmodernism (reflexive cultural production in and about that era) to emphasize Baudrillard’s notion of the “simulacrum” that characterizes the postmodern. Indeed, postmodernity or the postmodern has been consistently characterized as a space rather than a place due to its dependency on globalization and simulation. According to this distinction, Survivor is definitely an example of a postmodern simulacrum, rather than of critical, reflexive postmodernism (which may well be simulacral itself). As John Langer suggests of disaster coverage in Tabloid Television, this simulacrum attempts to forestall the depersonalization and community breakdown that accompanies technocratic postmodernity.

     

    Thus we see that in the Survivor: Africa season, many attempts are made to integrate the contestants with the locale so that challenges and rewards partially involve the local flora and fauna and local practices such as bartering and drinking cow’s blood (as the Masai do). Hence the postmodern archaic is not merely a test, but is motivated by a Luddite consciousness, and in particular by what N. Katherine Hayles calls “corporeal anxiety,” the fear of dematerialization of the body, and a corollary need for community/family/tribal bonds (800). Thus what is also piquantly postmodern about this archaicism is the apocalyptic anxiety that the archaic, our own roots as externalized in primitive societies and locales, is disappearing at an accelerating pace. Baudrillard similarly links anxiety and panic with nostalgia:

     

    When the real is no longer what it used to be, nostalgia assumes its full meaning. There is a proliferation of myths of origin and signs of reality; of second-hand truth, objectivity and authenticity. There is an escalation of the true, of the lived experience; a resurrection of the figurative where the object and substance have disappeared. And there is a panic-stricken production of the real and the referential, above and parallel to the panic of material production: this is how simulation appears in the phase that concerns us: a strategy of the real, neo-real and hyperreal. (12-13)

     

    This nostalgia requires that the viewers of Survivor consume the genetic substrate of the archaic authentic and thus establish its authenticity; the word is made flesh in an act of ingestion, voyeurism enters the body. Clearly Lukács is hardly enough and psychoanalytic analysis is of utility here. Much has been made of the link between cannibalism, vampirism and consumer capitalism, and here I think that we see the same connection in that capitalism involves incorporation via ingestion. Perhaps we might call this canny capitalism? Sparkle Hayter satirizes Survivor as a contained and sanitized capitalism in a short story which postulates that real castaways would have to resort to cannibalism in order to survive. If we consider that money today is virtualized in terms of computer transactions, but we can still make a withdrawal of actual physical cash from the machine and thus confirm the veracity of virtual capital, then via consuming the illusion of spontaneity and the postmodern archaic, the postmodern subject is able to confirm the veracity of virtual culture today.

     

    In the cow’s blood drinking scene in Kenya in the Survivor: Africa season, for instance, the host Jeff Probst comments, “I’m going to tell you up front, when I first saw this done it seemed very brutal to me, but I spent a lot of time with these guys and found out exactly the opposite, cattle are revered . . . cattle are truly a source of life, what’s going to happen is something they do every day and how they live.” While this might be seen as admirable postcolonial foregrounding of cultural position and prejudice, the prejudicial is immediately re-established by Probst’s next comment, “just to assure you, we’ve tested and quarantined this cow, this one is completely clean,” something reinforced by the camera’s lingering glance on the blanching face of one of the women contestants when blood is mentioned. This cultural othering is further compounded when Probst pours the blood into a glass jar while saying “pour it into a serving container that suits you guys,” which might indeed be a metaphor for the postmodern archaic as a whole. Furthermore, such scenes of ingestion are not only characteristic of the “eat or be eaten” ethos of capitalism, but have become a trope in reality television, partly because they appear to be live, but also because the trope of the “gross out” is not just an exercise in multicultural tolerance but in sensationalizing the limits of cultural tolerance through stomach-turning. Scandal is required for the maintenance of viewer interest, but the scandal must always be contained within culturally sanctioned boundaries of acceptability. Thus the postmodern archaic has the double function of both critiquing contemporary culture and retroactively ratifying that culture.

     

    Hence Survivor might well be accused of tokenism, for not only are there no indigenous inhabitants taking part in the show–all the contestants and backing crew are American (the only locals credited in the Africa production were a location manager and carpenters)–but also the gestures toward the indigenous are almost insultingly offhand and exoticizing. The music in the Australian Survivor (composed by Russ Landau and David Vanacore), for instance, alternates between schmaltzy neo-classical in the scenes construed as patriotic to the United States, so that when the contestants chat to their families via the internet in one reward violins swell portentously. On the other hand, indigenous scenes are accompanied by “primitive” indigenous drumming or spooky didgeridoo playing to indicate threatening danger. This contrast is most apparent in the Survivor: Thailand season when in one episode the survivors sing the cheery yuletide song “Sleigh Ride” on a sultry summer’s night, with the camera panning into the moonlit Thai landscape with eerie accompanying music. In fact, the theme tune to the series is called “Ancient Voices” in the credit sequence. This aural sensationalism exoticizes the archaic and appropriates the other. In fact, Africa, Australia, Asia, and so on in Survivor are understood through projections of the repressed of the West, as in Conrad’s evergreen Heart of Darkness. A necessary background in reading realist media production today would seem to be critical postcolonialism alongside formalism and psychoanalytical theory, at the least.

     

    Of course, it is not my intention to disparage these noble attempts, noble savage attempts, to embrace the other, but I cannot get away from the fact that they are merely a façade amounting to no more than local color, for the narrative of the game itself is a capitalist orgy of “democratic” voting, defeat, accumulation, and victory. The initiation into the local(e), this neo-tribalism, cannot be allowed to interfere with a bigger tribalism, a nationalist agenda; hence the triumphal finale ratifying capitalism with a final vote into millionaire status, the golden calf of America. A central transcultural aspect of the game show is its valorizing of competition, materialism, commodity fetishism, and winning. In game shows the linking of specialized knowledge and skills with material reward instantiates the capitalist ideological underpinnings to American value systems. While the “third world,” savage, primitive archaic is apparently there as a test, the game as such is not tested because it embodies the notions of the law of the jungle and survival of the fittest.

     

    Thus the mirage of a test is partially there to quiet the apocalyptic anxieties of a decadent culture; if the United States fell apart or was attacked by its enemies and became a wasteland, Americans and their culture could still survive and flourish because their culture is natural. As Baudrillard notes, “everything is metamorphosed into its inverse in order to be perpetuated in its purged form” (37). In a sense, then, Survivor offers to American audiences not only the opportunity to test and ratify their culture, but also the chance to consolidate a collective identity, the possibility for a Barthesian plaisir, a pleasure in self-recognition and hence validation. Unlike many other game shows, Survivor does not offer substantial consolation prizes. There was one season in which all the players received a car, and the runner-up always receives one hundred thousand dollars. But these exceptions aside, losers are sent home with nothing to show beyond a chance at some publicity and post-production photo opportunities.

     

    But while the show does superficially offer us survivalism, a narrative that confirms the “law of the jungle,” it is carefully scripted and contained. The host, Jeff Probst, maintains center stage as the organizing voice of authority and control, the voice of the father, echoing Chion’s claim that television is vococentric in that the voice “orients the viewers decisively in certain directions of interpretation” (Bourdon 541). It is no mere idiosyncracy of style that has Probst affecting frontiersman khaki fatigues and an imperious manner. This is clearly a patriarchal cultural model, with the father as the voice of authority, the “immunity idol” as phallic talisman, and the contestants as Oedipal children jockeying for his divinely impartial approval or disapprobation in the form of extinction. To take this Freudian model further, the archaic landscape may well be the feminine, a primitive oceanic in which the children find home. Moreover, the show is very ritualized; the same routines are utilized in the same places at regimented times. The off-screen props that actually enable this quasi-survivalism were revealed most dramatically when one of the contestants fell into the fire in the Survivor–the Outback season and was badly burned: he was airlifted out in a helicopter. No doubt one of the rather ghoulish pleasures that the show offers to audiences is the threat of danger that does accompany even such a scripted and supported trip into the apparently wild. Moreover, the audience revels in any sudden changes in the plot or between the characters, much as it would respond to a change of fortunes in a novel or sitcom.

     

    It is in this way that the game appears “natural” and therefore “unquestionable.” In other words, capitalism must be the ultimate culture because it is not a culture as such but in fact unmediated nature, verisimilitudinous naturalism; the divide between nature and nurture collapses. So the totem of the tribe is not the desert island, the outback, or the savannah, but the game itself–competition with winner takes all as its crowning decapitation. The totem is capitalism, the law of the jungle, the constitutive principle of the tribe as such. Indeed, one might be tempted to read this particular brand of hyper-realism as a justification of the pax Americana (or should that be belli Americana?). This is graphically evident in the Survivor: Marquesas season in which Probst informs the contestants at their first tribal council in a picturesque building that “all over the Marquesas there are ancient dwellings like this one, for thousands of years things have taken place here, everything from sacrifice to other rituals; tribal council is certainly a ritual, the vote definitely a sacrifice, because this is where you are held accountable for your actions on the island.” Capitalism must contain the archaic in order both to conceal and to justify its savagery. Here the ancient myths of purification and justice via abasement and suffering are reinforced. As Langer notes of the restoration of order in television news, “these stories reassure us that the social organism has an ‘immune system’ which can expel untoward and even astonishing interference. Risk to the community ultimately offers us ‘faith’ in the community” (125).

     

    The academic who has perhaps written most extensively about this issue of postmodern archaicism is Dean MacCannell in Empty Meeting Grounds: The Tourist Papers. MacCannell makes the point that tourism stages authenticity in order to appeal to exotic expectations that center around temporary escape from the West. He goes on to say that postmodern archaicism which exoticizes the apparently genuine primitive other in an act of identity tourism is not so much a metaphoric guilt expiation, but an actual guilt being expiated, for we have in fact completely wiped out our “savage” ancestors (one might, perhaps uncharitably, construe the neo-tribalism of Survivor as more about an American attempt to obliterate guilt at the colonial genocide of native Americans than about embracing a multivalent global). MacCannell says:

     

    The touristic ideal of the "primitive" is that of a magical resource that can be used without actually possessing or diminishing it. Within tourism, the "primitive" occupies a position not unlike that of the libido or the death drive in psychoanalysis, or the simple-minded working class of National Socialism which was supposed to have derived an ultimate kind of fulfilment in its labour for the Fatherland. Or the physicist's dream of room-temperature superconductivity and table-top fusion. These are all post-capitalist moral fantasies based on a desire to deny the relationship between profit and exploitation. Let's pretend that we can get something for nothing. The fable is as follows: The return on the tour of headhunters and cannibals is to make the tourist a real hero of alterity. It is his coming into contact with and experience of the ultra-primitive which gives him his status. But this has not cost the primitives anything. Indeed, they too, may have gained from it. Taking someone's picture doesn't cost them anything, not in any Western commercial sense, yet the picture has value. The picture has no value for the primitive, yet the tourist pays for the right to take pictures. The "primitive" receives something for nothing, and benefits beyond this. Doesn't the fame of certain primitives, and even respect for them, actually increase when the tourist carries their pictures back to the West? It seems to be the most perfect realization so far of the capitalist economists' dream of everyone getting richer together. (28-9)

     

    The idea here is to give some guilt-expiating value to the primitive, but not enough to invest in its economic uplift, otherwise even the appearance of it will completely disappear, and not enough for the primitive as an aspect of ourselves to disappear. What the consuming public wants is not the archaic but the image of the archaic, because the archaic itself involves too much suffering. So what is demanded is the illusion of authenticity, which at the very least is the condemnation of artifice via an unhistoricized simulation of nature. It seems that a community always requires enough guilt to retain its members; postmodern communities find just this amount of guilt in a peculiar version of the archaic.

     

    We might witness this structuring of community around a belief in its own value in a host of cultural productions today. The postmodern archaic is not merely located within the putatively primitive, but manifests in other sociohistorically specific ways that buttress the postmodern community’s sense of self: for instance, in the previous generation of technology and culture, within classical and neo-classical “style,” inside woman as “the natural,” as a form of neo-Luddism, and so on. This form seldom takes the extreme neo-Luddite manifestation of the American Unabomber, Kirkpatrick Sale, or Scott Savage, who have all written technophobic manifestos, but certainly utilizes nostalgic, technoskeptical, conspiratorial, and/or neo-rural ideas. To cite just one mainstream cultural example, the conservative Hollywood film You’ve Got Mail provides a resolution to the challenges of corporate monopoly through a saccharine romanticism enabled by e-mail in which the locus of value is to be found in the individual and the quaint corner-shop which caters to a small community.

     

    Nevertheless, Survivor does evince some small degree of postmodernism’s reflexivity, a reflexivity which also helps to account for its popularity. The game embodies a sense of doubt about the valency and meaning of progress and modernity, particularly in their relation to the real, a suspicion that the archaic is ineluctable and that ancient cultures are worth sustaining, if only because they have proved to be sustainable and to respect their environments. Thus the postmodern archaic is an embodiment and measure of alienation from contemporary cultures, an instantiation of doubt about the virtualization and digitalization of the real. Moreover, in the Survivor show, contestants are essentially posed a moral dilemma: whether to embrace capitalist survival whole-heartedly, and inevitably to deceive and betray, or to take an ethical standpoint via another value system, and thereby inevitably lose the game. This is complicated by the fact that embracing capitalism requires extreme cunning; some facade of moral righteousness is required in order not to rile the morals of the other contestants or jury who might vote you off. It is this moral dilemma, the complexity and ambivalence of morality in a community which is motivated by selfish greed, which is important in the popularity of soap-operas and helps explain the success of Survivor.

     

    The show does not end there, for there is a final episode in the Australian season entitled “Back from the Outback,” which details how Survivor affected the lives of the contestants. Here realism is taken one step further, for the virtual archaic is shown not only to have profoundly affected people’s lives, but also to have leaked into the contemporary real. Hence, even if the show is not “real,” it has “real,” mundane, everyday, effects and ramifications; contestants are never the same once they have been on the show. For some contestants this is a boon, for they are depicted as able to capitalize on their media exposure and become celebrities in their own right: from siege by autograph-seekers, to popular ministry, to busy Hollywood schedules, to propositions to pose nude in Playboy. For others, this is a nightmare as media exposé renders their private embarrassments public. For most of the contestants, some combination of dream and horror is their aftershock from the show. Further, the show’s official website is interactive and contains a number of articles critical of the series. Hence the series and its peripheral media do reflect upon its status as a show and its ramifications upon the contemporary mundane. However, those reflections are, like the show as a whole, genuflections to the real, and as such efface the mechanisms of their artifice. The audience is given no clue as to the intertextuality of this hyper-realism, for instance, and hence the series eschews the self-reflexivity so prominent in the postmodernism of Tarantino and Lynch, for instance. Even the self-reflexive aspects of the show are part of the feedback mechanism of the archaic; the lessons learnt in the archaic are brought back to the present in order to establish continuity with the past and hence ratify that present.

     

    Thus it appears that without a vigilant self-reflexivity, almost any cultural production in any genre can reassert dangerously reactionary tropes and mores. I am not suggesting that Survivor is the model for all reality TV, let alone for postmodern digital virtuality, but Survivor shows how virtuality can raise issues of “reality,” authenticity, voyeurism, censorship, sensationalism, ethics, postmodernity, and postmodernism, without responding to these issues in a particularly probing way.

     

    A rather more self-reflexive Hollywood production that is based upon, and satirizes, reality TV is Series 7: The Contenders. Directed by Daniel Minahan, this movie involves contenders having to slaughter each other, a comment on the demands of voyeurism, the quest for an authentic reality, and the supposed appeal of “snuff” movies. The film may also be satirizing special effects films and the notion that the screen may be a cyborg training site. The killing theme suggests that murder is the logical result of the lethal combination of the television networks’ desire to make a huge profit (after all, having contestants is surely cheaper than paying a cast in the long term) and viewers’ voyeuristic desire for realistic sensationalism. The dangerous combination of sensationalism and profit leads to the egotistical exhibitionism that reality TV encourages, and reinforces the dictum that all publicity is good publicity.

     

    However, there seems to be a deeper psychological underpinning to what is happening in Series 7: The Contenders. The heroine, Dawn, is a pregnant pragmatist who will stop at nothing to stay with and protect her baby–a protagonist therefore representing the hapless innocence of the physical archaic in the face of the inhumane progenitors of the game. In other words, the film presents a Survivor-type alternative to thrill-seeking blood-thirsty postmodern consumerism in the organic body, female and individualized. The narrative stages the return of our heavily pregnant heroine to her past where she encounters her first, and only, true love, Jeff. The two of them had been the only two outsiders in their middle American school and had collaborated on a school art video project which we are duly shown: to the doom-laden chords of 1980’s noir band Joy Division’s “Love will Tear Us Apart Again,” the young pair cavort in full gothic attire until, in true liebestod style, Jeff ends up dead on the tarmac. Our heroine, pregnant with the future, finds that she is still in love with the authenticity of her past with all of its castration-complex, love-death alienation. So the film suggests that the alternative to the brutality of postmodern hypermedia voyeurism is to be found in Hollywood’s oldest theme: the triumph of the lonely cowboy, the revenge of the nerd, the justification of the modernist cult of alienation. This version of the postmodern archaic reflexively accepts and ratifies the heart of darkness within the West, and in so doing sublimates that darkness into a noble savagery underlying the palimpsestic layers of culture, nostalgically praising that past while simultaneously killing it. As in The Truman Show, the only thing that can save is the authenticity of human reciprocity, a heterosexual love boat that must inevitably drown in the sunset. Thus, while Series 7: The Contenders, like The Truman Show and a number of other examples of “cinema vérité” which expose the truth via virtuality, ostensibly exposes the dynamics of media hype, but its moral grandstanding and revivification of tropes of archaism tend to replicate the melodramatic individualism of the very hype it critiques. Viewers of such exposés can exult along with the director in their intellectual superiority to the mindless consumers of docu-soap operas.

     

    Another film to treat such themes is The King Is Alive, which takes the familiar concept of archaic survival, and runs with it in a characteristic yet challenging way. First, the film, directed by Kristian Levring, is part of the “Dogme 95” concept developed by Levring along with Lars von Trier, Thomas Vinterberg, and Søren Kragh-Jacobsen: a concept that eschews all post-production and anything that is not found on location. This means that the film, shot chronologically on three handheld digital cameras, is characteristic of the survival genre. The plot consists of the stranding of a bus-load of Western tourists in the dune sea of Namibia; indeed a desert island, but without the relief of a blue sea counterpoint to its sand waves. These castaways, as in the Robinson Crusoe tradition, are not alone; the single native inhabitant of a deserted village where they find shelter acts as a choric voice to their attempts to evade the boredom and insanity that accompany their unhingement from modernity and its distractions. These attempts assume an antic disposition via the staging of King Lear. Lear seems to have been chosen because it is a play that deals with the loss of a kingdom, but also because it turns around a tragic moment in which the King asks of language that it embody accurately the realm of feeling and imagination when he insists that his inheritance will devolve to the daughter best able to “say” her love:

     

    Tell me, my daughters
    Since now we will divest us both of rule,
    Interest of territory, cares of state,
    Which of you shall we say doth love us most,
    That we our largest bounty may extend
    Where nature doth with merit challenge. Gonerill,
    Our eldest born, speak first. (Shakespeare, 1.1.48-54)

     

    Cordelia refuses this demand that the language of “rule . . . territory . . . state” embody love, and in so doing rejects the demand for verisimilitude and institutes the tragic action of the play. Her rejection is motivated not only by a child’s rebelliousness, but also by the refusal to use any language, let alone the glossy language of the court, for she feels her experience and love have altogether more gravitas: “I am sure my love’s / More ponderous than my tongue” (1.1.77-78). It would seem that this episode from King Lear has been chosen to cast a reflexive comment upon the plot of the film itself. Plots of this type hold out the promise of verisimilitude, of testing culture against archaic nature, through the castaway theme. Culture, the play within the play, holds out the promise of a defense against, or triumph over, nature through realistic accuracy and resolution, but is unable to deliver on this promise because it is never able to embody the real in speech. The demand that language, culture, embody the actual inevitably leads to tragic results.

     

    In the play, as in the film, these tragic results are a ramification of the linking of sexuality and identity through language. Confronted with the shallowness of languages, and hence exposed to self-revelation and consequent sexual insecurity, a number of the characters attempt to avoid self-revelation through sexual conquest. In the first case, a Western woman attempts to “make her husband jealous” by seducing the black driver of the bus. Her assumptions here are sexist in the sense that she imagines that all men are instantaneously sexually available, and racist in that black men are imagined as particularly sexual and sensuous. She even has the effrontery to tell the driver that her purposes are entirely selfish and then ask whether she is a “bitch.” However, her attempt to elevate her own esteem by subjecting the male backfires when he forces her to her knees in a submissive posture that inverts her original intent, reducing her to anger and further verbal abuse.

     

    In the second case, the woman’s husband precipitately beats the black bus driver for sleeping with her, not realizing that the act was unconsummated. He thus exposes his insecurity as well as an outlook no less racist and sexist than his wife’s–leading her to reject him as a “pig.” These episodes are brought to culmination when the aloof father of the rejected husband sleeps with a flirtatious younger American woman and is deluded by her enthusiastic sexual response into a kind of erotic egotism. In other words, a certain kind of sexualized self-esteem requires realistic embodied confirmations. When she tells him that she faked her response and that she finds him disgusting, his new found inflated ego implodes and he murders her and commits suicide. It is as the other travelers mourn these deaths that their rescuers arrive, an unnamed party of Namibians. The suggestion is, I think, that rescue from the demands for realism, from the external confirmations and embodiments required by eroticized egotism, has as a prerequisite the death of that ego and the silencing of that culture.

     

    While it may be thought that the film takes an arrogantly superior stance to all of these selfish shenanigans, it contrasts with Series 7 in refusing to grant the intellectual a superior status or elite position. This intellectual, the French woman Romane Bohringer, refuses to play Cordelia and join in the action of the play, but despite her critical detachment and skepticism, she is never installed in the position of reliable commentator. The role of commentator falls, rather, to Peter Kubheka, the native inhabitant of the ghost town, who says that the foreigners “speak without speaking to each other” and do so in order to avoid the voice of the desert. In this his commentary is clearly accurate, and is the voice left after the hapless visitors have departed. This is one digital virtuality that offers no easy cultural certitudes for viewers.

     

    The postmodern archaic and hyperrealism are so prevalent in contemporary cultural production, as evident in the especially glaring example of Survivor and in these two rather more reflexive examples, partly because of cultural and corporeal anxiety. Modernity and postmodernity instantiate such accelerated change that anxiety and vertigo are inevitable by-products. This anxiety manifests in viewers who, because they are spending so much of their lives in front of the television or computer screen, demand increasing verisimilitude from their reality generators. It also manifests within the media industry, which is keen to establish its credentials as well as to make money and hence foists, as it were, verisimilitude upon viewers. The result of this is that, on the one hand, there is so much actuality on television that it has tainted the less realistic footage, so that people unconsciously absorb much of what they are watching as true; while on the other hand, the fictional material has similarly pervaded the real so that the real always seems to have an element of the bizarre and predictable about it. Indeed this interpenetration of culturally coded perception and reality may be an index of the predominance of visual literacy in the late twentieth and early twenty-first centuries.

     

    The postmodern audience has become predictable in its demand for unpredictability, yet also requires recognition and comfort as an antidote to anxiety. This demand for the illusion of spontaneity and for comfort is often captured by the collaging of different subtexts, many of them not culturally or historically innocent, in the creation of a “simulacrum” in which a particular consciousness, national in the case of Survivor, is technologically embodied and hence confirmed. The illusion of spontaneity normalizes the panopticon, normalizes surveillance, and the postmodern archaic normalizes culture and patterns of consumption. Even where digitalization enters the realm of the fantastic, it is seldom to confirm the existence of realms of the imagination, but rather to reify the products of the imagination, and, ultimately, to sell them. Of course, what is elided by this illusion is the suturing that sews these sub-texts together and the ideological underpinnings of these sub-texts, the dynamic of the links so to speak. So in a sense, traditional film and literary study and criticism, which are all about exposing the ideological underpinnings of suturing, are more appropriate than ever before. Of course, traditional film/literary critical models now need to be more flexible, multivalent, and open to a far greater variety of texts than ever before.

     

    To conclude, the problem with responses to the dispersal of the subject and the ubiquity of surveillance that tend to characterize contemporary cultural production is that the old verities can sneak in through the back door. As fragmentation and dispersal occur, so anxiety and nostalgia flourish; the dream of depth and authenticity reasserts itself. So virtuality creates its own critique via a postmodern realism, and ironically that critique helps shore up virtuality (indeed, digital communication seems particularly suited to render critique, debate, and difference as display rather than as incommensurability). Within virtuality there is an apocalyptic fear of floating too far from the visceral, and hence ironically a whole strand of current cultural production shies away from the new and shelters within the realist. I think that interest in the archaic is vital at this sociohistorical juncture, because without thinking of ourselves in different spaces in the far-distant past and future we have very little perspective on ourselves now. What we understand by the archaic should not be a romanticized psychological projection, nor a creation of the very corporations whose existence threatens the archaic. Moreover, the future of realism seems assured in the sense that the further away from the archaic and corporeal we move, the more we will need to return to it to ratify our progress. The further from the archaic we journey, the more regular and insistent our trips “back” to it have to become. These trips have to be made because without them we have no sense of “progress”; the body itself enforces them by reminding us of our physicality. As Marianna Torgovnick notes, “our interest in the primitive meshes thoroughly, in ways we have only begun to understand, with our passion for clearly marked and definable beginnings and endings that will make what comes between them coherent narrations. A significant motivation for primitivism in modernism, and perhaps especially in postmodernism, is a new version of the idyllic, utopian primitive” (245). The postmodern archaic is likely to increase in future, and realism is unlikely to disappear. The tribe has spoken.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Baudrillard, Jean. Simulations. Trans. Paul Foss, Paul Patton, and Philip Beitchman. New York: Semiotext(e), 1983.
    • Bourdon, Jérôme. “Live Television is Still Alive: On Television as an Unfulfilled Promise.” Media, Culture & Society 22.5 (2000): 531-56.
    • Fetveit, Arild. “Reality TV in the Digital Era: a Paradox in Visual Culture?” Media, Culture & Society 21.6 (1999): 787-804.
    • Hayles, N. Katherine. “Corporeal Anxiety in Dictionary of the Khazars: What Books Talk About in the Late Age of Print When They Talk about Losing their Bodies.” Modern Fiction Studies 43.3 (1997): 800-20.
    • Hayter, Sparkle. “The Diary of Sue Peaner, Marooned! Contestant.” Tart Noir. Eds. Stella Duffy and Lauren Henderson. London: Pan, 2002. 294-302.
    • Jameson, Fredric. “On Magic Realism in Film.” Signatures of the Visible. London: Routledge, 1992. 128-54.
    • The King Is Alive. Dir. Kristian Levring. Perf. Miles Anderson, Romane Bohringer, David Bradley, David Calder, Bruce Davison, Brion James, Peter Kubhka, Vusi Kunene, Jennifer Jason Leigh, Janet McTeer, Chris Walker, Lia Williams. MGM, 2001.
    • Kroker, Arthur, and David Cook. The Postmodern Scene: Excremental Culture and Hyper-Aesthetics. Montreal: New World Perspectives, 1996.
    • Langer, John. Tabloid Television: Popular Journalism and the “Other News.” London: Routledge, 1998.
    • MacCannell, Dean. Empty Meeting Grounds: The Tourist Papers. London: Routledge, 1992.
    • Nash, Christopher. World Postmodern Fiction: A Guide. London: Longman, 1993.
    • Odin, Jaishree K. “The Edge of Difference: Negotiations between the Hypertextual and the Postcolonial.” Modern Fiction Studies 43.3 (1997): 598-630.
    • Pratt, Mary Louise. Imperial Eyes: Travel Writing and Transculturation. London: Routledge, 1992.
    • Series 7: The Contenders. Dir. Daniel Minahan. Perf. Brooke Smith, Marylouise Burke, Glenn Fitzgerald. Blow Up Pictures, 2001.
    • Shakespeare, William. King Lear. London: Penguin, 1988.
    • Survivor. Seasons 1-5. Survivor: Thailand (2002); Survivor: Marquesas (2002); Survivor: Africa (2001); Survivor: The Australian Outback (2001); Survivor: Pulau Tiga (2000). CBS.
    • Torgovnick, Marianna. Gone Primitive: Savage Intellects, Modern Lives. London: U of Chicago P, 1990.
    • Williams, Raymond. “Dominant, Residual and Emergent.” Marxism and Literature. Oxford: Oxford UP, 1977. 121-127.

     

  • Reading Cultural Studies, Reading Foucault

    Rimi Khan

    School of Media Communication and Culture
    Murdoch University, Western Australia
    rimikhan@hotmail.com

     

    Because there is commonly such a buzz of contradictory comment going on around him–as his friends and enemies push him to the left, right, and centre or sometimes off the political spectrum altogether–Foucault could assert that it proves what he contends: conventional categories really don’t fit him; he is posing an entirely new and different set of questions about a whole range of sometimes unthought of matters. . . . The academic effort to appropriate, correct, or dismiss Foucault has gone on even more intensely–sometimes brilliantly, sometimes stupidly , and sometimes with troubling seriousness.

     

    Paul Bové, “The Foucault Phenomenon” viii

     
    In a commentary on cultural studies’ “theoretical legacies,” Stuart Hall describes the field as “a project that is always open to that which it doesn’t yet know, to that which it can’t yet name” (“Legacies” 278). Proclamations of this sort are easy enough to find throughout cultural studies’ accounts of its own history–they serve as a generalized reference to its self-image as an interdisciplinary, and, consequently, self-reflexive set of pedagogical and investigative practices. Given the currency that such thinking still carries within cultural studies, it is important to continue to ask what it is actually possible to say and do in cultural studies’ name.1 In particular, I want to consider, after Meaghan Morris, “how it comes about that people keep posing problems at a level of generality where you simply can’t solve them” and, in doing so, to point toward less burdened modes of analysis that enable cultural studies to be politically significant in new ways (Hunter, “Aesthetics” 371).

     

    On these questions, I have found Foucault’s work–and a review of the ways in which his work has been received within cultural studies–to be particularly instructive. Deleuze writes that “Foucault is not content to say that we must rethink certain notions; he does not even say it; he just does it, and in this way proposes new co-ordinates for praxis” (30). This article considers some of the ways these investigative possibilities have been put to use within cultural studies. My aim is, in part, to document encounters that precede and enable this present set of counterpoints, but also, I hope, to intervene in this awkward intellectual terrain.

     

    Relatively little has been written on the history of appropriations of Foucault within cultural studies.2 Some works–for example, Gavin Kendall and Gary Wickham’s Understanding Culture: Cultural Studies, Order, Ordering and Tony Bennett’s Culture: A Reformer’s Science–have examined secondary readings of Foucault, commenting generally on cultural studies’ attempts to use Foucault’s insights on power within a broadly Gramscian framework. Both of these works are concerned to demonstrate the problems involved with early Foucauldian influence. As Bennett contends,

     

    in effect, Foucault was admitted into the cultural studies roll-call only on the condition that he brought no troublesome Foucaultian arguments with him. The role accorded his work was not that of reformulating received problems so much as being tagged on to arguments framed by the very formulations he questioned. . . . Quoted extensively, he was used very little. (Culture 63)

     

    I go on to elaborate on such arguments by detailing some of the more revealing moments of this fraught history.

     

    Structure, Power and the “Marx Problem”

     

    In his recitation of the “story” of cultural studies, Hall notes that cultural studies’ adaptation of Marxism involved a certain degree of friction:

     

    There never was a prior moment when cultural studies and Marxism represented a perfect theoretical fit. . . . There was always-already the question of the great inadequacies, theoretically and politically, the resounding silences, the great evasions of Marxism–the things that Marx did not talk about or seem to understand which were our privileged object of study: culture, ideology, language, the symbolic. . . . That is to say, the encounter between British cultural studies and Marxism has first to be understood as the engagement with a problem–not a theory, not even a problematic. (“Legacies” 279)

     

    Procuring a theory of “culture” from Marxism requires that these gaps or “great inadequacies” be resolved. In his Cultural Marxism in Postwar Britain, Dennis Dworkin provides a historical account and details the political and intellectual climate surrounding some of these revisions of Marxism within the cultural studies tradition. E.P. Thompson’s brand of social humanism, for instance, is largely described as a product of the prevailing modes of party politics and their relationship with intellectuals, and an attempt to work against the rigid economism characteristic of leftist orthodoxies of the time. The terms of such debates have not been displaced, however; the discursive limits that defined the intellectual controversies that Dworkin describes should figure significantly if we are to make sense of cultural studies’ eventual uptakes of Foucault.

     

    Raymond Williams is, of course, another crucial figure in this reconstitution of “culture” within British postwar sociological analysis. Williams’s influences vary, and the development of his thought cannot be reduced to a deliberate, straightforward “reworking” of Marxist cultural thought. Williams’s intellectual work carries an urgency informed by his experiences of English working-class life. In the face of this sense of immediacy, the “levels” of culture and various categories of Marxist analysis appear abstract. In this framework, the concept “culture,” as Williams argues in Culture and Society, is conceived within the context of a weak use of “superstructure.” Here “culture” refers to a “general social process” or “whole way of life” and allows for a more ready inclusion of the category of experience (273). By enabling a more pragmatic and quotidian meaning of and use for “culture,” Williams’s quasi-anthropological delineation of “culture” as a “whole way of life” opens up an important analytical space for British cultural studies.

     

    Williams’s later work gives the fluidity implied by this formulation a more theoretical substantiation and speaks in more decisively Marxist terms. For instance, in his momentous “Base and Superstructure in Marxist Cultural Theory,” Williams explains at length the dilemmas raised by a literal use of the base-superstructure metaphor. By suggesting the possibility of a synthesis between mechanisms of production and “ordinary” forms of consumption and cultural practice, he attempts to account for “deep contradictions in the relationships of production and in the consequent social relationships” (5). What Williams proposes, then, is a revaluation of the concepts of “base,” “superstructure,” and “determination” to include some consideration of “social intention,” while retaining the notion of “social being determining consciousness” (7).

     

    For Williams, Gramsci’s work goes some way toward resolving this tension by offering a useful stylization of Marxism and a new theoretical dimension to his earlier positions. It is especially his notion of “hegemony” that mitigates a rigid Marxist reductionism and guarantees the necessary element of “intention.” “Hegemony” must “continually be renewed, recreated and defended,” so that domination is seen to occur only through the negotiation and shaping of popular consent (“Base” 8). It is this “productive” aspect of power that facilitates cultural studies’ examinations of the contradictory relationships between commodities, meaning, and pleasure–a question that “classical” Marxism can barely pose, let alone answer.

     

    However, as John Frow and Meaghan Morris point out, the apparent merging of idealist and materialist positions that informs Williams’s concept of “culture” entails a certain theoretical paradox. It is premised, they argue, on an “opposition (between culture and society, between representations and reality) which is the condition of its existence but which it must constantly work to undo” (xx). So Williams cannot attempt to reconfigure the relations between “art” and “society” or “culture” and “society” without reifying these very dichotomies. These are well-worn debates, and I do not wish to suggest that the diversity of cultural studies work today–in its various geographical and interdisciplinary inflections–can be traced back to Williams’s work as a single point of origin. But the contours of these debates linger; this alignment between “culture” and “representation” generates an anxiety that continues to have a bearing upon efforts to theorize a material, determining structure and its relationship with an agential, representing subject.

     

    Foucault, it turns out, is situated by cultural studies in a space created by a Gramscian understanding of domination and informed by this structure/agency problematic. John Fiske argues that Foucault “shares with ideology theorists the attempt to account for the crucial social paradox of our epoch–that our highly elaborated social system of late capitalism is at once deeply riven with inequalities and conflicts of interest yet still manages to operate smoothly enough to avoid the crises of antagonism that might spark revolution” (161). Dworkin indicates the degree to which, within the British New Left of the 1970s, the work of figures like Althusser, Barthes, and the intellectuals associated with the Frankfurt School is conflated under the heading “Western Marxism.” Despite the varied positions these continental cultural Marxisms actually occupy, they have been regularly perceived as belonging to a relatively cohesive intellectual tradition and as constituting a singular alternative to the prevailing frameworks of British cultural inquiry. Accordingly, even if Foucault’s divergences from Marxism were to some extent acknowledged, he has, by and large, been deemed to be Marxist in his concerns.3

     

    So it is apparently only by refracting Foucault, particularly his writing in Discipline and Punish, through this Marxist prism that his work is made palatable for certain formations of cultural studies. Geoff Danaher, Tony Schirato, and Jen Webb, for example, in Understanding Foucault, remind readers that “all these disciplinary procedures, and the panoptic gaze, emerged at an historic moment when it had become necessary to produce a pliable, healthy and sober workforce to service the factories of the Industrial Revolution” (57). But by positing “the factories” as a primary determinant for the techniques employed in other domains of discipline, Danaher, Schirato, and Webb engage in what Foucault calls the “simple activity of allocating causality” (“Politics” 58). They invoke a reductionist logic, incommensurate with Foucault’s aim to “render apparent the polymorphous interweaving of correlations” (58). It may be that his description of political technologies as a disparate set of methods prompts cultural studies to account for the incoherent, often contradictory workings of power to some degree. However, if Foucault’s contention that power relations are “not univocal” is to be taken seriously, then any coherence between prisons, schools, hospitals, and factories must be regarded as material patterns of effects of domination. These regularities cannot finally be ascribed to some overall systematicity or generalized source of “ideological control.”

     

    In fact, Foucault’s work can be read to suggest that power exists only as “effects” that are “manifested and sometimes extended by the position of those who are dominated” and that are constituted by a range of techniques and maneuvres “that one should decipher in a network of relations, constantly in tension” (Discipline 26-27). These relations “are not univocal; they define innumerable points of confrontation, focuses of instability, each of which has its own risks of conflict, of struggles, and of an at least temporary inversion of the power relations” (27). Given this instability, power, for Foucault, must be apprehended in its local instantiations or as it exists as particular regimes of practice. Moreover, Foucault asserts that these regimes are not “governed by institutions” or “prescribed by ideologies . . . but, up to a point, possess their own specific regularities, logic, strategy, self-evidence and ‘reason’” (“Questions” 5). “Economic” formations, then, do not determine, but are preceded by, and are just one effect of, these rationalities.

     

    Cultural studies’ concern with popular-cultural sites and “everyday” texts is regularly legitimated–often with Foucault’s concept of “micro-power” as a key reference point–by claiming their connection with “macro” structures of domination and subordination.4 In his discussion of “micro-power” in Discipline and Punish, however, Foucault is wary of lapsing into any straightforward equation of reproduction with systems of rule (27). Rather, according to Hall, Foucault

     

    adopts so thoroughgoing a scepticism about any determinacy or relationship between practices, other than the largely contingent, that we are entitled to see him . . . as deeply committed to the necessary non-correspondence of all practices to one another. From such a position neither a social formation, nor the State, can be adequately thought. (“Paradigms” 71)

     

    However, there are many examples one can cite to suggest that the kinds of associations that exist between manifold instantiations of power were, in fact, at times central to Foucault’s concerns:

     

    The problem that now presents itself . . . is to determine what form of relation may be legitimately described between these different series; what vertical system they are capable of forming; what interplay of correlation and dominance exists between them . . . in what distinct totalities certain elements may figure simultaneously. (Archaeology 10)

     

    What this indicates is a desire to investigate and describe unities, regularities, continuities, and discontinuities as they appear in their positivity; to respond to Hall, then, it is not the “necessary non-correspondence” but the non-necessary correspondence of practices that Foucault is committed to. And this does not constitute a theorization of determination that assumes the nature of the relationship between “micro-powers” and state power and then posits this as proof of the revolutionary potential of “micro-struggles.”

     

    It is worth acknowledging that cultural studies’ turn to Gramsci was, to a large degree, precipitated by what Dworkin describes as “the failures and disappointments of the late 60s and early 70s” (141). He explains that the critical left began to enjoy an unprecedented visibility within British humanities departments, particularly within newer universities and former polytechnics, as part of what appeared to be a process of more general cultural upheaval during the 1960s. But any promise of a serious and enduring political reorientation toward the left was hampered by the kinds of economic and institutional restructuring entailed in the shift toward conservative, liberal governance in the late 1970s. For Hall, Gramsci’s work helps account for these contradictions and disappointments, and it is Gramsci, rather than Foucault, who provides a pertinent framework for understanding and contesting Thatcherism as a cultural and political force.

     

    It is interesting to note, though, that despite Hall’s reservations, expressed in his “Two Paradigms” article, about the ability of Foucault’s work to intervene usefully in contemporary British politics, his work had begun to be used by some at the time (or what has since been referred to as the “governmentality school” of social and political inquiry) to do precisely this. Articles that appeared in journals such as I&C in the late 1970s and early 1980s and later in Economy and Society, (some of which were collected in the influential anthology, The Foucault Effect: Studies in Governmentality) by figures such as Colin Gordon and Nikolas Rose reframed the liberal state by tracing the mobile systems of relationships that provided the conditions of possibility for different orders of knowledge–and in doing so, enabled an analysis of how “governed individuals are willing to exist as subjects” (Gordon, “Governmental” 48). And rather than noting a kind of disabling scepticism in Foucault’s work, the contingent nature of the relations of knowledge described by Foucault is cited as a source of optimism. It indicates the “strategic reversibility” of power relations and the possibility of political counterdemands rather than conceiving of such relations as the inevitable historical outcomes of the liberal state (Gordon, “Governmental” 5). While I go on to discuss some further implications of the “governmentality school” later, I think that this alternative intellectual trajectory indicates that cultural studies’ turn to Gramsci was not a necessary or inevitable response to the political conditions of the time. In fact, this Gramscian reading of Foucault elaborated a Marxist cultural politics, the very terms of which Foucault’s work sets out to question.

     

    From Discourse To Ideology

     

    In order to facilitate a textuality crucial to its examination of cultural forms, cultural studies’ stylization of Marxism has also involved what Hall labels a turn to the “linguistic metaphor” (“Legacies” 283). The contribution of Barthes, Althusser, and Lacan to British cultural studies in the late 1970s could be seen, for example, in the film journal Screen, and in a more general centering of “ideology” and “representation” within the project’s theoretical landscape. In “Two Paradigms,” Hall famously describes how the infiltration of (post)structuralism into the cultural studies toolbox overcame a previous inability to theorize the symbolic as a site of power and identity. This weakness is exemplified for him in the work of Williams, Richard Hoggart, and E.P. Thompson–broadly termed “culturalism”–and their emphases on empiricism and human agency. But while Hall argues that structuralism’s advantages lie in its critique of humanism, he also points out that it risks abstraction and a lack of historicity (“Paradigms” 67). Hall thereby poses the need for a “method which takes us outside the permanent oscillations between abstraction/anti-abstraction and the false dichotomies of Theoreticism vs. Empiricism which have both marked and disfigured the structuralism/culturalism encounter to date” (68). But these two paradigms are not as internally homogeneous as Hall supposes, and it is his very postulation (and reification) of this binary between structure and agency that produces an ongoing indeterminacy in cultural studies.

     

    Foucault’s notion of “discourse” offers one resolution to this dilemma. The operation of this concept is two-fold. On the one hand, it is aligned with a more general structuralist endeavor–Foucault’s account of regulating and regulated discursive formations is apparently comparable to “some of the classical questions which Althusser tried to address through the concept of ‘ideology’–shorn, of course, of its class reductionism, economistic and truth-claiming overtones” (Hall, “Introduction” 11). On the other hand, there is some recognition of the degree to which Foucault’s notion of “discourse” is deployed to think about non-linguistic mechanisms. As Foucault suggests,

     

    discourse is constituted by the difference between what one could say correctly at one period (under the rules of grammar and logic) and what is actually said. The discursive field is, at a specific moment, the law of this difference. It thus defines a certain number of operations which are not of the order of linguistic construction or formal deduction. . . . It consists of a whole group of regulated practices which do not merely involve giving a visible outward embodiment to the agile inwardness of thought. (“Politics” 63)

     

    Consequently, Foucault’s singularity is seen to rest on his effort to place textual analysis in its social and historical context.5 Or, as Frow and Morris put it, Foucault provides a more “institutionally anchored model of discursivity than [is] available in other, language- and text- centred notions of discourse” (xxvi). But while these differences are acknowledged, the belief that Foucault is interested in the realm of the symbolic remains. The result of this bifurcation is that “discourse” is regularly mobilized, not simply to analyze practices, but to turn practices into texts. This translation of “discourse” from a strategic ensemble of practices into a site of formal analysis is exemplified by Danaher, Schirato, and Webb, for whom the term “generally refers to a type of language associated with an institution, and includes the ideas and statements which express an institution’s values” (x). It is this presumed imbrication of “discourse” with processes of signification (and as an expression of “values”) that brings it under the rubric of ideology.

     

    However, Foucault’s notion of “discourse” circumvents the series of binaries–that is, between truth and falsity, reality and representation, and the symmetrical relationship between self and other–from which the concept of ideology derives its potency.6 “Discourse” entails a necessary relation of knowledge and power that means it cannot be employed to describe the false distortion and masking of a putatively “true” configuration of power. Nonetheless, the concept is routinely invoked and enlisted in cultural studies to make sense of the interplay between cultural practices, power, and meaning.

     

    In Frow’s analysis of The Condition of the Working Class in England, Engels’s study is not read as an empirical account but reinscribed as a semiosis of working-class districts in nineteenth-century Manchester. By claiming that “ideology” does not have to resort to an equation of “truth and error” or to an objective, extra-discursive reality, Frow attempts to reconcile his approach with Foucault’s writing on “discourse.” He suggests that by relativizing any critique “to the position of power from which it is enunciated,” “ideology” can be conceived as a “function” or “state” of “discourse” (“Discourse and Power” 194). To arrive at this solution, however, Frow contends that “the signifieds of discourse . . . are generated not from an extra-discursive real to which we may appeal as a final authority but within specific processes and practices of signification”(199). In order to argue against a “dichotomous conception of a ‘material’ economic base and an ‘immaterial’ superstructure,” Frow declares that “all social systems are semiotic systems producing significations realised in material sign-vehicles” (201-2). So everything is seen to be contained within the text, and “discourse” is used to describe these relations of signification.

     

    Yet, Frow’s subscription to an approach in which the social is understood by way of the text potentially involves an indeterminacy, characteristic of what Foucault calls “commentary”:

     

    By a paradox which it always displaces but never escapes, the commentary must say for the first time what had, nonetheless, already been said, and must tirelessly repeat what had, however, never been said. . . . [It] allows us to say something other than the text itself, but on condition that it is this text itself which is said, and in a sense completed. (“Order of Discourse” 58)

     

    “Discourse,” for Foucault, refers to a strategic field of practices, procedures, and operations “not of the order of linguistic construction or formal deduction” (“Politics” 63). But instead of defining “discourse” as a finite practical domain, Frow puts it “at the disposal of the signifier,” resulting in endless acts of interpretation that are, inevitably, a form of repetition (“Politics” 66). And this apparent epistemological dead-end is characterized by Hall as a theoretical drive that provides a defining impetus for cultural studies work:

     

    until one respects the necessary displacement of culture, and yet is always irritated by its failure to reconcile itself with . . . other questions that cannot and can never be fully covered by critical textuality in its elaborations, cultural studies as a project, an intervention, remains incomplete. (“Legacies” 284)

     

    The corollary of this “displacement of culture” is that questions of “theory” and “politics” are held “in an ever irresolvable but permanent tension” (284). For Hall, it seems, this tension fuels cultural studies’ sense of historical urgency–it is a “necessary displacement” and one that must be respected and embraced. Both Hall and Frow’s remarks are symptomatic of a search for what Foucault calls a

     

    locus of a discourse . . . whose tension would keep separate the empirical and the transcendental, while being directed at both; a discourse that would make it possible to analyse man as a subject, that is, as a locus of knowledge which has been empirically acquired but referred back as closely as possible to what makes it possible. (Order 320)

     

    For Foucault, attempting to work outside what he calls the “empirico-transcendental doublet” involves analyzing discourses and their conditions of existence by supposing only the fact of their historical appearance.

     

    However, it is in the gap between these conditions or systems of emergence and the desire to map discourses in their historical specificity that there appears some ambiguity in Foucault’s work. This tension goes some way toward explaining the appropriation and “aestheticisation” of his ideas in cultural and literary studies. Foucault’s early interest in literary figures such as Roussel and Artaud lends itself to such a reading. Simon During’s Foucault and Literature, for example, assesses the implications of Foucault’s work with respect to theorizing the relationship between language and subjectivity. Foucault’s “literary phase” is said to evince a belief in writing that “aims to clear an ideological space; a space for action, experimentation, chance, freedom, mobility” (7). And while it is Foucault’s later work that has most currency in cultural studies, even this, according to During, displays a “residual or manifest aestheticism” and can be put to use in a study of the transgressive possibility of texts (10).

     

    During’s reading relies on the ambiguity in Foucault’s texts concerning the function of the term “discourse.” In his analysis of the concept, Hunter describes the local and non-systemic nature of the relations between institutional operations, surveillance mechanisms, economic imperatives and other regulatory regimes, described in Foucault’s Madness and Civilisation. He contends that these groups of relations are later rendered systematic and formal through Foucault’s delineation of them as “discursive formations” (“Dispositif” 44). Hunter argues that by subjecting these positive descriptions to a “‘critical’ reflection” and attempting to recover their underlying rules or “so-called conditions of possibility,” Foucault displays “the symptoms of an incomplete struggle to expel structuralism rather than its calm supersession” (43). The point is that these hesitations and inconsistencies–conveniently enough for cultural studies–enable “discourse” to “reappear as the general mechanism for the articulation of . . . otherwise contingent relations–as the synthetic medium of their systematicity and necessity” (45). Importantly, as Hunter shows, Foucault later shifts his focus from accounts of discursive formations to localized descriptions of dispositifs or apparatuses involving a more dispersed array of organizational forms.

     

    The effect of this shift in Foucault’s work and his own remarks against “commentary” and textualism is that the products of “discourse” (or what Foucault sometimes refers to as “statements”) belong to the order of “events,” rather than to that of language.7 Foucault explains the approach he calls “eventalisation”:

     

    It means making visible a singularity at places where there is a temptation to invoke a historical constant, an immediate anthropological trait, or an obviousness which imposes itself uniformly on all. . . . A breach of self-evidence, of those self-evidences on which our knowledges, acquiescences and practices rest. . . . Secondly, eventalisation means rediscovering the connections, encounters, supports, blockages, plays of forces, strategies and so on, that at a given moment establish what subsequently counts as being self-evident, universal and necessary. In this sense, one is indeed effecting a sort of multiplication or pluralisation of causes. (“Questions” 6)

     

    This multiplication of causes involves allowing for the interaction of forces of transformation, regularity, discontinuity, and dependence that constitute an event. It requires a certain “polymorphism”–in the elements that are brought into play, of the kinds of relations described, and in its domains of reference (7). An account of this multiplicity of processes must recognize the unpredictability of their interrelation and avoid ascribing objects “to the most unitary, necessary, inevitable and (ultimately) extra-historical mechanism or structure available”–the most common of which are, Foucault suggests, “an economic mechanism, an anthropological structure or a demographic process” (7).

     

    Foucault requires his notion of “discourse,” then, to consider the historicity of the organizational forms that it describes. As I have indicated above, and as Dennis Dworkin’s account of the development of British cultural Marxism shows, disputes over the role of “concrete” historical inquiry within cultural studies have traditionally been split according to the structure/agency binary. So empirical historical work is censured for its naïve humanism and formal analysis attacked for its abstraction from “everyday” struggles.8

     

    The polarity informing these narratives seems to be irreconcilable with Foucault’s notion of the “event.” For Foucault, the “event” is always manifest at the level of materiality but is nonetheless “an effect of, and within, a dispersion of matter” (“Order” 69). Foucault’s work does not set out to “overcome a ‘conflict’ or ‘opposition’ between structure and historical development” (Archaeology 11). Rather, the “event” is intended to dissolve the binary–to account for historical transformations that operate outside the dialectic of the empirical and transcendental. For cultural studies, it seems, there may be genuine practical restraints that preclude this kind of historical work from taking place; the kind of intellectual work Foucault envisages requires “a knowledge of details and . . . depends on a vast accumulation of source material” (“Nietzsche” 140), but, as Morris contends, “methodological desire alone is rarely enough to carry amateurs through thick textual slabs of detail” (“Introduction” 5). Yet, there remains a need to reconstitute “history” so it is not relegated to the role of mere scene-setting. Foucault raises the question of whether the concept of “discourse”–the very tool that is used to facilitate a critique of empiricism–can be mobilized to perform a descriptivist mode of analysis. As we will see, the problems that this incitement, to “restore to discourse its character as an event,” poses for cultural studies are considerable (Foucault, “Order” 66).9

     

    Agency and Butler’s Foucault

     

    Into the 1980s, the elaboration of cultural studies’ critical framework that enabled it to move to the various avatars of identity politics also accorded Foucault’s insights a renewed significance. Reflecting on the pertinence of the concept of “identity” to cultural studies, Hall intimates the dilemma that it presents. The notion of a unitary or originary subject has, as he suggests, undergone an important destabilization, but remains crucial “to the question of agency and politics”; it is “in the attempt to rearticulate the relationship between subjects and discursive practices that the question of identity recurs” (“Introduction” 1-2). It is in respect of this oscillation–that is, both the necessity of “identity” and the danger of its drive toward essentialism–that Foucault’s work is mobilized by cultural studies.

     

    What cultural studies requires, and what, according to Hall, Foucault is seen to provide, “is not an abandonment or abolition of ‘the subject’ but a reconceptualisation” (“Introduction” 2). In an overview of Foucault’s work, Lois McNay, for example, is anxious to show how Foucault informs “feminist and postcolonial critiques of Enlightenment thought as a highly gendered and ethnocentric construct that implicitly naturalises a white, masculine perspective,” thereby clearing a space “for radically ‘other’ ways of thinking and being” (4-5). But the apparent ease with which Foucault is written into this discourse obscures some of the underlying inconsistencies this formula actually entails.

     

    Judith Butler’s contribution to feminist cultural studies is substantially indebted to her reading of the first volume of The History of Sexuality. An example is her work on the transgressive potentiality of gender performativity, where the assumption of a “sex” occurs through significatory practice.10 However, its reception has been marked with a kind of ambivalence–as Vicki Bell points out, “the temporal performative nature of identities as a theoretical premise means that more than ever, one needs to question how identities continue to be produced, embodied and performed, effectively, passionately and with social and political consequence” (2). The challenge for Butler, here, is to ensure that her framework is not a merely speculative one and to “think” agency while retaining the constitutive nature of gender relations.

     

    The apprehension surrounding the deployment of a subject exposes Butler (and poststructuralist feminisms in general) to accusations of theoreticism–where conceptual sophistication is said to compromise a capacity to engage with “concrete” political struggles and the concerns of “real” women. The central problematic for Butler in Bodies that Matter is that if, as Foucault argues, “sex” is a “regulatory ideal,” how is it possible to understand the materiality of “sex”? And, crucially, if norms of sex, gender, and desire are simply performed (that is, they are deliberately or consciously enacted), then how can one avoid a latent version of humanism?

     

    It is in the effort to locate the source of authentic resistance that Butler considers this statement from Foucault:

     

    It is the agency of sex that we must break away from, if we aim–through a tactical reversal of the various mechanisms of sexuality–to counter the grips of power with the claims of bodies, pleasures, and knowledges, in their multiplicity and their possibility of resistance. The rallying point for the counterattack against the deployment of sexuality ought not to be sex-desire, but bodies and pleasures. (History 157, qtd. in “Revisiting” 11, 13-14)

     

    But this injunction presents Butler with a number of obstacles, largely concerning the ontological status of “bodies and pleasures”:

     

    These bodies, these pleasures, where do they come from, and in what does their agency consist, if they are the agency that counters the regime of sex-desire? . . . From where does this break emerge? Is it a break that is performed by a subject? Is it a break in the subject as it were, a certain constituting hiatus on which the subject nevertheless draws? And who are the “we” who are said to exercise this agency against the agency of sex? What are the resources that counter the regulation of sexuality if they are not in some sense derived from the discursive resources of normative regulation? (“Revisiting” 14)

     

    So Butler rehearses the terms of the now-familiar structure/agency binary–again, it involves a movement between the subject, what it is that makes the subject possible, and what in the subject can be said to be genuinely agential. As far as Butler is concerned, Foucault leaves these questions unanswered. She must resign herself, then, to this futile vacillation. Hence, Butler charges Foucault with utopianism: by apparently positing a time when “disordered and non-gendered pleasures abound,” he risks making both “sexual difference and homosexuality strangely unspeakable” (“Revisiting” 15, 12). His work, particularly his introduction to Herculine Barbin is said to harbor an “unacknowledged emancipatory ideal” and indulge in the liberatory discourse he purports to displace (Gender 119).

     

    If we are to take Foucault’s ideas in their broader context, however, we notice that they do allow for the prospect of making tangible interventions into the strategies of domination that constitute regimes of sexuality. Discourses must be conceived as “tactical elements or blocks operating in the field of force relations” that make up a particular strategy (History 101-02). As Foucault contends, “there can exist different and even contradictory discourses within the same strategy, [or] they can, on the contrary, circulate without changing their form from one strategy to another, opposing strategy” (102). This instability and mutability of discourse enables Foucault to account for the way discourses of homosexuality can undermine a certain normativity. He writes that “homosexuality began to speak in its own behalf, to demand that its legitimacy or ‘naturality’ be acknowledged, often in the same vocabulary, using the same categories by which it was medically disqualified” (101, emphasis added). “Resistance” does not necessarily entail an obvious discursive rupture or change in vocabulary. It also does not assume a singular form: “there is no single locus of great Refusal,” but “a plurality of resistances, each of them a special case: resistances that are possible, necessary, improbable; others that are spontaneous, savage, solitary, concerted, rampant, or violent” (History 95-96). So mobilizing Foucault does not, as Butler seems to think, demand a disavowal of the analytical category of gender but enables a description of the shifting relations between particular discursive fields, disciplinary technologies, and (gendered) subjects.11

     

    In Butler’s schema, certain types of representational practice are deemed less legitimately “resistive” than others and, consequently, evidence of “agency” must continually be problematized in order to disclose any perceived complicity with “the discursive resources of normative regulation” (“Revisiting” 14). So we are in a situation where any instance of transgression is always potentially not transgressive enough. Butler cannot reconcile her insights with “concrete” struggles, in part, because she overlooks the unstable and differentiated relation of discourses to power. According to Butler’s logic, “It seems crucial to question whether [any particular instance of] resistance . . . is sufficient as a political contestation of compulsory heterosexuality” (Bodies 106). But within the trappings of this symbolic politics, who is to decide when the contestation of a regulatory strategy is sufficient?

     

    If Butler, following Foucault, conceives of domination as a subjectifying as well as objectifying force, she cannot aspire to a total structural displacement of “compulsory heterosexuality.” As Foucault suggests, power relations depend “on a multiplicity of points of resistance: these play the role of adversary, target, support, or handle in power relations” (History 95; emphasis added). Given this inherent instability, it is not possible to define power as a unidirectionally negative and totalitarian entity, against which it is continually necessary to mobilize “resistance.”12 Yet the opposition between structure and agency that Butler presumes requires “domination” ultimately to be, as Colin Gordon describes, that which “falsifies the essence of human subjectivity” (“Other” 30). And “agency” must then somehow be reclaimed, although in Butler’s case without resorting to the category of an originary subject. So despite appealing to a Foucauldian reconfiguration of power and subjectivity, it is still “the subject” that Butler seeks but must never actually find. It is, in her own words, possible only “to promote an alternative imaginary to a hegemonic imaginary” (Bodies 91).

     

    This impasse characterizes Butler’s attempt to theorize agency and attests to the more general difficulty involved in using Foucault selectively within identity politics as it exists in its present orthodoxies. However, to the extent that any incongruity between the approaches is acknowledged, discussion within cultural studies seems to focus on relatively peripheral issues. In his reflections on postcolonial theory, for instance, Robert Young tries to account for the fact that Foucault’s ideas seem “particularly appropriate to the colonial arena, and yet colonialism itself does not figure” as a specific topic of research in Foucault’s analyses (60).13 But such disparities do not provide any substantive reason why Foucault’s insights cannot be usefully extrapolated and applied to these novel areas of inquiry.

     

    There is usually some attempt to assuage these sorts of anxieties by locating evidence in Foucault’s work of his interest, however fleeting, in a range of research topics. This tendency has imbued his more minor essays and articles, and, in particular, his many interviews, with a renewed significance. It is exemplified in Foucault’s role in some lesbian and gay studies. One article quotes David Halperin to suggest that “‘as a madman . . . as a left-wing political extremist . . . [and] as a sexual pervert,’ Foucault had good reason to want to expose the ways by which normalizing discourses both produce and silence ‘social deviants’” (Halperin 130, qtd. in Taylor 6). But narrativizing Foucault’s ideas by using his private life as an interpretive tool does little to patch over the underlying epistemological inconsistencies between his and Halperin’s critical agendas.14 Significantly, this approach supposes that a shared interest in matters of sexuality or race permits the use of Foucault’s work for these very particular forms of critique. It is assumed that Foucault’s concepts can be unproblematically applied because both Foucault and cultural studies are doing the same thing.

     

    Morris is aware of these points of friction (and her caution would extend to those situated along the various other axes of identity politics): “any feminists drawn in to sending Love Letters to Foucault would be in no danger of reciprocation. Foucault’s work is not the work of a ladies’ man” (“Pirate’s” 152). Notwithstanding these difficulties, however, her provocation is, I think, ultimately a positive one. Foucault’s work enables a study of technologies of subjection at the same time as he speaks of the “insurrection of subjugated knowledges” and thereby manages to bypass the problematics of humanism versus anti-humanism (159). Certainly, such a discourse holds considerable promise for a kind of feminism.

     

    For in a perspective in which bodies and souls are seen as not simply constituted but also invested and traversed by relations of power-knowledge (and that unevenly and inequitably–it is not a question of a uniform distribution or a stable “effect”) what becomes possible in relation to “women . . . is something more than a history of a ‘construction’: it is rather the possibility of a history of a strategic specification . . . and at the same time, a history of that in women which defies specification, which escapes its hold; the positively not specific, the unwomanly in history” (159).

     

    But Foucault is interested in “how” these situations arise rather than in arriving at an immediate account of “why.” To use Foucault in the way that Morris suggests requires the inclusion of an empiricism that dissolves the opposition between structure and agency.

     

    Identity, Identification

     

    A politics founded on the notion of “identity”–and as conceived by some formations of cultural studies–turns (unsurprisingly) on a consideration of the activity of “identification.” That is, according to Hall, any description of disciplinary regulation must be complemented “with an account of the practices of subjective self-constitution” (“Introduction” 13). Hall positions himself within a distinctly Althusserian problematic–one that came to prominence in cultural studies through feminist screen criticism in journals such as Screen and M/F in the late 1970s but, in Hall’s case, was also inflected by Butler and Lois McNay’s work. Hall worries that Foucault does not “engage with the unconscious” or theorize “the psychic mechanisms or interior processes by which these automatic ‘interpellations’ might be . . . resisted or negotiated” (“Introduction” 14, 12). That these are regarded as significant absences is indicative of the supposed need for psychoanalysis in any explanation of “identificatory practices” and their link with power. The considerable number of works that attempt to supplement Foucault’s findings with psychoanalysis attests to this perceived need.15

     

    However, as Nikolas Rose comments, “a genealogy of subjectification takes this individualised, interiorised, totalised and psychologised understanding of what it is to be human as delineating the site of a historical problem, not providing the grounds for a historical narrative” (“Identity” 129). Foucault’s attention to processes of subjectification is not aimed at reconstituting “the subject” as a coherent source of volition. Rather, Foucault aims to investigate the “complex field of historicity in the way the individual is summoned to recognize himself as an ethical subject of sexual conduct” (Use 32). This is achieved only by regarding the self as a relational and not a substantive entity. “Identity” can only be understood by examining the practical fields in which our relations with ourselves are circumscribed. As Rose further points out, these relations assume particular forms because they are the target

     

    of more or less rationalised schemes, which have sought to shape our ways of understanding and enacting our existence as human beings in the name of certain objectives--manliness, femininity, honour, modesty, propriety, civility, discipline. . . . The list is as diverse and heterogeneous as it is interminable. ("Identity" 130)

     

    It is only through a consideration of these technologies–rather than a theorization of what Hall labels “interior processes,” or an appeal to the “imaginary”–that one can comprehend how modes of self-relationship are defined and elaborated.

     

    So while Foucault’s work actually opens up a space of historical inquiry into the multiplicity of rationalities that traverse the self, Hall reads this reworking of “agency”–particularly Foucault’s account of “techniques of the self”–as an incomplete attempt to establish a theory of resistance. Hall regards the last two volumes of The History of Sexuality as a rethinking of the notion of power deployed in Foucault’s earlier work:

     

    The more well established critique . . . has to do with the problem which Foucault encounters with theorising resistance within the theory of power he deploys in Discipline and Punish and The History of Sexuality; the entirely self-policing conception of the subject . . . and the absence of any attention to what might in any way interrupt, prevent or disturb the smooth insertion of individuals into the subject positions constructed by these discourses. . . . [T]he subjects which are constructed in this way are “docile bodies.” There is no theorised account of how or why bodies should not always-for-ever turn up, in place, at the right time. (“Introduction” 11-12)

     

    But Hall overlooks the inherent conflict between the various practices that constitute regulatory programs–or as Jeff Malpas and Gary Wickham suggest, that governance always falls short of its target, that it “is necessarily incomplete and as a necessary consequence must always fail” (40). To illustrate this point, it is worth dwelling on Foucault’s own account of his analysis of prisons:

     

    the rational schemas of the prison, the hospital or the asylum are not general principles which can be rediscovered only through the historian’s retrospective interpretation. They are explicit programmes. . . . I tried to show that the rationality envisaged in penal imprisonment wasn’t the outcome of a straightforward calculation of immediate interest . . . but that it arose out of a whole technology of human training, surveillance of behaviour, individualisation of the elements of a social body. . . . [T]hese programmes don’t take effect in the institutions in an integral manner; they are simplified, or some are chosen and not others; and things never work out as planned. . . . [I]n fact there are different strategies that are mutually opposed, composed and superposed so as to produce permanent and solid effects that can perfectly well be understood in terms of their rationality, even though they don’t conform to the initial programming. (“Questions” 10)

     

    Foucault is interested in revealing that aspect of chance, or aléa, that exists in excess of a particular rationality but that is always potentially reducible to the operations of that rationality. And this respecification of power and agency is at odds with the liberalistic conception of domination on which Hall appears to insist.

     

    Governmentality, “Policy,” and the Intellectual

     

    As I noted earlier, Foucault’s notion of “governmentality” has motivated a relatively distinct body of work that can be broadly characterized by its interest in redefining “the cultural” as a series of instrumental or administrative measures that are subject to historical investigation. This includes relatively recent scholarship in and around cultural studies that employs a Foucauldian descriptivism in its exposition of cultural phenomena. Such work examines “everyday” cultural phenomena in their mundanity and historical particularity. Eating practices, self-help and etiquette literature, sport, and so on are granted a local and instrumental character.16 Of the array of studies concerned with the governmental organization and specification of “culture,” I focus here on examples that have had some currency in cultural studies debates (particularly within Australia), and which implicate the role of the cultural studies intellectual.

     

    Tony Bennett’s work is indebted to the “governmentality” school and to a definition of “culture” explicable via Hunter’s analysis of the historical emergence of literary education. In Hunter’s schema, the school is not, as is commonly assumed, the “social realisation of the ideal values of culture and criticism,” but “a governmental apparatus able to achieve a certain ‘humanisation’ of the population according to a (supervisory) ‘rationality’ supported by the apparatus itself” (Culture 3). In order to arrive at a historical logic that is capable of describing this rationality, the domain of the “cultural” is reconceived as a sphere of “piecemeal” administrative measures and programs that are not determined by “the dialectics of ‘totality’” (Culture 20).

     

    Bennett proposes, similarly, that it is not possible for cultural studies to comprehend the relationships between cultural practices and power without describing the specific technologies and kinds of knowledge by which populations are managed. Bennett’s historical work on museums at the turn of the century, for example, is careful to consider the multiplicity of administrative objectives that museums pursue and the diversity of programs that comprise them. So rather than cast the museum as an “ideological” instrument whose work is simply analogous to the ideological work carried out within other cultural sites, such as the school or the factory, Bennett is interested in the nineteenth-century museum as one of a series of discrete operators of social reform. And he is interested in how this “multiplication of culture’s utility” is associated with the development of liberal forms of government (Culture 107). Such a study necessarily involves orienting itself toward an examination of government policy, and it is this emphasis that subsequently became the source of considerable controversy within cultural studies debates.

     

    Bennett’s revisionist program involves a reappraisal of the institutional and discursive conditions which “define the limits and forms of the practicable” within cultural studies (“Towards” 42). As Tom O’Regan explains, Bennett’s work calls “for the double reconstitution of policy: both as an object of study in its own right and as a political site for activity and analysis” (411). By way of authority, Bennett cites Foucault’s suggestion that “to work with government implies neither subjection nor global acceptance. One can simultaneously work and be resistive. I even think that the two go together” (“Useful” 395). Such a practice requires, at the very least, an acknowledgement of cultural studies’ institutional moorings and an acceptance of its own imbrication with administrative programs with specific normative goals.

     

    Bennett’s proposal has exposed him to accusations of reformism from the quarters of cultural studies that see disciplinization as a political compromise and “institutionalisation as a moment of profound danger” (Hall, “Legacies” 285).17 Such a view stems from a narrative of cultural studies’ history that defines cultural studies by its position of marginality–both in relation to the rest of the humanities academy and to the mechanisms of the state. And it is from such a position that cultural studies is said to derive its radical, political edge. However, Bennett provides powerful reasons why this history should be reconceived, through his reading, for instance, of Raymond Williams’s work.18 In Culture: A Reformer’s Science, Bennett suggests that Williams’s claim that “culture is ordinary” includes mundane processes such as the administration of cultural resources, on which considerations of cultural policy have a direct bearing.

     

    But while Bennett’s position is provocative, it has been suggested that his mobilization of Foucault’s work is unduly narrow. This is particularly apparent, O’Regan argues, in Bennett’s assessment of what constitutes “useful” cultural analysis:

     

    Here work is to be regarded as “relevant” insofar as it participates in and extends administrative processes. . . . “[S]ocial relevance” is radically limited, narrowed to policy practice: that which can be made governmentally or corporately actionable, can be publicly endorsed, and can be institutionally sanctioned and found useful by government, tribunal, policy-makers and interest-group lobbyists directly involved in forming policies. (414)

     

    By construing “relevance” in such restricted terms, Bennett advocates a direct participation in regulation “as if that were the only socially forceful position to take” (O’Regan 415). But, as O’Regan points out, Foucault is not interested in making such rigid decrees:

     

    he argued that his work should be regarded not so much as providing answers but as providing resources that certain sorts of activists–like prisoners’ rights groups–might find useful in their own practice. It was up to such groups to make Foucault’s work “useful”; he would not legislate how that use should occur. (415)

     

    Bennett’s reconfiguration of cultural studies in terms of its technical administration can be read with reference to the “empirico-transcendental doublet” described earlier. Bennett seeks to terminate the dialectic simply by “cancelling out” the transcendental side. Whether such a move–that is, to operate with half a binary–is useful, or indeed, possible is difficult to say.19

     

    Moreover, Bennett’s position construes “government” as encompassing only the specific administrative technologies collectively referred to as “policy.” Foucault’s work on “governmentality” is aimed at refuting precisely this assumption–he shows us, in fact, that “there are several forms of government among which the prince’s relation to his state is only one particular mode” (“Governmentality” 91). The second and third volumes of The History of Sexuality document how regulation of Greek morality occurred not merely through explicit codification and legislation, but through a range of techniques of the self that situate one as the subject of moral action. So “policy” does not regulate “culture” single-handedly. As O’Regan suggests, policy is not “the structural engine room which powers everything else” but “a particular kind of information practice with its own limitations, potentialities and linkages to other kinds of public discourse, including cultural criticism and journalism, over which it holds no necessary pre-eminence” (416). “Government,” then, describes a complex system of relays and is, accordingly, a more dispersed set of processes than Bennett’s focus on policy would suggest.

     

    It is this reading of “government” that informs Nikolas Rose’s investigations into the organizational character of the “cultural.” Rose is concerned with tracking relations of force “as they flow through a multitude of human technologies, in all the practices, arenas and spaces where programmes for the administration of others intersect with techniques for the administration of ourselves” (Powers 5). So he is prompted by Foucault to pursue, among other things, an investigation of the complex assemblages that circumscribe our relations with ourselves–for example, in the domains of psychology or liberal government–and the various rationalities that traverse these practices. Such a project exemplifies the possibility of an analytics that is concerned, significantly, with historical precision and amenability to practical action, but which has limited currency within dominant formations of cultural studies.

     

    Rose’s reading of governmentality is bound up with a particular way of conceiving the critical intellectual; indeed, the uncertainty surrounding the function of the intellectual underlies, to a large degree, controversies about the role of “policy work” within cultural studies. The seeming political detachment of Foucault’s core historical works indicates that Foucault eschews the kind of teleological critique that is fundamental to certain formations of cultural studies. As Colin Gordon remarks, Foucault’s objective is not, “to arrive at a priori moral or intellectual judgements on the features of our society produced by . . . forms of power, but to render possible an analysis of the process of production itself” (“Other” 29). A question arises, then, regarding the kinds of social inquiry that can be derived from what Gordon calls Foucault’s “rigorous insistence on this particular kind of neutrality” (“Other” 29).

     

    Gayatri Spivak has described Foucault’s purported “neutrality” as that of “the first-world intellectual masquerading as the absent nonrepresenter who lets the oppressed speak for themselves” (292). What prompts Spivak’s disparagement is that Foucault’s supposed neutrality allegedly masks his own ideological allegiances. This neutrality supposedly allows the “complicity of the investigating subject (male or female professional) to disguise itself in transparency” (294). So Spivak sees Foucault’s unwillingness to judge as “interested individualistic refusals of the institutional privileges of power bestowed on the subject” that neglects “the critic’s institutional responsibility” (280). Similarly, albeit in this case crediting Gramsci’s “organic intellectual,” Hall also alludes to the “responsibility” of the critic. For Hall, this involves transmitting ideas and knowledge “through the intellectual function, to those who do not belong, professionally, in the intellectual class” (“Legacies” 281).20

     

    But Foucault does not imagine the intellectual as part of the vanguard, placed “somewhat ahead and to the side” and expressing the “truth of the collectivity” (“Intellectuals” 207-8). He rejects the programmatic nature of this task:

     

    critique doesn’t have to be the premise of a deduction which concludes: this then is what needs to be done. . . . It doesn’t have to lay down the law for the law. It isn’t a stage in programming. (“Questions” 13)

     

    Foucault’s “specific intellectual” derives from a particular understanding of the relationship of the intellectual to power. The specificity of intellectuals comes from their situation “at the precise points where their own conditions of life or work situate them,” but is also linked to “the specificity of the politics of truth in our societies” (“Truth” 126, 132). So the problem for the intellectual is not to change people’s consciousness, but to facilitate the processes of confrontation that engage with and potentially de-valorize regimes of truth-production. Doing so requires, as Deleuze suggests, a “diagram” or “a display of the relations between forces which constitute power,” and the role of the intellectual is envisaged, above all else, as that of a “cartographer” (36, 44). In other words, it is to be descriptive rather than prescriptive: to provide a map of a particular regime without determining in advance what it will be used for.

     

    At the center of this debate lies a methodological question regarding the supposed conflict between critical and descriptive imperatives. For Foucault, the two always implicate each other:

     

    In truth these two tasks are never completely separable: . . . any critical task, putting in question the instances of control, must at the same time analyse the discursive regularities through which they are formed; and any genealogical description must take into account the limits which operate in real formations. The difference between the critical and the genealogical enterprise is not so much a difference of object or domain, but of point of attack, perspective, and delimitation. (“Order of Discourse” 71-72)

     

    As we have already noted, Hunter, following Foucault, characterizes this binary between “empirical recognition” and “transcendental reflection” as a “permanent and unresolvable feature of the figure of ‘the subject’” of modernity (Culture 272). This subject is a projection of a certain rationale or “analytic of finitude” that is the condition of existence for the human sciences. It demands, according to Foucault, that man “is a being such that knowledge will be attained in him of what renders all knowledge possible” (Order 318). This impulse toward “finitude” intimates the need for a structuring or delimitation of the self, which we have observed so far as various manifestations of the structure/agency binary. As Hunter argues, these “debates . . . are quite literally interminable because they simply reproduce the ambiguous space in which the human sciences come into being” (Culture 206). If Foucault is right, then any claims to theoretical openness or interdisciplinarity “do not indicate the permanence of an ever-open question; they refer back to a precise and extremely well-determined epistemological arrangement in history” (Order 346). And it is within the constraints of this framework that we must situate cultural studies’ critical armature.

     

    This compulsion to transcend empirical conditions in order to explain them is described as a practice of the self, central to the formation of cultural studies intellectuals. As Hunter proposes, “the act of theoretical clarification . . . is in fact inseparable from the normative imposition of a certain aesthetico-ethical obligation (to complete the self)” (Culture 25). It is contended that, despite expanding the nineteenth-century conception of “culture” to include political, economic, and “popular” spheres, cultural studies remains caught within the ambit of idealism. It merely grants a materialist ontology to the same dialectical fashioning of an exemplary subject. Hunter suggests that it is not possible to “politicise aesthetics” simply by subsuming this narrow ethical practice within culture “as a whole way of life” (“Aesthetics” 347-48). He arrives at this position by way of Foucault’s inquiries, in the second and third volumes of The History of Sexuality, into the techniques of self-problematization that enable individuals to recognize themselves as subjects of a particular normative code. Hunter argues that the political activity of the cultural critic is just one such site of self-problematization, whose objective is the complete development of “society as a whole” (Culture 70). This depends on an historical thinking–or what Hunter calls a “philosophico-historical projection”–that relates the incompleteness of the self to the figure of the “alienated society” (70). This state of social fragmentation is supposedly eventually overcome, and the ethical division of the subject reconciled, through the intellectual action of the critic.

     

    However, the indeterminacy of textual critique–as we have noted above in terms of the structure/agency dialectic–guarantees that the goals of reconciliation and “complete development” are unattainable. Hunter points out the upshot of this deferral:

     

    the objectives of the aesthetic ethos are not to be found in its official goals but in the entrance to a state of permanent “readiness” or ethical preparation. At the center of this ethic lies a powerful technology for withdrawing from the world as a sphere of mundane knowledge and action. In fact the aesthete does not pursue knowledge of “worldly” activity as such, having subjected them to a problematization that makes them ethically worthless. Instead, he or she seeks to prepare or cultivate the kind of self that will be worthy of enlightened knowledge and action in an indefinitely deferred future. (“Aesthetics” 354)

     

    So cultural studies’ insistence on these critical vacillations means that there is an “imperative to abstain from direct political activity until the reconciliatory movement of the dialectic brings the time to ripeness” (“Aesthetics” 355). But this reconciliation, and the political conditions supposedly ushered in by this moment, can never actually arrive, preventing such intellectual work from solving substantial problems of social fragmentation.

     

    This is not to say, however, that Foucault didn’t describe what he did as “critique” or consider his work to have a “critical” function. In fact, some of Foucault’s musings on “resistance” seem to implicate him in precisely the kind of aesthetico-ethical impulse that he purports to displace. To see this, we only have to look to his assertion that “critique”

     

    should be an instrument for those who fight, those who resist and refuse what is. Its use should be in processes of conflict and confrontation, essays in refusal. . . . It is a challenge directed to what is. (“Questions” 13)

     

    How does such a challenge claim legitimacy without some authoritarian recourse to notions of truth and falsity? And how can this be reconciled with what I have described as Foucault’s explicit efforts to respecify this philosophically fraught space–to configure non-programmatic “maps” of cultural relations?

     

    Of course it is not possible for “critique” to operate unproblematically outside the bounds of normativity and, indeed, that is not what I am advocating. Rather, a “map” describes the disciplinary practices, political technologies, and points of confrontation and instability that constitute “what is.” If we then decide to “challenge” certain of these practices and procedures, and the relations of contingency through which they function, it is possible to do so by mobilizing, where necessary, particular ideals in order to invent provisional strategies of inquiry and criticism. By reconstituting the question of “critique” and “resistance” in this way–and by acknowledging what Foucault describes as the “very tight-knit, very coherent outlines” that form “the immediate space of our reflection” (Order 384)–the door is opened for a pragmatics that can hope to circumvent the problematics of the “empirico-transcendental doublet.” And it permits a discourse that avoids what cultural studies sets up as the anxious opposition between “theory” and “politics.”

     

    Conclusion

     

    The last five years have seen the publication of at least two books that serve as potential cultural studies instruction manuals while claiming a specifically Foucauldian pedigree. One of them–Danaher, Schirato, and Webb’s introductory text, Understanding Foucault–is an exegetical work that filters Foucault’s work through the critical agendas of, to name some key sources, Butler, McNay, Said, and de Certeau. Foucault’s insights are clarified via a selection of secondary texts and examples from popular culture, present-day political events, and everyday phenomena.

     

    We are shown, for instance, how Foucault’s work on subjectivity is readily applicable to issues of identity: Princess Diana’s various personas of mother, style icon, and “people’s princess” are said to exemplify “how our identities are played out within the complex ensembles and discursive flows that produce a multiplicity of subject positions” (43). Foucault’s point, it is argued, is to “problematise the question of truth, and to show the extent to which it is an effect of the work of discourses and institutions, rather than being absolute or essential” (41-42). In another example, Foucault’s notion of “descending individualism” enables a discussion of the class politics of contemporary news media–that is, “how populist newspapers . . . devote coverage to suspected cases of welfare fraud among the poor, naming the perpetrators of such ‘outrages’ . . . while ignoring the more costly fraudulent activities of very wealthy groups and people” (58). Such technologies of surveillance are also said to come in the form of the “male gaze” and can be located in the relations of power that regulate, for example, sporting fields and beauty regimes (54-55). So the book provides us with an overview of Foucault’s work in which his concepts are deemed to complement a cultural studies vocabulary and adhere to the protocols of its critical project.

     

    Kendall and Wickham’s Understanding Culture reproaches this “dominant” version of cultural studies by refusing what the authors call cultural studies’ “obsession” with meanings, power, and resistance. They contend that such a framework assumes that “power, oppression, class and exploitation” are everywhere, without any rigorous investigation into whether this is actually, empirically, the case (15-16). Cultural studies’ very concern with “the control of meanings and their dissemination,” it is argued, requires that it is “frequently anti-empirical” (14). Any such empirical work “would get in the way of this grand theorising, this relentless induction and deduction” that is necessary for the ubiquity that cultural studies grants the “political” (14).

     

    The book’s authors propose, instead, cultural studies as the study of “ordering.” Their conceptualization of “ordering” is premised on a Foucauldian notion of governance that they use to examine the management and control of cultural objects. This involves describing how cultural objects and practices appear in their mundanity, and the authors detail a procedure for such a description. It is in the effort “not to rush to an explanation of the things,” then, that this descriptivist Foucault is given precedence over the speculative one we encounter in Danaher, Schirato, and Webb (56).

     

    For a more dramatic account of this distinction, it is worth reciting a quotation Kendall and Wickham take from Thomas Osborne. His Foucault

     

    is not perhaps the usual, erstwhile trendy one. The sort of Foucault that appeals to [Osborne] is not, anyway, the Foucault that appears in the cribs; the subversive continental philosopher, the arcane prophet of transgression, the iconoclastic poststructuralist, the meta-theorist of power, the functionalist theorist of social control, or the gloomy prophet of the totally administered society. These sorts of Foucault can all safely be forgotten. The Foucault that motivates much of this book . . . is a much more buttoned up animal . . . a good modernist rather than a faddish postmodernist, a rigorous and not so unconventional historical epistemologist. . . . This, then, is not the naughty, transgressive Foucault, but rather . . . Foucault with his clothes on. (1-2 quoting Osborne x)

     

    This conflict, marked by the radical Foucault depicted in Danaher, Schirato, and Webb’s book and this other, more modest Foucault, is, as we have seen, broadly indicative of the tensions that characterize cultural studies’ relationship with Foucault. And what may be a study of culture along identifiably Foucauldian lines is not necessarily identifiable as “cultural studies.” Indeed, Kendall and Wickham’s book prompts us to ask what is going on when a carefully formulated study of “culture” does not feel like “cultural studies,” and can barely plausibly call itself such. Danaher, Schirato, and Webb’s deployment of Foucault is a revealing one–it enables cultural studies to theorize areas that certain versions of Marxism could not, while traversing the interests of the various axes of identity politics.

     

    Of course, it has been necessary to limit my study to a few key readings of Foucault, and I recognize my comments are restricted to those formations of cultural studies that are informed by these intellectual traditions. In much of the work I have discussed, Foucault’s concepts are deemed to adhere to the requirements of cultural studies’ critical agenda and to a methodology marked, as we have seen, by the dialectics of structure and agency. However, to evaluate these positions in the way that I have is not to argue that certain readings of Foucault are not “accurate” because they do not conform to some authoritative, authorial “intention.” My analysis, instead, offers ways of reconceiving some important theoretical problems within cultural studies. And I am arguing that it may not be sufficient for cultural studies’ analyses to gesture toward Foucault’s ideas without acknowledging that these necessarily entail a much broader reconceptualization of cultural studies’ theoretical armature. If cultural studies is to start engaging more meaningfully with specific institutional spheres and material operators of power, then it must do so by describing and analyzing cultural phenomena as they appear within realms of contingency rather than as products of generalized systematicities. This would allow for the present to be reconceived, as Rose suggests, as “an actuality to be acted upon and within by genealogical investigation, to be made amenable to action by the action of thought” (Powers 11). By taking effect in this way within a historical domain, cultural analysis can offer a means for involving oneself practically in the world.

     

    Notes

     

    1. I will not attempt the uncertain task of defining cultural studies here, although Bennett (“Towards” and “Reluctant”) offers some good reasons–mainly regarding the institutionalization of the discipline–why it is possible to do so.

     

    2. See Frow (“Versions”), Bové, and Miller (173-80) for a review of the reception of Foucault within the “history of ideas” tradition coming out of American graduate schools–an intellectual field that, importantly, as Frow points out, “Foucault’s own work has done so much to undermine” (“Some Versions” 145).

     

    3. Michael Sprinker contends that Foucault is interested in “a familiar historical problem: the emergence of modern society and its characteristic instruments of political and ideological control” (4). Similarly, Colin Mercer suggests that both Foucault and Gramsci illustrate how systems of domination are “simultaneously coercive and productive” (51).

     

    4. There are other theorists who figure significantly here. Bourdieu’s characterization of the relation between everyday practices of consumption and broader configurations of power via his notion of “reproduction” has been extremely influential. Also important are de Certeau’s The Practice of Everyday Life and Lefebvre’s The Critique of Everyday Life–see Drotner for a summary of their reception in media ethnography.

     

    5. For example, Callinicos distinguishes between two currents of poststructuralism and suggests that Foucauldian genealogy is preferable to Derridean “textualism” for its inclusion of extra-discursive elements in its analysis of power (86). See also Said’s “The Problem of Textuality: Two Exemplary Positions” for a similar positioning of the two theorists.

     

    6. A good example of this is in Said’s formative work, Orientalism. Here, “discourse” is used to describe the construction and administration of the non-European world in terms of a kind of semiotics. He contends that orientalism is not merely a text but “a mode of discourse with supporting institutions, vocabulary, scholarship, imagery, doctrines, even colonial bureaucracies and colonial styles” (2). But despite this attempt to grant “discourse” some kind of extratextual materiality and historicity, Said is primarily concerned with orientalist texts “as representations, not as ‘natural’ depictions of the Orient” (21). In studying the production of orientalist knowledges and their connection with imperialist power, he conceives of the relationship between the orient and the occident in terms of a “complex hegemony” (5).

     

    7. In “Truth and Power,” Foucault proclaims, “I don’t see who could be more of an anti-structuralist than myself” (114). There are many examples in Foucault’s work–see particularly pages 64-73 of “The Order of Discourse” and the introduction to The Archaeology of Knowledge–that attest to his effort to “find a way around the primacy of representation” (Order 364).

     

    8. E.P. Thompson’s disparagement of Althusser’s synchronicity and supposed depoliticization of history in The Poverty of Theory is probably the most famous example of this conflict.

     

    9. The new historicism offers a good point of comparison here for its attention to historical detail, and is notable for its influence on Foucault’s later work. See The Use of Pleasure (11). However, while During (198), describes it as a “non-mimetic paradigm,” it is still accused by Steedman of harboring an underlying formalism.

     

    10. Bell presents a survey of recent scholarship concerned with “performativity and belonging,” including the implications for discussions of race and ethnicity. Such work involves a consideration of the “ways in which technologies, discursive deployments and power/knowledge networks produce the lines of allegiance and fracture in the various orders of things within which people and objects move” (1). See also Probyn’s Outside Belongings for an example of an attempt to use Foucault to work against rigid notions of identity and determination–it is particularly his concept of “heterotopia” that is said to function

     

    against a certain logic of identity which proceeds through division and designation, ultimately producing polarization. . . . The concept of heterotopia provides an analytic space in which to consider forms of belonging outside of the divisiveness of categorising. (10)

     

    In contrast, Probyn, who is also motivated by Foucault’s work on food, wishes to use it in order to contest the limits of identity politics. She wants to arrive at a “new ethics of existence” that no longer posits sex as a privileged site in the theorization of identity (“Food” 215). Probyn purports to be pointedly Foucauldian in her hope that “through food we may begin to formulate an ethics of living that works against the logics of categorization that now dominate much of the politics of identity” (224).

     

    11. See The Use of Pleasure and The Care of the Self for historical analyses that deploy the category of gender. Both of these texts consider the ways sexual behavior, the relations between men and women, and instances of masculine privilege came to concern moral experience and regulation in Greek antiquity. For example, the problematization and prohibition of certain behaviours are described as being largely “an elaboration of masculine conduct carried out from the viewpoint of men in order to give form to their behaviour” (Use 22-23).

     

    12. McNay’s reading of Foucault in Foucault: A Critical Introduction is exemplary here. She contends that, even when revised as a “positive phenomenon,” Foucault’s notion of power is “a unidirectionally imposed monolithic force,” leaving no scope for “the possibility of social change and the dynamic and relatively autonomous nature of social action” (3). “The idea that all thought is in the service of dominatory regimes,” she argues, “cannot adequately explain how conflicting perspectives may arise in the same regime” (64).

     

    13. Young suggests that “Foucault’s few explicit writings in these areas are sometimes curious: take his comments on the revolution in Iran, where he discusses the Iranian Revolution in terms of what he considers to be its expression of ‘an absolutely collective will’ which he contrasts to the more mediated forms of European revolutions” (57). Spivak also worries about what she regards as an imperialist tendency in Foucault’s work:

     

    sometimes it seems as if the very brilliance of Foucault’s analysis of the centuries of European imperialism produces a miniature version of that heterogeneous phenomenon: management of space–but by doctors; development of administrations–but in asylums; considerations of the periphery–but in terms of the insane, prisoners and children . . . all seem to be screen-allegories that foreclose a reading of the broader narratives of imperialism. (291)

     

    14. Many examples can be cited exemplifying Foucault’s aversion to this obligation to serve as a personal source of authority for his ideas. This one is found in his explication of the “author-function”: “the author is asked to account for the unity of the texts which are placed under his name. He is asked to reveal or at least carry authentification of the hidden meaning that traverses them. He is asked to connect them to his lived experiences, to the real history which saw their birth” (“Order” 58).

     

    15. Homi Bhabha’s Freudian analysis of the colonial stereotype, for example, is appended onto Foucault’s dispositif. In a more extreme example, Christopher Lane argues that using Foucault with psychoanalysis is justified if one considers that Foucault concludes The Order of Things, in which he is apparently “heavily indebted to Jacques Lacan,” by “supporting Freud’s account of the unconscious” (164-65).

     

    16. I am actually abbreviating a diverse body of work here. For some examples see Arditi, Coveney, Rimke, Miller and McHoul, and Wickham for their varying political imperatives and degrees of “criticalism.”

     

    17. See particularly Fredric Jameson’s “On ‘Cultural Studies.’”

     

    18. See pages 35-38 of Bennett’s Culture: A Reformer’s Science.

     

    19. See Gibson and McHoul for a more sustained analysis of this question.

     

    20. Hall goes on to qualify this statement by suggesting that the “organic intellectual” is only a “hope” rather than an actuality in much cultural analysis (292). Frow and Morris, however, make a strong case to suggest that this Gramscian model is still the prevailing one within much cultural studies work, at least in Australia (xxiv-xxvi).

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Arditi, Jorge. “Etiquette Books, Discourse and the Deployment of an Order of Things.” Theory, Culture and Society 16.4 (1999): 25-48.
    • Bell, Vikki. “Performativity and Belonging: an Introduction.” Theory, Culture and Society 16.2 (1999): 1-10.
    • Bennett, Tony. “Cultural Studies: A Reluctant Discipline.” Cultural Studies 12.4 (1998): 528-45.
    • —. Culture: A Reformer’s Science. Sydney: Allen and Unwin, 1998.
    • —. “Towards a Pragmatics for Cultural Studies.” Cultural Methodologies. Ed. Jim McGuigan. London: Sage, 1997. 42-61.
    • —. “Useful Culture.” Cultural Studies 6.3 (1992): 395-408.
    • Bhabha, Homi. “The Other Question.” Screen 24.6 (1983): 18-36.
    • Bouchard, Donald. Language, Counter-memory, Practice: Selected Essays and Interviews by Michel Foucault. Ithaca: Cornell UP, 1977.
    • Bourdieu, Pierre. Distinction: A Social Critique of the Judgement of Taste. London: Routledge, 1984.
    • Bové, Paul. “The Foucault Phenomenon: The Problematics of Style.” Deleuze vii-xl.
    • Burchell, Graham, Colin Gordon, and Peter Miller, eds. The Foucault Effect: Studies in Governmentality. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1991.
    • Butler, Judith. Bodies That Matter: On the Discursive Limits of “Sex.” New York: Routledge, 1993.
    • —. Gender Trouble: Feminism and the Subversion of Identity. New York: Routledge, 1990.
    • —. “Revisiting Bodies and Pleasures.” Theory, Culture and Society 16.2 (1999): 11-20.
    • Callinicos, Alex. “Postmodernism, Post-Structuralism, Post-Marxism?” Theory, Culture and Society 2.3 (1985): 85-101.
    • Coveney, John. “The Government and Ethics of Nutrition.” Diss. Murdoch U, 1996.
    • Danaher, Geoff, Tony Schirato, and Jen Webb. Understanding Foucault. Sydney: Allen and Unwin, 2000.
    • de Certeau, Michel. The Practice of Everyday Life. Berkeley: U of California P, 1984.
    • Deleuze, Gilles. Foucault. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1988.
    • Drotner, Kirsten. “Ethnographic Enigmas: ‘The Everyday’ in Recent Media Studies.” Cultural Studies 8.2 (1994): 341-55.
    • During, Simon. Foucault and Literature: Towards a Genealogy of Writing. London: Routledge, 1992.
    • Dworkin, Dennis. Cultural Marxism in Postwar Britain: History, the New Left, and the Origins of Cultural Studies. Durham: Duke UP, 1997.
    • Fiske, John. “Cultural Studies and the Culture of Everyday Life.” Grossberg, Nelson, and Treichler 154-73.
    • Foucault, Michel. The Archaeology of Knowledge. London: Tavistock, 1972.
    • —. The Care of the Self: The History of Sexuality Volume Three. New York: Vintage, 1988.
    • —. Discipline and Punish. New York: Vintage, 1977.
    • —. “Governmentality.” Burchell, Gordon, and Miller 87-104.
    • —. Herculine Barbin: Being the Recently Discovered Memoirs of a Nineteenth-Century Hermaphrodite. Brighton: Harvester, 1980.
    • —. The History of Sexuality: An Introduction. London: Penguin, 1981.
    • —. “Intellectuals and Power: A Conversation between Michel Foucault and Gilles Deleuze.” Bouchard 205-17.
    • —. “Nietzsche, Genealogy, History.” Bouchard 139-64.
    • —. “The Order of Discourse.” Untying the Text: A Post-Structuralist Reader. Ed. Robert Young. Boston: Routledge, 1981. 48-78.
    • —. The Order of Things: An Archaeology of the Human Sciences. London: Routledge, 1989.
    • —. “Politics and the Study of Discourse.” Burchell, Gordon, and Miller 53-72.
    • —. “Practising Criticism.” Michel Foucault: Politics, Philosophy, Culture: Interviews and Other Writings 1977-1984. Ed. Lawrence Kritzman. New York: Routledge, 1988. 152-56.
    • —. “Questions of Method: An Interview with Michel Foucault.” I&C 8 (1981): 3-14.
    • —. “Truth and Power.” Power/Knowledge: Selected Interviews and Other Writings 1972-1977. Ed. Colin Gordon. New York: Harvester, 1980. 109-33.
    • —. The Use of Pleasure: The History of Sexuality Volume Two. New York: Vintage, 1990.
    • Frow, John. “Discourse and Power.” Economy and Society 14.2 (1985): 192-214.
    • —. “Some Versions of Foucault.” Meanjin 47.1 (1988): 144-56.
    • —. “Some Versions of Foucault.” Meanjin 47.2 (1988): 353-65.
    • Frow, John and Meaghan Morris. “Introduction.” Australian Cultural Studies: A Reader. Eds. John Frow and Meaghan Morris. Sydney: Allen and Unwin, 1993. vii-xxxii.
    • Gibson, Mark and Alec McHoul. “Interdisciplinarity.” A Companion to Cultural Studies. Ed. Toby Miller. Oxford: Blackwell, 2001. 23-35.
    • Gordon, Colin. “Governmental Rationality: An Introduction.” The Foucault Effect: Studies in Governmentality. Eds. Graham Burchell, Colin Gordon, and Peter Miller. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1991. 1-52.
    • —. “Other Inquisitions.” I&C 6 (1979): 23-46.
    • Grossberg, Larry, Cary Nelson, and Paula Treichler, eds. Cultural Studies. New York: Routledge, 1992.
    • Hall, Stuart. “Cultural Studies and its Theoretical Legacies.” Grossberg, Nelson, and Treichler 277-94.
    • —. “Cultural Studies: Two Paradigms.” Media, Culture and Society 2 (1980): 57-72.
    • —. “Introduction: Who Needs Identity?” Questions of Cultural Identity. Eds. Stuart Hall and Paul du Gay. London: Sage, 1996. 1-17.
    • Halperin, David. Saint Foucault: Towards a Gay Hagiography. New York: Oxford UP, 1995.
    • Hunter, Ian. “Aesthetics and Cultural Studies.” Grossberg, Nelson, and Treichler. 347-72.
    • —. Culture and Government: The Emergence of Literary Education. London: MacMillan Education, 1988.
    • —. “From Discourse to Dispositif: Foucault and the Study of Literature.” Meridian 10 (1991): 36-53.
    • Jameson, Fredric. “On ‘Cultural Studies.’” Social Text 34 (1993): 17-52.
    • Kendall, Gavin, and Gary Wickham. Understanding Culture: Cultural Studies, Order, Ordering. London: Sage, 2001.
    • Lane, Christopher. “Psychoanalysis and Sexual Identity.” Lesbian and Gay Studies: A Critical Introduction. Eds. Sally Munt and Andy Medhurst. London: Cassell, 1997. 160-75.
    • Lefebvre, Henri. The Critique of Everyday Life. London: Verso, 1991.
    • Malpas, Jeff, and Gary Wickham. “Governance and Failure: On the Limits of Sociology.” Australian and New Zealand Journal of Sociology 31.3 (1995): 37-50.
    • McNay, Lois. Foucault: A Critical Introduction. Cambridge: Polity, 1994.
    • Mercer, Colin. “Complicit Pleasures.” Popular Culture and Social Relations. Eds. Tony Bennett, Colin Mercer, and Janet Woollacott. Milton Keynes: Open UP, 1986. 50-68.
    • Miller, Toby. The Well-Tempered Self: Citizenship, Culture and the Postmodern Subject. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 1993.
    • Miller, Toby, and Alec McHoul. Popular Culture and Everyday Life. London: Sage, 1998.
    • Morris, Meaghan. “The Pirate’s Fiancée.” Michel Foucault: Power, Truth, Strategy. Eds. Meaghan Morris and Paul Patton. Sydney: Feral, 1979. 148-68.
    • —. “Introduction: History in Cultural Studies.” Too Soon Too Late: History in Popular Culture. Bloomington: Indiana UP, 1998. 1-28.
    • O’Regan, Tom. “(Mis)Taking Policy: Notes on the Cultural Policy Debate.” Cultural Studies 6.3 (1992): 409-23.
    • Osborne, Thomas. Aspects of Enlightenment: Social Theory and the Ethics of Truth. London: U of London P, 1998.
    • Probyn, Elspeth. “Beyond Food/Sex.” Theory, Culture and Society 16.2 (1999): 215-28.
    • —. Outside Belongings. New York: Routledge, 1996.
    • Rimke, Heidi Marie. “Governing Citizens through Self-Help Literature.” Cultural Studies 14.1 (2000): 61-78.
    • Rose, Nikolas. “Identity, Genealogy, History.” Questions of Cultural Identity. Eds. Stuart Hall and Paul du Gay. London: Sage, 1996. 128-50.
    • —. Powers of Freedom: Reframing Political Thought. New York: Cambridge UP, 1999.
    • Said, Edward. Orientalism. London: Penguin, 1978.
    • —. “The Problem of Textuality: Two Exemplary Positions.” Critical Inquiry 4.4 (1978): 673-714.
    • Spivak, Gayatri Chakravorty. “Can the Subaltern Speak?” Marxism and the Interpretation of Culture. Eds. Cary Nelson and Lawrence Grossberg. London: MacMillan Education, 1988. 271-313.
    • Sprinker, Michael. “The Use and Abuse of Foucault.” Humanities in Society 3.1 (1980): 1-21.
    • Steedman, Carolyn. “Culture, Cultural Studies, and the Historians.” Grossberg, Nelson, and Treichler 613-22.
    • Taylor, Affrica. “A Queer Geography.” Lesbian and Gay Studies: A Critical Introduction. Eds. Andy Medhurst and Sally Munt. London: Cassell, 1997. 3-19.
    • Thompson, E.P. The Poverty of Theory and Other Essays. London: Merlin, 1978.
    • Wickham, Gary. “Sport, Manners, Persons, Government: Sport, Elias, Mauss, Foucault.” Cultural Studies 6.2 (1992): 219-31.
    • Williams, Raymond. “Base and Superstructure in Marxist Cultural Theory.” New Left Review 82 (1973): 3-16.
    • —. Culture and Society 1780-1950. Hammondsworth: Penguin, 1961.
    • Young, Robert. “Foucault on Race and Colonialism.” New Formations 25 (1995): 57-65.

     

  • Executive Overspill: Affective Bodies, Intensity, and Bush-in-Relation

    Jenny H. Edbauer

    Department of English
    University of Texas at Austin
    edbauer@mail.utexas.edu

     

    If there were no escape, no excess, no remainder, . . . the universe would be without potential, pure entropy, death. Actually existing, structured things live in and through that which escapes them. Their autonomy is the autonomy of affect.

     

    –Brian Massumi

     

    I’ve changed my style somewhat, as you know. I’m less–I pontificate less. . . . And I’m interacting more with people.

     

    –George W. Bush, 13 February 2000

    Introduction: The Chief Eruption

     

    The President appears and suddenly something goes wrong. He stumbles. He squints. His mouth opens, but the words won’t come. And when they do finally come, they are wrong. The sounds are strangely tangled up, misplaced, tortured. His body jerks just a little, but the camera magnifies the small flinches until they appear larger than life. When watching George W. Bush speak, you are watching an event. It is easy to get the feeling that you are witnessing something fall apart. In front of the cameras and lights, his body cannot contain the linguistic flaws, grammatical blunders, wild malapropisms, and visible confusion that are present. The executive body becomes a wild composition of energies and forces. Something erupts. In a 1999 article for The New Yorker, Joe Klein describes Bush’s body like this:

     

    He will squinny his eyes, raise his chin, lift an eyebrow, and curl his lip slightly–his face seems to be involved in a somewhat painful, quasi-involuntary struggle to prevent itself from erupting into a broad, self-satisfied smile. This facial skirmish is often accompanied by a slight forward bend at the waist and a what-me-worry? shrug, and they often occur after the Governor has delivered a line particularly well, or thinks he has. (“Campaign” 40)

     

    Of course, Bush hardly ever delivers a line particularly well. The phenomenon of spotting and cataloging “Bushisms”–those infamous verbal flubs and failings–has become a kind of sport. His caricature almost creates itself: if Bill Clinton’s stereotype was The Good Time Bubba, Bush’s popular image is The Dumb Jock. Yet, as Mark Crispin Miller points out in The Bush Dyslexicon, this image is hardly a source of shame for President Bush. By playing the role of the folksy American during the 2000 campaign, Bush seemed “a viable alternative to the far more seasoned and intelligent Al Gore–whose very strengths could be perceived, or spun, as weaknesses by contrast with the Texan’s ‘naturalness’ and ‘likeability’” (Miller 13). Bush’s mispronunciations and slips of the tongue are thus rendered as a reflection of his populism. As Miller tells it, “certainly George W. Bush has always postured as a good ole boy, who don’t go in fer usin’ them five-dollar words like ‘snippy’ and ‘insurance’” (13). Indeed, Bush has capitalized on this image quite well. Bush understands that “there is no balm like ‘self-effacing humor.’ Thus he started early on to use that weary little joke about his tendency to ‘stress the wrong syl-LAB-able,’ and told Letterman that he ‘would make sure the White House library has lots of books with big print and big pictures’” (Miller 39). And then there were the President’s self-deprecating remarks at Yale University’s 300th commencement: “To the C students, I say, ‘You too can be president of the United States.’” Waves of laughter erupt from the crowd: he’s got quite a sense of humor.

     

    As Miller astutely observes, however, Bush’s miscommunications are more than rhetorical blunderings. He is not (merely) illiterate, but intensely and viscerally incoherent:

     

    His eyes go blank as he consults the TelePrompTer in his head, and he chews uneasily at the corner of his mouth, as if to keep his lips in motion for the coming job, much as a batter swings before the pitch. Thus prepared, he then meticulously sounds out every. . . single . . . word, as if asking for assistance in a foreign language. (6)

     

    Bush’s incoherence presents an interesting problem for cultural theory, as well as for the political left. If we argue, for example, that Bush is an anti-intellectual–or, at the very least, a thoughtless Head–we might rightfully conclude that any of three factors is at work.1 Perhaps the left has not done a good job of pointing out Bush’s inconsistency and anti-intellectualism (or perhaps they have failed to show why these characteristics are harmful). Or perhaps we might conclude that people appreciate Bush’s ineptness–that his blunders are the mark of a “regular guy.” Or, as a third alternative, we might even conclude that the public feels positive about Bush in spite of his public dullness; his other qualities outshine his apparent dimness. All of these conclusions are strong rhetorical accounts of Bush’s surprising popularity in the face of his public stupidity. Yet I would suggest a further way of mapping Bush’s rhetoric that the political left, not to mention cultural theory, has been slow to consider: Bush’s rhetoric, including the jarring disruptions of thought and speech, creates an intensity that can move others. Bush’s ineptness contains something affective that turns out to be more than its symbolic or meaningful form. In other words, before we can talk about gridded position(ings) either for or against Bush, something intensive occurs in the interstices between our various bodies. There is an affective dimension to Bush’s rhetoric that can be located and mapped in terms of the body and bodily forces. In order to more fully understand this executive body and its cultural effects, we must turn to the concept of affect.

     

    Affect and (Other) Unqualified Bodies

     

    Read across the notion of affect, Bush’s decomposition is quite significant. The fact that you cannot read his lips is important; the Presidential disconnection implies much more than a missed connection. As Brian Massumi argues in Parables for the Virtual: Movement, Affect, Sensation, the event of image reception takes place on several levels: there is a level of intensity and a level of qualification. Whereas qualification is the image’s “indexing to conventional meanings in an intersubjective context, its sociolinguistic qualification,” an image’s intensity is “the strength or duration of the image’s effect” (24). For example, Massumi describes an experiment undertaken by researchers after a short, wordless film on German television raised a number of complaints from parents about the film’s tendency to scare children. The film itself, which was originally nothing but filler between programs, was seemingly innocuous: a man builds a snowman, and, after it begins to melt in the sun, drives it to the mountains. There he drops off the snowman and leaves. This scene is hardly the kind of film one would identify as being frightening to children. In their experiments, researchers showed different versions of the film to children: a wordless version, a version that narrated the man’s emotional states at various points, and a factually narrated version. They wired the children to measure various physiological reactions, and asked for responses to the film. (Is this version happy or sad? Is this version pleasant or unpleasant? Which one do you remember the most?) As Massumi writes, the children found the original wordless version most pleasant. Oddly enough, the children also rated this wordless version as the saddest one. The saddest version was the most pleasant. The physiological results are also strange, Massumi points out. “Factuality made their heart beat faster and deepened their breathing, but it also made their skin resistance fall” (Parables 24). In other words, the heart-brain processed information effectively, but it was the skin that had to be excited.

     

    But why would the brain race while the skin is bored? Massumi suggests that these different functions arise from their relation to expectation. Because the heart-brain positions itself within narrative and cognitive continuity, “modulations of heartbeat and breathing mark a reflux of consciousness into the autonomic depths, coterminous with a rise of the autonomic into consciousness” (Parables 25). But intensity–the skin flicks–jumps outside the narrative/cognitive line. Intensity disrupts the linear narrative. The pleasure of intensity is a jump cut, a jolt, a shock that exists on the surface of signification. Judging from such empirical scenes, Massumi concludes that “depth reactions belong more to the form/content (qualification) level. . . . The reason may be that they are associated with expectation, which depends on consciously positioning oneself in a line of narrative continuity” (25). The qualification-meaning level of an image’s reception, in other words, relates to expectation. Yet, the intensity level, which registers on the skin, “is outside expectation and adaptation. . . . It is narratively delocalized, spreading over the generalized body surface like a lateral backwash from the function-meaning interloops that travel the vertical path between head and heart” (25). The level of intensity in image reception is something other than expectation. Indeed, writes Massumi, “intensity would seem to be associated with nonlinear processes: resonation and feedback that momentarily suspend the linear progress of the narrative present from past to future” (26). Intensity is a disruption of the indexing of qualification.

     

    These multiple levels do not merely happen with image reception, however. “Language belongs to entirely different orders depending on which redundancy it enacts,” writes Massumi, “or, it always enacts both more or less completely: two languages, two dimensions of every expression, one superlinear, the other linear. Every event takes place on both levels” (26; emphasis mine). Massumi calls these two halves expectation and suspense. “Approaches to the image in its relation to language are incomplete if they operate only on the semantic or semiotic level, however that level is defined . . . . What they lose, precisely, is the expression event–in favor of structure” (26-27). In short, Massumi concludes, “much could be gained by integrating the dimension of intensity into cultural theory. The stakes are the new” (27). In spite of everything that expectation, the symbolic, and structure allow for, they operate in a realm where nothing new emerges. But the event itself is not prefigured. As Massumi writes, “the expression-event is the system of the inexplicable: emergence, into and against regeneration (the reproduction of a structure). . . . Intensity is the unassimilable” (27). Following Massumi’s lead, therefore, we can redescribe intensity of the event as affect.

     

    This theory of affect–of the event’s doubleness–is important for cultural theory. Massumi notes, “there seems to be a growing feeling within media, literary, and art theory that affect is central to an understanding of our information- and image-based late capitalist culture, in which so-called master narratives are perceived to have foundered” (27). The problem, according to Massumi, is that “there is no cultural-theoretical vocabulary specific to affect. Our entire vocabulary has derived from theories of signification that are still wedded to structure” (27). Thus, we must invent an affective cultural theory as we go along. The stakes are the new and the otherwise unassimilable dimension that shadows our encounters with the event. If our descriptions lack an account of the affective-intense dimensions, they can formulate only a partial cultural theory.

     

    As we see in Massumi’s evocations of the event’s doubleness, therefore, corporality is more than it sometimes seems. A cultural theory of affect is a theory of the body. The affective body is an event; it is implicated in the doubleness of the event. Whereas many readings of the body begin in qualification and ideological realms–in meaning–we must not neglect the body’s total event. That is, we must not neglect both halves of the body: qualification and intensity. It may be true, as Katharine Young writes in her introduction to Bodylore, that “our beliefs about the body, our perceptions of it and the properties we attribute to it, both symbolic and literal, are socially constructed” (xvii). However, we cannot simply reduce the body to the plane of meaning. It is here that the challenge to cultural theory specifically lies: we must come to understand the body as an affective body, as a total event.

     

    I can think of no better exemplar than Bush, who is certainly not describable only in terms of qualification. (Has one ever seen a more unqualified executive body?) Calling on this body, then, I want to extend Massumi’s call for the creation of a cultural vocabulary of affect by tracing three lines, three key terms, of the affective body: relational intensity, the sensation of involvement, and thought-impingement.2 I argue that we must begin to develop a cultural-theoretical vocabulary of and for affective bodies beyond those existing vocabularies of signification. Not only can such vocabularies bring both halves of the event into focus, but this exploration also offers a material re/description of the (political) body as an effect of affect. Moreover, this reading does not apply merely to President Bush’s decomposing body, but to cultural theory as such. In other words, a bodily theory of affect can become a launching pad for a more complete response to current cultural-political scenes. What follows is thus a double gesture of analysis: I want to generate an affective vocabulary via the spectacle of Bush’s decomposing body, as well as a reading of this body across our developing vocabulary of affect. I suggest that such vocabularies can only be generated in a simultaneous co-emergence with(in) sites of cultural analysis. They emerge, that is, through unqualified exemplars.

     

    Relational Intensity

     

    Bush operates most effectively through surprise attack. In his 8 February 2004 appearance on Meet the Press, for example, Bush responded to the growing clamor over weapons of mass destruction (or the lack thereof) with what was slated to be an explanation. “There is no such thing necessarily in a dictatorial regime of iron-clad absolutely solid evidence,” he remarked. “The evidence I had was the best possible evidence that he had a weapon.” And, taking a slightly different tactic, Bush further responded, “in my judgment, when the United States says there will be serious consequences, and if there isn’t serious consequences, it creates adverse consequences.” To put it mildly, these responses jolt their audience. As qualifications, they are meaningless and empty, yet their vacuousness is hardly without intensity–in fact, they come on strong and refuse to evaporate. Bush’s incorrect statements, tautologies, malapropisms, mispronunciations, and bewildering remarks stage a jolt, causing intensity to build up around them. “I don’t care what the polls say,” remarked the President in March of 2000, “I don’t. I’m doing what I think what’s wrong” (qtd. in Miller 134). Miller identifies remarks like this as a surprise for the audience. Miller continues, “For this tendency there may be some physiological explanation; or it may express the muffled protests of a very deeply buried conscience” (134). Bush tells the truth in spite of himself. One’s first inclination may be to explain this jolt as a severe case of intellectual deficit disorder. Yet something more is happening in these veerings and verbal snags. Bush’s pratfalls are not (only) failures, but, perhaps more importantly, they are affectively generative events. It is a mistake, therefore, to underestimate the importance of the event’s doubleness in reading this scene. The jolt of Bushisms exposes the “productivity” of affect as a relational capacity–a function of relations. It might be worth while to spend some probing the idea of relationality for what it can tell us about the event of unqualified bodies.

     

    Consider the Reagan Presidency: smooth and polished, the Great Communicator himself might seem to be Bush’s performative doppelganger. Many commentators have crafted the moment of Reagan’s persuasiveness as a sublime example of charisma-politics. Teflon Ron. Unlike the sticky prose and verbal snags of Bush’s speech, nothing stuck to Reagan. He appeared to be smooth. Massumi points to a story from Oliver Sacks that suggests otherwise. Sacks observed two groups of cognitively dysfunctional patients–global aphasiacs and tonal agnosiacs–watching Reagan deliver a speech. Whereas the first group follows significant meaning through body language, the second group gathers meaning strictly through people’s grammatical and semantic verbal structures. Interestingly enough, notes Massumi, neither group was able to follow the supposedly smoother-than-smooth Reagan. His body language was so jerky and unsmooth that the aphasics could not follow his meaning. At the same time, writes Massumi, “the agnosiacs were outraged that the man couldn’t put together a grammatical sentence or follow a logical line to its conclusion” (Parables 40). The upshot, surprisingly enough, is that Reagan was anything but a smooth talker. This usual rationale for his popularity appears to be somewhat questionable.

     

    The picture of Reagan as the Great Communicator is thus rhetorically troubled for a number of reasons. Even on the surface, Reagan lacked the charismatic qualities to pull off a politics of charisma. As Massumi remarks:

     

    It wasn’t that people didn’t hear the verbal fumbling or recognize the incoherence of his thoughts. They were the butt of constant jokes and news stories. And it wasn’t that what he lacked on the level of verbal coherence was glossed over by the seductive fluency of his body image. Reagan was more famous for his polyps than his poise. (Parables 40)

     

    Paradoxically, Massumi suggests that Reagan’s popularity did not happen in spite of this unintelligibility, but because of it. “The only conclusion is that Reagan was an effective leader . . . because of his double dysfunction. He was able to produce ideological effects by . . . falling apart. His means were affective” (40). Massumi argues that Reagan’s power to attract others was the power of interruption, of suspense: “At each jerk, at each cut into the movement, the potential is there for the movement to veer off in another direction, to become a different movement. . . . In other words, each jerk is a critical point, a singular point, a bifurcation point” (40-41). His movement developed along the lines of the event: Reagan not only embodied qualification, he also embodied the unassimilable intensity of suspense. Massumi explains:

     

    He was an incipience . . . It was on the receiving end that the Reagan incipience was qualified, given content. . . . They [the audience] selected one line of movement, one progression of meaning, to actualize and implant locally. That is why Reagan could be so many things to so many people. (41)

     

    Reagan’s power was precisely his potential: the doubleness of the event was crucial to his ability to move others. At every turn, Reagan’s qualifications were hacked and cut. He communicated via interruption of expectation–he was an affective leader, even if not necessarily an effective one.

     

    This insipience embodied by Reagan is arguably echoed in Bush’s rhetoric. The President’s visceral incoherence that Miller identifies is both more and less than a case of stupidity. He surprises us in a variety of ways–from the disastrous malapropisms to the rather obvious shifts and evasions. In a January 2004 press conference, for example, Bush was questioned about David Kay’s startling admission that weapons of mass destruction would probably not be found in Iraq. “Are you still confident that weapons of mass destruction will be found in Iraq,” the reporter asked, “given what Dr. Kay has said?” The President responded with what might most generously be called a non sequitur:

     

    There is no doubt in my mind that Saddam Hussein was a gathering threat to America and others. That’s what we know. . . . And given the events of September the 11th, we know we could not trust the good intentions of Saddam Hussein, because he didn’t have any. There is no doubt in my mind the world is a better place without Saddam Hussein. America is more secure, the world is safer, and the people of Iraq are free. (Office of the Press Secretary)

     

    The answer hardly follows, yet we should also note that this “surprise” has the effect of a bifurcation point, which veers off into innumerable incipiencies. This veering is not merely a matter of multiple interpretive possibilities (although we can read Bush’s tautologies as such, for example), but it is also the encounter of disruption, of suspense. Bush’s disruptions reflect the jolt of the event and its doubleness. To borrow Massumi’s phrase about Reagan, Bush himself is “a communicative jerk” (Parables 41). Therefore, we might wish to depart from Miller’s reading of Bush’s rhetoric–a qualified reading that seeks to expose the disruption of expectation as a broken line of meaning–and look instead to the event’s doubleness. While Bush’s persuasiveness and rhetorical efficacy may not be locatable in his qualified, indexical meanings, his intensity is another matter. It may not be his linear dimensions that move audiences, but rather the supralinear. Moreover, it may not be a movement of gridded positionality that is effected, but movement as such.

     

    Here we can turn to the work of Spinoza on the subject of decomposing bodies. As Massumi points out, Spinoza’s writings are perhaps the most powerful source of influence for current theories of affect: “on the irreducibly bodily and autonomic nature of affect . . . it is the name of Baruch Spinoza that stands out” (Parables 28). Spinoza is interested in what he calls the affections of the body, where “the body’s power of activity is increased or diminished, assisted or checked” (104). For Spinoza, a body is never a/lone(ly) body. One body is always in relation to another. “The human body can be affected in many ways by which its power of activity is increased or diminished,” writes Spinoza (104). The relation of affect is not a one-way proposition. A body is affected by another body as much as it affects another body. Spinoza explains, “the human body is composed of very many individual bodies of different nature, and so it can be affected by one and the same body in many different ways” (115). Drugs are an obvious example of just such a manifold affectation. While a drug can be quite pleasurable for certain parts of the body, it can also be harmful to others (the liver, brain, etc.). Similarly, Spinoza continues, “different men can be affected in different ways by one and the same object, and one and the same man can be affected by one and the same object in different ways at different times” (134). Spinoza describes this interrelation of bodies and affects in terms of joy and sadness, which are terms central to his ontology. As Deleuze writes in his brief treatise on Spinoza:

     

    When a body “encounters” another body, or an idea another idea, it happens that the two relations sometimes combine to form a more powerful whole, and sometimes one decomposes the other, destroying the cohesion of its parts. . . . We experience joy when a body encounters ours and enters into composition with it, and sadness when, on the contrary, a body or an idea threaten our own coherence. (Spinoza 19)

     

    Moira Gatens and Catherine Lloyd explain Spinoza’s affective poles: “Joy involves an increase in activity–an increase in the striving to persist. . . . there is a corresponding orientation of sadness toward disengagement and isolation” (53). Whereas joy is an increase in active intensities, sadness is the diminishment of that potentiality.

     

    A body is thus a degree of potential for entering certain kinds of relations. As Deleuze points out, Spinoza defines bodies not as a substance but as “a capacity for affecting or being affected” (Spinoza 124). Such capacity certainly relates to the “ideas” that affect us. (For example, I have the capacity for being affected by sad thoughts, thereby changing the intensity of my body at a particular moment of a sad song.) Yet, Deleuze describes this capacity in concrete terms, beyond the ideas that, as we commonly say, affect us. “For example: there are greater differences between a plow horse or draft horse and a racehorse than between an ox and a plow horse,” explains Deleuze. “This is because the racehorse and the plow horse do not have the same affects nor the same capacity for being affected” (Spinoza 124). Spinoza forgoes a substantial definition of a body in favor of its capacities and its potentiality for relations. A (Spinozist) body thus cannot be defined apart from relations with the world. Following this description, we understand the body as those groupings of capacities that are always being affected by (or affecting) another body or bodies. This encounter between bodies is a relation of intensities. Even the body that I substantively identify as my body is a matter of powers: I slip on my headphones to listen to certain music that makes me feel more energetic, more awake. The body of the songs has entered into relation with my body in such a way that increases my intensity. One body enters into a relation with another, changing the potential of both. After listening to sad music, for example, the body’s energy becomes low-key, mellow, and almost pained. Or perhaps I take a tab of acid. In spite of my wishes or desires, my body reveals its own capacities for being affected by psychopharmic bodies.

     

    The body, in its affective relation with other bodies, is thus always in a transition or a passage. “These continual durations or variations of perfection are called ‘affects,’ or feelings (affectus),” writes Deleuze (Spinoza 49). However, such affects do not merely relate to ideas that move us. “It is of another nature,” says Deleuze, “being purely transitive, and not indicative or representative, since it is experienced in a lived duration that involves the difference between two states” (Spinoza 49). Affect marks the lived duration between two states experienced by one body that is affected by another body. The sensation of such a relation is what we might call the encounter of affect. As Deleuze and Guattari explain, “affect is not a personal feeling, nor is it a characteristic; it is the effectuation of a power of the pack that throws the self into upheaval and makes it reel” (Thousand 240). Rather than acting as the emotive means by which to solidify one’s individuality, affect is the sensation of being affected by another body. It is the experience that we are not a/lone(ly), but that we exist in relations beyond what we may recognize or even wish.

     

    Affect is the experience of having the ground pulled out from under our very feet. Few people do this better than Bush, who veers, stutters, misspeaks, hesitates, twitches. We are tempted to take a jab at his failing body, a failing that (we quietly assume with a strange degree of residual Cartesianism) surely reflects a faltering mind. Yet the crashing sounds of the jolt resonate with the encounter of one body affecting/being affected by another body. The camera lights hit Bush–or the questions begin to strike–and we immediately witness a body de/composing as a result of such composition. Likewise, Bush often surprises our narrative expectations with a botched metaphor, fact, or phrase. It is then our turn to experience an interruption–a decomposition–of the (should we say normal?) smoothness of composition. Bush hacks our experience of narrative so easily, and with such a degree of intensity, because we are already in a kind of relationality with this executive body. Bush himself is hacked because he is never a/lone(ly) body, but is rather always open to affectation and compositions. Yet it is a mistake to position Bush’s “hackishness” outside of the event’s relationality. Furthermore, as we will see in the next section, this experience of relationality generates unqualified intensity that is all the more powerful in its productive capacities.

     

    The Sensation of Involvement

     

    We don’t listen to the President. Indeed, it is nearly impossible to listen to the President. Not only does he so rarely speak in public (it is said that he has given the fewest press conferences of any president since the advent of television), but he does not give you much to go on. His speech interrupts itself so frequently that it is almost impossible to find Bush sustaining an articulated thought for very long. As the President himself admits, his reading strategy is a bit disjointed: “I glance at the headlines just to kind of get a flavor for what’s moving. I rarely read the stories, and get briefed by people who are probably (sic) read the news themselves.” Even his description of reading is unreadable. Calling Bush “the unspeakable president,” Salon editor Gary Kamiya wryly remarks that forcing Bush to speak in public is un-American: “what America . . . wanted was a genial, figurehead-type CEO who is incapable of defending or even explaining the decisions made by his corporate masters . . . but who can make ignorance seem charming” (“Unspeakable”). We cannot listen to this President, and yet we experience him. We await his event. We await the jolt of relational intensity.

     

    In describing affects and/as bodies-in-relation, therefore, we are talking largely about sensation, or the sensation of involvement. Yet this is not the personalized sensation that we typically conceptualize as feelings about something. By reading Bush’s body as an affective body, we are not indexing feelings about Bush. By the time such qualification has occurred, we have already bypassed the event’s doubleness and/in the affective body. Instead, we might conceptualize affect as the sensation of the periphery. In What is Philosophy?, for example, Deleuze and Guattari look toward music and painting in order to find the sensation of bordering. “Harmonies are affects,” they write. “Consonance and dissonance, harmonies of tone or color, are affects of music or painting” (164). Harmony is sensed in music or painting, yet it does not belong properly to the listener/viewer. Neither does it reside in any particular place in the material itself. There are combinations of notes and colors, to be sure, yet the harmony exists beyond a mere combination of elements. “It is difficult to say where in fact the material ends and sensation begins. . . . Sensation is not realized in the material without the material passing completely into the sensation, into the percept or affect,” Deleuze and Guattari continue (166-67). The sensation of affect is thus the sensual experience of bordering, of being on the periphery. Or, to put it in other terms, the sensation of involvement is the corporeal experience of being-in-relation.

     

    Although the language may be unfamiliar, this affective encounter of bordering is familiar. One can point to the event of shared eroticism, for example, where sensations belong to no/body in particular. An erotic encounter reflects an involvement of bodies, skin, and those strange relations of the outside. An erotic encounter cannot sustain itself on the mere intimate relation of two (or more) bodies. Eroticism involves an extra, shared element that is outside the range of either body in its “proper” limits. The erotic is neither outside nor inside, but is rather involved in the relation. Eroticism is, perhaps, the primary exemplar of involvement. Echoing the writings of Georges Bataille, Alphonso Lingis remarks that such involvement is an exposure and wounding:

     

    What else is erotic craving but a craving to be violated? In voluptuous turmoil, we are left not simply wounded, but shattered. The violent emotions that are aroused, . . . that push on in a momentum that can no longer derail or control itself, sense also the exultation of risking oneself, of plunging into the danger zone, of expending our forces at a loss. (Dangerous 91)

     

    Lingis suggests that the erotic extends beyond the mere combining of two bodies. Erotic sensation itself is a bordering phenomenon: it is not merely an internalized sensation, but feeds from the intensity of a relation and the body of another. He writes:

     

    Erotic passion is not an initiative of what we call our person–our separate and discontinuous existence, source of its own acts, responsible for what we ourselves say and do. . . . An erotic object functions as the open gate toward which the shock waves of our energies rush, to be . . . intensified and inflamed there, and to break forth into the dazzling darkness beyond. (Dangerous 142-43)

     

    The scene of eroticism is thus a feeling of excess and exposure. It is an encounter with the periphery, or the experience of relationality. Perhaps it is telling that erotic encounters are so commonly described as the feeling of getting lost in another, getting swept away, drowning. The sensation of involvement radically exposes our own being as being-in-relation.

     

    A slightly more banal way of describing this peripheral phenomenon of affective involvement can be found in the body’s reactions to everyday event-scenes. In her reading of the plastic bag pseudo-documentary in the film American Beauty, for example, Gay Hawkins describes her reaction to the short scene as one of intense involvement. It wasn’t a matter of liking the scene, she explains. It’s not quite like that. The scene bowled her over, leaving her breathless. She says, “I was participating in that scene before I knew it, it triggered a different rhythm or process in my watching, one in which I lost my self in a new relation” (“Documentary”). That is, before she could even identify or register some kinds of index–admiration, disgust, semantic meaning, and so on–Hawkins says that she was struck. In her attempt to make sense of this rather unusual visceral reaction, Hawkins turns to the notion of the affective body as relationality. “In other words,” she writes, “affect is a relation, it’s not a self having feelings, it’s a distinctive being in and of the world” (“Documentary”). While we may be tempted to re-index, to reclassify, such an encounter, Hawkins argues that “we are in affect, participating, before this happens, affect precedes these kind of classificatory and cognitive activities” (“Documentary”). Before any qualification of the event, therefore, the affective body registers intensity and breaks expectation.

     

    As both Spinoza and Deleuze suggest, however, this involvement is never of the personal. Affect and bodies-in-relation are always a social matter. In her analysis of conservative Australian ultra-rightist politician Pauline Hanson, for example, Anna Gibbs turns to the notion of affect for an explanation of Hanson’s popularity. It is not (merely) that Hanson persuaded an entire line of voters to support her arch-conservative policies, but rather that Hanson’s affective body entered into particular kinds of joyful relations–in Spinoza’s sense of this term–with other bodies. Gibbs writes that “bodies can catch feelings as easily as catch fire: affect leaps from one body to another” (“Contagious”). Gibbs is especially interested in Hanson’s face and voice (as they are caught on screen) to find what she calls “the affective resonance” of visceral response between bodies (“Contagious”). With her pale skin, green eyes, and red hair, Hanson was a disruption from the ordinary drabness of political faces. She was striking. Her voice was also affectively contagious, wobbly and full of emotional texture. In Gibbs’s astute reading,

     

    Hanson’s voice in the broadcast coverage of the last federal election often conveyed acute distress, as if she was about to burst into tears, and the communicability of this affect in turn set in motion a number of affective sequences in those who listened to it. The distress of the other, if distress itself particularly distresses the observer, often produces an impulse to put an immediate stop to it, as when a baby cries. (“Contagious”)

     

    Trembling and emotional, Hanson appeared less than articulate or self-assured. This performance was not at all harmful to her broad conservative and moderate support, as Gibbs points out. For her inarticulacy “not only communicated the immediate affect of distress, but formed part of a more general attitude . . . of some one who has ‘had enough’, and this attitude, if not the detail of all of her actual ideas, evoked a ready sympathy in many people” (“Contagious”). In other words, it was not political, ideological content that necessarily won support for Hanson, but the sensation of intensification she was able to cultivate for some members of her audience. In addition to these indexical lines, there was a visceral feedback being fed by an interloop of bodies. There was a mutuality between Hanson and the bodies of her supporters.

     

    However, as we have seen, affect is not (always) bound up in identification. Affect as bodies-in-relation–affect in a Spinozist sense–remains outside awareness. Gibbs later concedes that this is precisely what Hanson’s inarticulation “embodies.” Citing Massumi, Gibbs writes, “to the extent that the affects comprising [attitudes] remain outside awareness, they imply desire, or what Brian Massumi has characterised . . . as ‘yearning’ [which is] . . . ‘a tendency without end’” (“Contagious”). Gibbs argues that Hanson’s affective resonance was not ultimately comprised in identification, but in “redintegration.” The difference between the two is a difference between a unifying gesture and a point of decomposition. Gibbs explains, “redintegrative contagion is less organised [than identification], less predictable, less stable. . . . [It is] characterised by disequilibrium rather than equilibrium, punctuated or otherwise” (“Contagious”). Redintegration is a falling apart. Thus, as Massumi says of Reagan (and as we might say of George W. Bush), Hanson was popular not in spite of, but because of, her inarticulacy. While we cognitively prefer linearity and indexicality of the event, the skin is intensified and potentialized by disruption. The body is struck by the event’s suspension of linearity.

     

    The real, material sensation of this immaterial strike cannot be underestimated. The lived duration of affect has power. In deleuzoguattarian terms, the strike of affect–as sensation of the periphery or involvement–marks a real change in our ways of being. The body’s relationality, Deleuze and Guattari write, is “not the passage from one lived state to another but man’s nonhuman becoming” (What 173). Becoming-involved is a process of entering into new relations and zones of proximities. “Becoming is an extreme contiguity within a coupling of two sensations without resemblance. . . . It is a zone of indetermination, of indiscernibility, as if things, beasts, and persons . . . endlessly reach that point that immediately precedes their natural differentiation. This is what is called an affect” (What 173). Here we might recall the experience of listening to music or seeing art that thrives in harmony or dissonance. During the event of hearing a song that jives with your body, you enter into a zone of permeability with other elements that are “properly” outside your own sense. Concerts illustrate this zone of indetermination to an even greater extent. Musicians often describe “feeding” on a crowd’s energy and vice-versa. Commonly perceived delimitations–proper borders of identity and substance–break down in these instances, disclosing the affective sensation of peripheral relations at work. This is not to say that the sensual experience of affect marks a return to a primal scene of origination. As Deleuze and Guattari write, “it is a question only of ourselves, here and now; but what is animal, vegetable, mineral, or human in us is now indistinct” (What 174). We already exist in zones of indetermination; particular events emphasize the sensual reality of such indiscernibility.

     

    The feelings that we once attributed to our selves are thus reattributed to the affective event of involvement and its sensation. The sociality of affect is precisely this relation among bodies. When President Bush opens his mouth to speak, he feeds into this relationality, augmenting the relations within which various bodies find themselves. His speech does not initiate a relation, in other words. As we have seen in the previous section, relationality among bodies precedes his worst blunder or finest moment. Bush’s words are compositional bodies of affect–whether joyful or sad. His words are potentialities. We do not merely listen when the Chief speaks, but we are de/composed and intensified at the peripheral threshold outside of proper corporeal limits. With every jerk, jolt, and flopped joke, we are affected by the doubled intensity of the Presidential event. We are sensually involved in the President’s intensity. Before we can like, love, or loathe Bush–before the space of critique is even opened to us–we encounter his potential for affect(ation).

     

    Thought-Impingement

     

    Bush’s “unspeakability” forces the question that we must inevitably revisit: Is Bush thoughtless? According to a 2003 poll cited in Britain’s Sunday Times, 37% of Brits responded that Bush is “stupid” (Bohan). Likewise, recall how the spokeswoman for Canadian Prime Minister Jean Chrétien felt about Bush: “What a moron” (McIlroy). As Salon‘s Kamiya wittily remarks: “Welcome to the wonderful world of George W. Bush’s brain, where it’s always Casual Friday!” Is Bush thoughtless? Perhaps. But as Gatens and Lloyd point out, it is important to remember that the Spinozist understanding of body is not in opposition to mind. Spinoza does not advocate a turn toward the body in an effort to move away from rationality or logic. Rather, for Spinoza, mind is constituted through the body’s relations and its awareness of those relations through the imagination. Indeed, imagination–a term that is important in Spinoza’s ontology–is the “coming together of mind and body in the most immediate way: mind is the idea of body” (12). Bodies are affected and modified by other bodies, and the mind or consciousness is an awareness of these very modifications. Mind and body are thus involved in various degrees of mutuality, and consciousness is an effect of alertness to bodies in relation. Gatens and Lloyd write, “in being aware of its body, the mind is aware not just of one material thing but of other bodies impinging on that body. . . . This experience of other bodies together with our own is the basis of imagination” (14). Consciousness is awareness of affect: the body in modifying relations with other bodies. “The affects are for Spinoza . . . transitions in bodily power and intensity,” they write. “The awareness of actual bodily modification–the awareness of things as present–is fundamental to the affects; and this is what makes the definition of the affects overlap with that of imagination” (52). The body-in-relation (the affective body) is thus a social body. Affect is a corporeal dimension of sociality.

     

    Spinoza thus suggests that we should be slow to make any pronouncements about the relationship between the mind’s (rational) mastery over the (irrational) body. Although we are often eager to give primacy to consciousness and cognition–thereby also reducing corporality to a secondary importance–Spinoza finds evidence that the noncognitive aspects of the body reflect a kind of thinking. “For nobody as yet knows the structure of the body so accurately as to explain all its functions,” writes Spinoza (106). Spinoza suggests that because the body acts beyond the full control of our cognitive knowledge, “mental decisions . . . [vary] therefore according to the varying disposition of the body” (107). Thinking is a dimension of the affective body insofar as thought registers an awareness of affect.

     

    As we have seen repeatedly, the affective body is a visceral body: the body enfolds sensation prior to all mediation of thought. “Visceral sensibility immediately registers excitations gathered by the five ‘exteroceptive’ senses even before they are fully processed by the brain” (Massumi, Parables 60). In a given situation, the body knows prior to our cognitive awareness. Massumi explains:

     

    As you cross a busy noonday street, your stomach turns somersaults before you consciously hear and identify the sound of screeching brakes that careens toward you. . . . The immediacy of visceral perception is so radical that it can be said without exaggeration to precede the exteroceptive sense perception. . . . [V]iscerality subtracts quality as such from excitation. It registers intensity. (Parables 60-61)

     

    In other words, the affective body acts within relations that are cognitively filtered out from our recognized awareness. Whereas we often only recognize the linear, qualified index of meanings, the body is aware of an event’s doubling. “Viscerality, though no less of the flesh, is a rupture in the stimulus-response paths, a leap in place into a space outside action-reaction circuits,” writes Massumi. “Viscerality is the perception of suspense” (61). Before we can cognitively, consciously register an indexical meaning along a semantic narrative, our body has already encountered the suspension and interruption of the event.

     

    This understanding of situation renders thought as a dimension of the affective body’s relationality. Here we are moving away from a classical epistemology that holds thinking as an effect of observation. Lingis points out that such classical epistemology distinguishes between “the de facto multiplicity of sense-data and their relationships” (Foreign 7). At the same time, he continues, we might follow Merleau-Ponty and take “the sensing to be active from the start. . . . [T]he receptivity for the sensuous element [is thus] a prehension, a prise, a ‘hold’” (7). To sense is already to have the body taken in, so to speak. “To perceive is not for a transcendental agency to extract itself from a drifting mass of sensations; it is to belong to the world one works oneself into,” Lingis continues (Foreign 15).3 The relations of bodies, the sensual experience of being-involved, and thought are therefore all inextricably linked in ways that bypass cognitively recognized dimensions. Instead, the body reflects its own ways of thinking in and through its involvement. Consider those movements that happen too quickly for you to decide, writes Lingis. Consider the slips of the tongue, fast glances, flips of the stomach, jerks of the head, and so on. Or consider a banal gesture, the event of waving to a friend, for example:

     

    The hand that rises to respond to a gesture hailing us in the crowd is not . . . made possible by a representation first formed of the identity of the one recognized. It is the hand that recognizes the friend who is there, not as a named form represented, but as a movement and a cordiality that solicits . . . not a cognitive and representational operation from us, but a greeting, an interaction. (Foreign 8)

     

    The body’s own affectiveness, in other words, is not an effect of cognitive or representational processes. Though we may be reluctant to grant such a status to the body–dumb and inscribed as it may seem–its everyday involvements give the lie to any notion of cognitive primacy. More importantly for cultural theory, the body-in-relation exposes its potentiality for corporeal thought: sensual thinking that exceeds cognitive capture.

     

    Thought itself is thus a force: it hits the body. Steven Shaviro describes this kind of thinking in terms of the cinematic image and the event of “reception.” When watching a film, writes Shaviro, “I have already been touched and altered by these sensations, even before I have had the chance to become conscious of them. The world I see through the movie camera is one that violently impinges upon me, one that I can no longer regard, unaffected, from a safe distance” (46). And beyond the cinematic image, our encounters with other bodies likewise impinge upon us before we have the chance to respond through the grid of the symbolic. In other words, the image grabs us, and not the other way around. “I am solicited and invested by what I see: perception becomes a kind of physical affliction,” writes Shaviro, “an intensification and disarticulation of bodily sensation, rather than a process either of naive (ideological and Imaginary) belief or of detached, attentive consideration” (52). Thought hits the body, haunting it as a force that is with/in us, though out of our grasp.

     

    Such a re/description of situation has an important impact on the way we come to think of particular scenes, especially political-social scenes. As Hawkins writes:

     

    What is valuable about this account of affect is the way it makes trouble for all those epistemologies that begin with a knowing subject ready to act on the world or be acted upon. For the body in affect is not a subjectivity to the world’s objectivity, it is a body in transition, a body in relation. . . . [T]o have a response is to be in a relation. (“Documentary”)

     

    Before we approach a situation cognitively, as subjects, we are already involved in relationality. “Our body thinks with pure feeling before it acts thinkingly,” Massumi argues (Parables 266). We see this primacy in the body’s responses to sudden jolts that are registered somehow before we can make sense of the situation–that is, before we can attach a narrative to the event. Thought itself thus becomes a kind of thinking-feeling that originates in the body. Looking to the work of Deleuze, Massumi explains: “a body does not choose to think, and . . . the supreme operation of thought does not consist in making a choice. . . . Thought strikes like lightening, with sheering ontogenetic force. It is felt” (Shock xxxi). An affective reading of Bush’s (rhetorical) body, therefore, must begin not with any ideological or cognitive effects (although a complete reading necessarily involves these lines), but in a space prior to cognition. It begins in relationality, with the body-in-relation. Something escapes Bush’s language. The excess erupts over his body, rippling across the surface of skin and muscle for us all to see. It is not (merely) that he is lacking coherency, but that he has an excess of qualities. There is too much in his performance to index, to qualify, to hook into coherent meaning. These excess qualities derail from the logical-semantic loops and strike us. They break into a situation and register themselves on the visceral body. Whether or not this involvement becomes a joyful or sad composition, of course, is not determined by such a reading. The visceral registering of excess is not necessarily a positive or negative phenomenon. Affect–and what we might properly call thought–is prior to emotional, ideological, or cognitive indexing.

     

    This means, for one thing, that Bush himself is not thoughtless. The nervous body, the pursed lips, the stuttering, the pauses, the shifting eyes–they all indicate a kind of bodily thinking. A body is struck by other bodies, resulting in its composition or decomposition. It is affected. Beyond what Bush himself may wish, the body leaks and exposes itself in its own intensities. Our visceral reactions also reflect a thinking-feeling that hits us prior to cognitive indexing. Before we can make sense, we sense. Before we react cognitively, we respond affectively. As Avital Ronell explains in her study on stupidity (especially appropriate here), the body’s thinking is not only not coterminous with cognition, but that body’s thinking takes place absolutely otherwise (otherways) than cognition and qualification:

     

    Ever elsewhere when it comes to cognitive scanners, the body evades the regimens of knowledge that would claim to grasp, sectionize, or conceptualize it. Somewhat surprisingly, the site of nonknowledge that the body traverses, and of which it is a part, is related . . . to thought, to acts or contracts of thinking, for the body thinks in a sense, beyond giving or making sense. . . . Thought, which Heidegger unhitched from philosophical operations, weighs in as body. (187)

     

    Ronell explains that the thinking-feeling body indicates a limit to cognitive knowledge. It also indicates the wealth and importance of “sense” that occurs prior to cognition and qualification. We see these two strands well illustrated by the failing, falling, flubbing body of George W. Bush. On the one hand, there is an absolute limit to Bush’s cognitive knowledge. He is, some fear, empty-headed. Yet if his head is empty, his body is stuffed to the breaking point. His is an excessive body-in-relation. The ingress of unqualified intensity hits like a jolt: a body affects and is affected by another body in a compositional overspill. When Bush begins to speak, we the viewers see the suspense–the affect–spill out across the screen. Yet it is not just Bush whose body falls apart. Like Bush, we are bodies in situation. Something slips between subjectivity, language, and scene. Perhaps this something can be called thought, insofar as thought is understood in its affective terms. Excessive intensity hits our body before we have the chance to contain it safely within a story. This excessive punch is what we might call the thought of affect.

     

    Toward a New Cultural Theory

     

    Given these three lines of the affective body–relational intensity, sensation of involvement, and though-impingement–and given primacy of the affective body, how can we give an account of Bush’s persuasiveness, especially in light of his incoherent, poorly performed, and un(der)prepared rhetoric? One could answer this question by looking to relations of power among individuals and the social, examining the ideological construction of relations. This is an important critique, yet an affective reading suggests a space prior to ideological and socially constructed relations of power. As Massumi explains:

     

    It is the event-dimension of potential–not the system of language and the operations of reflection it enables–that is the effective dimension of the interrelating of elements, of their belonging to each other. . . . Belonging is unmediated, and under way. . . . It is the openness of bodies to each other and to what they are not. (Parables 76; emphasis added)

     

    The ability of Bush to move others not in spite of his incoherency but because of it suggests an openness to something beyond semantic or ideological meanings. It suggests that we are open to being affected and affecting other bodies before we know it. Simpler still, we might describe the body of Bush as a gaping hole, a wound: he exposes his and our own exposure as bodies-in-relation. It’s not that nothing comes out when Bush opens his mouth; it’s that too much spills out. Before Bush himself has the opportunity to persuade, and before we can undertake any critical analysis of gridded ideological positionalities, something else comes first. As I have attempted to trace here, this something else is precisely the intensity that is generated outside (or alongside) dimensions of qualification or interpretation.

     

    Two things should stand out to us in an affective reading. First, our cultural-political analyses must begin to include affective dimensions if they are to have any kind of critical effect. That is, we must begin to read the event in its doubling, and not merely in its signifying dimensions. Secondly, we must begin to trace the body itself in its affective and relational characteristics. It is not enough to study the “inscriptions” and symbolic currency of the body. Even at the political scene of the executive body, we must begin to register the suspense of meanings and its effects on the spectator. The primary questions for critical analysis should begin with affect: ask not what the President is (or isn’t, in our case) but what his body is capable of doing. Such readings are a first gesture toward developing vocabularies of affect that can contribute to a revitalization of cultural theory. A viable cultural theory is one that reads both halves of the affective body’s event.

     

    Notes

     

    I would like to thank Diane Davis, Collin Brooke, Jeff Rice, and Thomas Rickert for their feedback on earlier drafts of this article.

     

    1. We should give a nod to those arguments (Miller’s among them) that warn against dismissing Bush as an idiot. As a strategy, this line of argument will not take us very far. And, of course, there are other reasons why we would not wish to adopt the argument that Bush is unqualified because he is somehow not “an intellectual.” At the same time, Bush’s image is clearly that of the dunce. While we can explore the various ramifications and effects of these different media constructions, I want to focus here on his body’s inability to perform smoothly. Whether Bush’s dullness is sincere or calculated, it is clearly his body that seems to come up short in front of the cameras. It is his failing body that I consider in this piece.

     

    2. Note that these keywords are only traces left behind by encounters with the affective body. They cannot form a “map” of affect as such. These keywords are impressions left over from the event’s intensive movement. The terms are traces, and not systematizations, of thought.

     

    3. As Lingis himself writes, this is a Heideggerian notion. We should hear clear echoes of Heidegger’s being-with in this talk of involvement.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Bohan, Caren. “Bush to keep distance from protests on London trip.” Forbes 16 Nov. 2003. Reuters. 6 Feb. 2004 <http://www.forbes.com/work/newswire/2003/11/16/rtr1149618.html>.
    • Deleuze, Gilles. Spinoza: Practical Philosophy. Trans. Robert Hurley. San Francisco: City Lights, 1988.
    • Deleuze, Gilles, and Felix Guattari. A Thousand Plateaus. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1987.
    • —. What is Philosophy? Trans. Hugh Tomlinson and Graham Burchell. New York: Columbia UP, 1994.
    • Gatens, Moira, and Genevieve Lloyd. Collective Imaginings. Spinoza, Past and Present. London: Routledge, 1999.
    • Gibbs, Anna. “Contagious Feelings: Pauline Hanson and the Epidemiology of Affect.” Australian Humanities Review Dec. 2001. 20 Feb. 2004 <http://www.lib.latrobe.edu.au/AHR/archive/Issue-December-2001/gibbs.html>.
    • Hawkins, Gay. “Documentary Affect: Filming Rubbish.” Australian Humanities Review Sept. 2002. 20 Feb. 2004 <http://www.lib.latrobe.edu.au/AHR/archive/Issue-September-2002/hawkins.html>.
    • Kamiya, Gary. “The Unspeakable Bush.” Salon 30 Mar. 2001. 10 Mar. 2004 <http://dir.salon.com/politics/feature/2001/03/30/bush/index.html>.
    • Klein, Joe. “The Campaign Trail.” The New Yorker 75.9. 13 Dec. 1999: 40-41.
    • Lingis, Alphonso. Dangerous Emotions. Berkeley: U of California P, 2000.
    • —. Foreign Bodies. London: Routledge, 1994.
    • Massumi, Brian. Parables For the Virtual: Movement, Affect, Sensation. Durham: Duke UP, 2002.
    • —, ed. A Shock to Thought: Expression after Deleuze and Guattari. New York: Routledge, 2002.
    • McIlroy, Anne. “Uneasy Neighbours.” Guardian Unlimited 2 Dec. 2002. 15 Mar. 2004 <http://www.guardian.co.uk/elsewhere/journalist/story/0,,852207,00.html>.
    • Miller, Mark Crispin. The Bush Dyslexicon: Observations on a National Disorder. New York: Norton, 2001.
    • Office of the Press Secretary. “President Bush Welcomes President Kwasniewski to White House.” 27 Jan. 2004. White House. 10 Mar. 2004 <http://www.whitehouse.gov/news/releases/2004/01/20040127-3.html>.
    • Ronell, Avital. Stupidity. Carbondale: Southern Illinois UP, 2003.
    • Shaviro, Steven. The Cinematic Body. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1993.
    • Spinoza, Baruch. The Ethics and Selected Letters. Trans. Samuel Shirley. Indianapolis: Hackett, 1982.
    • Young, Katherine, ed. Bodylore. Knoxville: UP of Tennessee, 1994.

     

  • The Sense of Space: On the Specificity of Affect in Deleuze and Guattari

    Claire Colebrook

    Department of English Literature
    University of Edinburgh
    Claire.Colebrook@ed.ac.uk

     

    The relation between mathematics and man may thus be conceived in a new way: the question is not that of quantifying or measuring human properties, but rather, on the one hand, that of problematizing human events, and, on the other, that of developing as various human events the conditions of a problem.

     

    –Gilles Deleuze, The Logic of Sense 55.

     
    As early as 1969, in The Logic of Sense, Deleuze was already taking the possibility of structuralism, as a distribution of singularities, beyond the death of man to the specifically human event. Whereas the mathematical had already been targeted by Heidegger in What is a Thing? as that which determined Being in advance as the measuring of beings, Deleuze suggests another realization of mathematical potential. Not only can the human be situated in a field of singularities; one can also extend a singularity as human. That is, one can think or develop a singular potential or event in life to the point where human thought extends itself beyond any already constituted image of “man.” In this paper I want to argue for the ways in which Deleuze’s project extends, and describes, two dimensions: on the one hand, Deleuze describes a space that unfolds from points effected through differentiation and is thus critical of any simple structuralism that would reduce a field to a single (or differentiated) space (Difference 206). On the other hand, Deleuze argues that once spaces have been actualized (say, in a closed system), this then allows for a thought–or extension of human potential–to spatiality in general. Indeed it is sense, a potential of language or the proposition, which opens a surface or plane that is fully neutral (Logic 31). Thus one may move from this or that constituted sense or term within a structure, to sense as such, a surface that is liberated from any denoted being. For Deleuze, then, the human or the potential of the brain is always more than a constituted image within sense; it is also that image that allows us to think the potential of imaging as such (Negotiations 42). I will argue that we need to add a deterritorialized humanity to Deleuze’s criticisms of man. Just as Foucault’s genealogy of man was accompanied by an affirmation of the self as that which can turn back upon itself, problematize itself, and thereby open new ways of thought, so Deleuze will affirm Foucault’s “superman” who no longer turns back upon himself but opens out to forces that will “free life” from “within himself” (Foucault 132).

     

    The possibility that the “man,” whose being seems so self-evident and whose nature provides the object of modern knowledge and the human sciences, will one day be erased as a figure in thought is precisely what Foucault’s genealogy of the human sciences in The Order of Things sets out to entertain. Will we be able to imagine a power or thought that no longer emanates from a grounding life, that no longer signifies a receding sense whose order we can neither fully read nor definitively flee? For Foucault, such a possibility is tied to a re-imagining of space. Rather than a presumed surface across which the terms of our knowledge are inscribed, we might examine the ways in which various desires to know are produced by (and produce) a prior plane, table or “a priori” within which we think. Indeed, as Deleuze notes in his work on Foucault, to think requires moving beyond formations of knowledge and dispersed visibilities to the “non-place” from which “what we see” and “what we say” emerge (Foucault 38). This “outside” is not spatially separated from the world we inhabit; rather, the “outside” is nothing more than the relations of forces through which we live, see, and say (Foucault 84). There is space, the experience of space, only because of a non-spatial “outside” that is nothing more than a play of forces (Foucault 86).

     

    In quite different ways from Foucault, Derrida also imagines an “end of man” but simultaneously recognizes that such an end or “outside” is internal to the space of Western knowledge: man is that being who, while existing spatially within this world, is also always the point from which spatiality is seen to emerge. For Derrida, the idea of the end of man, or the dream of overcoming or existing elsewhere than within the human, is thoroughly internal to a Western metaphysic that has folded itself in such a way as to incorporate any remainder. Western metaphysics is not an opinion or image of man so much as a striving to grasp the genesis of all imagery, and in this sense presupposes an ideal space in which a subject who is never merely human grasps the essence of a finite humanity. As Derrida notes in his early work on Husserl, the very idea of a truth above and beyond any specific culture or epoch–the idea of moving beyond “man” in his finite, located and concrete sense–posits a potential and “architectonic” humanity, a self-constituting and self-disclosing horizon within which and from which any specific world or space can be lived.1 The end of any “end of man” or the overcoming of any teleology, for Derrida, requires thinking the possibility of a differential movement that is neither spatial nor temporal, neither inside nor outside.

     

    It would seem possible to add one more figure to these critical reflections on man: the Deleuze for whom inhuman durations are the future of thought, and who imagines (with Guattari) a thousand plateaus and multiple regimes of signs, the majority of which are beyond the range of human life. In this paper I want to look at the way Deleuze, with Guattari, criticizes the image of man and its concomitant subordination of space to extension; I will also, on the other hand, argue that Deleuze regards the human, but not man, as bearing a potential to imagine space intensively. Here, Deleuze draws on the non-dialectical intuitionism of Bergson. In Creative Evolution, Bergson argues that life bears two tendencies. In order to act or further itself, life spatializes itself. That is, in order to act on the world, we need to grasp it as remaining the same through time, as extended rather than in a continual state of creation and energetic exertion (or intensity). All life moves forward and acts in order to maximize itself but it must also, in a countermovement and in order to save energy, form habits or regularities that remain the same. For Bergson, a problem emerges when the human mind, so determined to master its opposing world, reduces itself to a spatial and extended thing within the world, rather than a creative and temporally dynamic force. So, the idea of “man” as an object of nature may have enabled all sorts of progressive benefits for science and function, but as long as man is a thing within space he will never fully realize his capacity to become. Only when humanity recognizes itself as creative of space will it overcome the image it has formed of itself as “man.” To put it schematically, we might say that while Foucault resists positing a life or unity from which spaces emerge, and while Derrida insists on a radical disparity that the thought of space and time can only reduce, Deleuze retains some of Bergson’s sense of the positive intuition of the inhuman. We can, and should, move beyond constituted space and systems to the thought of spatiality as such; this will not only yield duration–or the times through which various spaces are realized–but will also intensify space.2 Space will differ within itself according to the lives that occupy it. Whereas Bergson sees humanity as fulfilling itself in its capacity to intuit durations or pulsations of life other than its own (Creative Evolution 271), Deleuze and Guattari grant this role to philosophy. While A Thousand Plateaus insists that each plane of life–from linguistics and genetics to art and science–stratifies and gives form to difference (271), What is Philosophy? also insists that thinking about the potentials of art, science and philosophy will take us from constituted images of man and thought to the virtual plane, the abstract machine, or difference itself.

     

    In this paper I therefore wish to move beyond a possible perceived dualism in the work of Deleuze and Guattari by drawing attention to the specific mode of their dualism, a dualism that is on its way to a monism and that therefore overcomes the rigidity of man, not through dispersal, but through the affirmation of thinking. The way to move beyond “man” to thought is twofold: first, to see “man” not as an error or illusion but as a formation that has enabled the mastery and extension of space; second, to see this production of man positively, as one of the ways in which life stratifies itself. And once this is done one might move beyond the particular image of man to the power of imaging as such. That is, one moves beyond this or that affect, this or that event of force or relations, to the thought of relationality, the plane of immanence.

     

    There is a perception we could have in reading Deleuze and Guattari that the molecular is good, while the molar is bad, that affect is liberating and mobilizing while meaning or conceptuality is rigidifying. Such a moralizing reading would be enabled by placing Deleuze and Guattari in the tradition of post-1968 difference thinkers who resist the lure of identity and who, supposedly, grant an essential radicalism to the non-semantic per se. On such an understanding, conceptuality, ideality, and form are ways of retarding and normalizing the flow and force of life, while the random, singular, or unthought release life into its open and infinite potentiality. The relation between time and space would, accordingly, also be historicized and politicized. Philosophy has privileged a uniform space of points, a space that may be measured or striated precisely because any point in space is equivalent to and interchangeable with any other. These points are achieved either by the division or uniform matter, or by the location of bodies across the plane of matter. Time is then regarded as the measure of movement or points within this uniform field. Western metaphysics has always privileged a fixed world of forms, a spatial unity and a pre-given order over the processes and events that produce that order. When we read Deleuze and Guattari’s seeming celebration of smooth over striated space (A Thousand Plateaus 353), of multiple plateaus rather than a line of history (393), of artisans rather than architects (402), and of nomadology rather than sedentary phenomenology (380), this would seem to suggest that we move from a dualism that privileges a founding term–spatial coordinates, measuring time, order–to an affirmation of the singularities from which all dualisms and orders emerge. Like Derridean deconstruction, we would recognize any moral or binary opposition as effected from a differential field not governed by any dominant term. In terms of space this would seem to suggest that space, far from being a field within which points are mapped, is better conceived as a plane of singular affects and events that is, in Western thought, reactively coded as one general territory.

     

    What I want to stress here, however, is that the emphasis in post-Deleuzean theory on affect, singularities and nomadology misses the affirmative understanding of sense, mind and philosophy that sits alongside Deleuze’s critical project. Throughout his work Deleuze is at pains to point out that he is not advocating a “return” to primitivism, and this has been accepted well enough. However, the celebration of the minor term in Deleuze and Guattari’s non-dualist binaries does seem to suggest a preference for the affective, singular, haptic and embodied over sense, conceptuality and ideality. What I would suggest, though, is that there is another problem in the post-1968 affirmation of difference: the problem or positive possibility of the whole, the power of a singular thought to imagine space in general. Certainly, poststructuralism concerned itself with the disruptive question of genesis: how is any field, system of differences, or plane of knowable terms generated, and how does one term explain, and thereby occlude, the genesis of any structure? But there is also an affirmation of the structural possibility of this genesis: how does any field or set of relations produce a point or image of that which exceeds the set? According to Derrida, such a question–the question of the origin–has never been asked in a truly radical manner. For Foucault, history is just the various forms such a question takes: how do we understand or determine what counts as the field of knowledge and its relations? How is the a priori unfolded historically? For Deleuze and Guattari, it is time to approach the problem of genesis and structure differently (A Thousand Plateaus 242): a structure is a set of external relations, the way in which life is viewed or generated from some point. A structure is one side of a stratification; the other side is that which is structured, but this determinable content is not undifferentiated or formless. And so for Deleuze and Guattari we need to move beyond structures on one side and structured on the other to the abstract machine from which both are unfolded. This would mean taking account of the process of differentiation–the dynamic unfolding of difference–that subtends differentiation, or the actual and realized distinctions between terms (Difference and Repetition 206-07). It should be possible to think immanent tendencies, the way in which different expressions of life unfold different spaces, relations, fields, or trajectories, “the immanent power of corporeality in all matter” (A Thousand Plateaus 411).

     

    Genesis and Structure

     

    Structuralism presented itself as a break with the Western epoch of metaphysics that had grounded beings and identities upon some prior plane from which they emerge; differences were no longer differences within space. Rather than accepting that differences were grounded on a prior order and distributed across a field, structuralism described the emergence of any field from the differentiation of points or terms. The idea of difference without positive terms allows us to imagine a differentiating field that produces points only in relation to each other, denying them any intrinsic orientation. Space would, then, be the effect of a synthesis of points, not a container or ground. Space is the effect of relations. This would apply both to space in a metaphorical sense, such as the space or field of a grammar or social structure, and literal space. Geometry is not a pre-given and ideal order of a space that bears its own laws; rather, our space is constituted through the sense we make of it, the mapping of our field of orientation. Structure therefore privileges external relations or movements over points. There is nothing in any point or being itself (no intrinsic relation) that would determine how it behaves or constitutes itself in relation to other points. However, as long as structure is seen in terms of a differentiating system of pure relations it fails to account for the genesis or internal difference of those relations.

     

    While Deleuze also insists on the externality of relations–that nothing fully determines how any potential will be actualized–he refuses to reduce relations to a single structure. Rather, life is a plane of potentialities or tendencies that may be actualized in certain relations but that could also produce other relations, other worlds. We can make this concrete by way of a very crude example. The power to be perceived as located in geometrical space–to be actualized in a system of relations between points–is certainly one way in which a body or matter might be actualized. So, a line that makes up a grid on a plan or diagram is a line by virtue of this realized set of relations. But such a line might also be drawn on a canvas, overlaid with other lines or set aside blocks of color, no longer being a line but becoming other than itself–a shading or border. This means that there is a potential for sense (within, say, linearity) that cannot be exhausted by any single relation. In contrast with the idea that space or the world is constructed from sense–socially or culturally constituted–spatiality opens sense, for any location bears the potential to open up new planes, new orientations. Rather than seeing space as effected from sense, as realized from a system of orientation or intending, Deleuze sees spatiality as an opening of sense, as the potential to create new problems.

     

    Deleuze is critical of the subject of philosophy for whom space is a form imposed on the world, but he is also resistant to reducing space to actually constituted spatial planes. What needs to be thought is not this or that plane, nor this or that realized system of relations, but the potential to produce planes, the “planomenon” and our capacity to think or encounter that potential.

     

    To a certain extent this problem is also captured in Derrida’s problem of thinking that which occurs “before” oppositions between genesis and structure, between active and passive, between time and space, or between the point and the line. Terry Eagleton recently “corrected” what he took to be a widespread misreading of Derrida’s “there is nothing outside the text.” What this really means, Eagleton explained, is not that everything is language or discourse but that nothing can be conceived without relation to something else. But it is just this “without relation” that is the most crucial dimension of Derrida’s thought. A space or a sequence of time relates one point to another, carries over or traces in the absolutely singular an anticipation of that which will remain the same. What needs to be thought are not sets of relations but the tearing of the singular from itself, the way in which any point to be established as a point must already be transgressed, traced, marked or divided from itself by the anticipation of some continuing identity. “Before” there can be a hierarchical relation or difference between terms there must be the establishment of some point of stability, some marking or tracing of that from which relations might then be thought. Relations in their external or structural form–relations among terms, such as a spatial field–depend upon a non-relation. The point, the singular, the unique or the purely present which we imagine as the original substance before differences and relations, must already have departed from itself without relation, retrieval, or re-presentation (Derrida, EH 151). To establish a present, as present, as bearing an identity or mark that can then be thought or related to some other point or present, the present must already “announce” the infinite, go beyond itself, not be itself.

     

    Derrida is at once critical of Western thought’s tendency to regard the singular as inevitably fulfilled or made fully present only in the thought of some representable whole. There is an “architectonic” impulse in metaphysics, regarding as properly present only that which can be re-thought, brought to consciousness and rendered universal and transparent to thought in general (EH 99). What cannot be thought is the non-relational, those tremors, potentials or movements that fail to be actualized. Accordingly, when Derrida affirms textuality, he is not arguing for the construction of a language or system that would “mediate” reality; nor is he arguing for the fact that everything is already bound up in some set of relations. On the contrary, Derrida attends to the singularity of space, the ways in which texts produce specific relations or points from which some plane or field is then effected, such that the ground is effected by the traversal or spacing of the gramme. Inscription is not the inscription of a surface, nor the synthesis of self-sufficient points; it is the production of surface and point from each other, from “différance which is neither punctual (unique, self-present and self-identical) nor continuous (a synthesised and unified whole awaiting division)” [Dissemination 206].

     

    Like Deleuze and Foucault, then, Derrida is critical of a subjectivism that would ground structures or spaces in some outside producing term. Where Derrida differs markedly from Deleuze and Guattari’s “geology” is in his insistence on necessity. Metaphysics, or the inability to think difference itself is necessary; insofar as we think and speak we have always already located ourselves within a structure. One can only think the outside critically. In this regard Derrida shares with Foucault an ability to think of language freeing itself from its closed system alongside a refusal to consider life‘s power to deterritorialize itself (Deleuze, Foucault 131). In structuralism the removal of any ground liberates difference but fails to think or confront the emergence of difference and the distinct ways in which different epochs (Foucault, Order 326) or different texts (as in Derrida’s Dissemination) produce a plane or space upon which difference and structure are thought. In the case of both structuralism and its preceding epochs, what fails to be considered is epochality as such: how a field, plane, surface, or ground of thought is generated. Whereas pre-structuralist thought takes difference to be the mapping and relating of distinct terms–terms that dictate a certain order of relations–structuralism posits an external system from which relations are determined.

     

    This is Foucault’s great argument in The Order of Things. Whereas order had always been seen as dependent on some prior ground, either the divine sense of the cosmos or the specific logic of natural organisms, languages or political economies, modern thought discovers one distinct ground–life–from which all structures and relations flow (Order 317). All genesis and becoming have been referred back to a space, plane, ground, or unity. An equivocity is thereby established such that the differences among beings may be accounted for on the basis of some other being (327). Life unfolds itself by producing various structures, all of which point back to an origin that bears an entirely other sense (278). Languages have a logic not present to speakers, labor is effected by laws and relations outside its intentions, and various organisms are determined by forces, such as evolution, which are radically distinct from the desires of this or that body. “Life” is just that generating ground from which all specific structures emerge. There is now a single metaphorical plane explaining all modes of difference, and this is mapped by a literal space of normalization. For Foucault, the modern study of life precludes the thought of distinct and incommensurable territories. There is one space, the space of life, unfolding itself though the same global logic (318). Working against this assumption of a life from which various structures emerge, and critical of the projects of structuralism and phenomenology, which wish to explain space as effected from the orientation of life and consciousness, Foucault turned to spatial events. If one could think space as an event, as unfolded from specific relations (relations that also produce the terms that relate), then one would look to how distributions of space (in the literal sense) produce a plane or table (in the non-literal sense). Prisons and hospitals allowed for the study of humanity–producing a point of knowledge and a soul to be studied–and thereby constitute a space of man (man as the animal that allows space to be measured, synthesized, mapped or constituted). All bodies as manifestations of this one life are subject to the same laws. One can thereby see all specific political territories and norms as reducible to transcendental and translatable criteria.

     

    Derrida has also, but with quite different approaches and exits, challenged the unity of the transcendental field by insisting that every text, both literally and figuratively, not only generates a set of relations but also requires or generates a point (a supplementary, excessive or exorbitant term) from which such relations are understood to flow. For Derrida, deconstruction is not itself a method so much as an inhabitation and solicitation of all those texts that present their structures, differences, borders or relations, while repressing that which generates structure. There will always be, within any field or space, a closed set of terms and an unthinkable supplementary term that borders or closes the set. If we imagine how this might provoke the practice of spatial arts, such as architecture, then we can follow Mark Wigley by suggesting that any experienced or actual space must repress, forget or disavow that spatializing tracing which marks out the border between inside and outside, which generates the field but cannot be located within the field (191). More concretely one could strive, as Bernard Tschumi has done, to bring this thought of quasi-transcendental difference into practice. Le Parc de la Villette aims to decenter space by producing a distribution of points without hierarchy. According to Tschumi, the various points that create the grid system of the park preclude the thought of a center or realized intention. Without hierarchy or center the various points will then enter into a series of multiple relations, such that the character of the space produced is not determined or organized beforehand. Further, by overlaying other distributions such as a series of surfaces and then a series of lines, no system of distributions is elevated above any other; unity is avoided. The points therefore work against a dominating ratio that would present space as an expression of design–certainly not the expression of a subject. If the points were in some ways pure form or pure difference, this would be a set of relations without positive terms, without overarching form, allowing other systems of relations–including actions and the participation of other designers–to produce new relations. Most significantly, Tschumi insists that the “project aims to unsettle both memory and context,” and is therefore exemplary of a resistance to the idealization of space, the use or experience of space in terms of an ideal sense that would precede its punctual event:

     

    Not a plenitude, but instead "empty" form; les cases sont vide La Villette, then aims at an architecture that means nothing, an architecture of the signifier rather than the signified--one that is pure trace or the play of language ... a dispersed and differentiated reality that marks an end to the utopia of unity (Tschumi viii).

     

    In contrast to this pure distribution and relation of points–“differentiated reality”– Deleuze puts forward the idea of external relations that cannot be confused with the singular powers from which those relations are effected. Relations are not the effect of a process of differentiation or distribution. Rather, the power to differ expresses itself differently in each of its produced relations, with each effected point or term bearing a power to exceed itself, and to establish a new relation that would then create a new space. Put more concretely, we might imagine a certain power to differ–light–producing a spectrum of colors, such that these differences are effects of this intensity of difference; but we then might imagine colors entering into relation with the eye, thereby producing a visibility that can create new terms and new relations. Any space or plane, then, is the unfolding of matter, with relations being effected by specific expressions, which are events of specific powers to relate:

     

    There is an extraordinarily fine topology that relies not on points or objects but rather on haecceities, on sets of relations (winds, undulations of snow or sand, the song of the sand or the creaking of the ice, the tactile qualities of both). It is a tactile space, or rather "haptic," a sonorous much more than a visual space. The variability, the polyvocality of directions, is an essential feature of smooth spaces of the rhizome type, and it alters their cartography. (A Thousand Plateaus 382)

     

    This is what Deleuze draws from Spinoza: if life is desire or striving, and has no static being outside this striving, then encounters or relations need to be referred back to desires or intrinsic powers to differ.3 There are not points or positive terms that are differentiated or distributed in a uniform space; nor is there spatiality or punctualization as such which can only be thought after the event. Rather, each relation is expressive of a power that bears a potential to enter into further relations. A field is not a distribution of points so much as the striving of powers to become, and each power becomes as this or that quality. Qualities depend upon, but do not exhaust, the potentials actualized in each encounter.

     

    Even so, while this yields an affirmation of the affective or material over the formal, the production of space rather than its orienting sense, there is also an affirmation in Deleuze’s work of the thought, philosophy, and sense of affect. Indeed, Deleuze’s historical work with Guattari offers a genealogy of globalism: how certain affects such as the white face, viewing, subjective eyes, and laboring and subjected body constitute the “man” of modernity and single territory of capitalism. There is nothing radical per se about affect, but the thought of affect–the power of philosophy or true thinking to pass beyond affects and images to the thought of differential imaging, the thought of life in its power to differ–is desire, and is always and necessarily radical.4 The power of art not just to present this or that affect, but to bring us to an experience of any affect whatever or “affectuality”–or that there is affect–is ethical: not a judgment upon life so much as an affirmation of life.

     

    Space in General

     

    In this section I want to look back at Derrida’s and Foucault’s original encounters with the peculiarly modern understanding of space to which they both respond in order to make two points, the first critical, the second constructive. Both Derrida and Foucault are concerned with the emergence of a transcendental understanding of space as an historical event, but mobilizations of their work have tended to reinforce the very transcendentalism they problematize. Furthermore, while Deleuze’s work has often been read as amenable to the already undertaken mobilization of Derrida’s and Foucault’s criticisms of transcendental space, Deleuze’s expressionism actually demands and affirms an understanding of space that is entirely at odds with the dissolution of qualitative space that is seen to be postmodern. Deleuze’s concepts of the molecular, affect, haecceity, and multiplicity, far from striving to think a spatiality that lies outside the field it determines, allow the thought of a self-distributing plane, a space that unfolds itself, and that does not require and expel a supplementary absent and spatializing force. Deleuze’s difference is not radically anterior and unthinkable; it is the immanent pulsation of life that expresses itself infinitely and that can be affirmed in the thought of life.

     

    The idea of space as the effect of a radically absent force of spatialization that lies outside the field it spaces–even while this outside can only be thought as outside once terms are spatialized–is itself a peculiar event, affect and multiplicity. Why is it that today we see ourselves as subjected to the signifier, as inhabiting a law or system of relations imposed by an Other who does not exist? There is, if you like, a space of white Oedipal man, a space that has expressed itself in a pure geometry, a geometry oriented by the sense of a space that would be the law for any body whatever, a space that is nothing more than a capacity for axiomatic repetition. In response to this space of man and pure geometry, Deleuze suggests that far from returning to a primitive geometry, and far from adding one more dimension to the plane that might allow us to think space in general, we ought to multiply the dimensions of space in order to maximize its power. From that critical endeavor we can then go on to ask, as Deleuze and Guattari will do, what a plane is such that it can think its own folds and dimensions. Philosophy creates the plane of thought which, in its Deleuzean form, strives to think the emergence of all planes, and this is why A Thousand Plateaus can describe life through planes of science, geometry, geology, literature, politics, metallurgy, history, and linguistics: all the ways in which life folds upon itself in order to imagine and give form to itself, all the different matters of form, all the ways in which matter manners or articulates itself.5

     

    The Space of Man

     

    Edmund Husserl’s “Origin of Geometry” was both a response to the reduction of truth and space to the human sciences and the occasion for two of the most profound meditations on space of the last century: Derrida’s Edmund Husserl’s Origin of Geometry: An Introduction and Foucault’s The Order of Things. Both of these works were, ostensibly, critiques of the very project of a science of man. Both Derrida and Foucault pointed out that any explanation of spatiality and temporality from the finite point of view of the human animal would also be a repression of that dispersion or spatiality that allows man to be. Man can see himself only as the point of view from which space and time emerge if this space and time are, to use Foucault’s terms, a Same which divides itself in order to produce man in its fold (Order 330). In the modern complex of man as an empirical-transcendental being, man’s various fields of activity and knowledge are regarded as epiphenomena of a single life, a ground from which difference unfolds (Order 279). For Foucault, Husserl’s phenomenology, despite its critique of the human sciences, is an expression of this modern logic of man: transcendental consciousness is just that which both differentiates itself in various structures but can also turn back and comprehend itself by recognizing this space of life. For Derrida, Husserl’s phenomenology expresses the tendency of metaphysics per se, a metaphysics that has always privileged the telos of a single and architectonic logic of space (EH 99). Geometry in its pure form, particularly when it recognizes itself as the capacity to produce space as an ideal form, discloses a consciousness that can imagine itself as constituting a general horizon of humanity, a logic that is infinitely repeatable and forever capable of retrieving the sense of its origin.

     

    For Derrida, Husserl’s rigorous thought of the origin of geometry was typical of, and a fulfillment of, Western philosophy as such. On the one hand, one cannot reduce formal truths, such as the truths of geometry, to this or that particular culture, epoch, or individual psyche. What Euclid perceives is not just this space here with its finite properties but a future potentiality of all space for any subject whatever. Formal truth perceives in the here and now what may be repeated, or what marks this present with a possibility that pertains to any point in time or space whatever. Geometry is therefore the movement of sense and history, perceiving in this space what may be actualized and repeated in the future (EH 135). This formalization therefore seems to presuppose or require the idea of humanity in general, a space of man that may always be represented. The truths of geometry are not handed down as meaningless or arbitrary systems; they have sense only if their purposive orientation or lived meaning can be lived again, renewed and repeated with further sense. On the other hand, while insisting that formal truth cannot just be reduced to a human event within history, and that truths of space transcend this or that particular psyche, Husserl also acknowledges that without some inscription or synthesis by some consciousness, such truths would never have been constituted or brought to presence (EH 78). Without the synthesizing process of consciousness that can mark in this here and now a possibility that may be reactivated through time, and that may be sustained by an imagined humanity to come, space and truth would remain as unactivated potential, never brought to life, never capable of truly being (EH 153).6

     

    Derrida makes two critical points with regard to this Husserlian project. The first has to do with Husserl’s claim for consciousness in general. When the geometer perceives the truths of space he experiences the world no longer as this finite and concrete here and now. Although he must inhabit some actual present, he experiences this present as if it were already carried into the future, beyond his own life. This point, this here and now, is anticipated as operating under the same logic for all those others who will follow. The constitution of formal truth and space relies on an Idea of humanity, a community of sense, who will both retain the repetition of geometry in its formal language and be capable of reanimating those original formalizations (EH 80). One does not just repeat the truths of geometry as so much received text; it must always be possible to perceive the truth of their genesis, and to re-live from this present, the sense of the living present of Euclid or their original founder. On the one hand the origin in ancient Greece must be accidental and inessential, for Euclid transcribes a truth that pertains to any space and time whatever. On the other hand, one also has to acknowledge the absolute singularity of that founding space: that the ancient Greek moment was that point in time and space which gave birth to the idea of time and space in general, and therefore the history of the West.

     

    Derrida’s second point moves from the problem of the constitution of truth in general from some particular moment to the essential imbrication of space and humanity with this moment of genesis. It is true that philosophy and Husserl’s argument depend avowedly on time, and a time that can always reanimate the true sense of the past (EH 90). That which cannot be repeated, recognized and represented, that which does not pertain to space or time in general, has less being and presence than the truth whose sense prescribes the dignity and power of consciousness. Truth is only truth with this ideal temporal dimension; to make a claim to formal truth is to produce what could be repeated by any consciousness whatever.

     

    Derrida also draws attention, as Foucault will do, to the profound spatiality of Husserl’s argument. Before Husserl can explicitly establish this ideal temporality of tradition, this community of scientists or geometers who will be and must be capable of reactivating the original experience, he must presuppose a common space of humanity, a single plane of man that is capable of living its concrete and particular present from the point of view of any space whatever:

     

    Geometry, in effect, is the science of what is absolutely objective--i.e., spatiality--in the objects that the Earth, our common place, can indefinitely furnish as our common ground with other men. . . . The transcendental Earth is not an object and can never become one. And the possibility of a geometry strictly complements the impossibility of what could be called a "geo-logy," the objective science of the Earth itself (EH 83).

     

    All consciousness must in potential be transcendental consciousness, a consciousness with the power and will to perceive its world not as this or that particular here but as one ideal community of sense.

     

    The very project of transcendental reactivation and comprehension, the project of returning to the opening of the Idea of the unity of the world in general, rests upon an idea of the western epoch. For it is only in the self-representation of Western science that there is an idea of truth freed from any particular region. Husserl takes all experience of specific beings “back” to the very sense of a “world” or unified horizon, which is there for me, for others, has been there for the past and will be there for the future. Infinity is “announced” in the experience, any experience, of space; but only the reflection on pure geometry and its history brings this passage to infinity to presence. The history of geometry discloses the condition for experience as such; in order to affirm that what I perceive now is true and present I already rely upon the idea of what could be repeated and affirmed by consciousness in general. Husserl’s phenomenology merely brings this implicit metaphysics and unified spirit of humanity to recognition. Even the non-comprehension or untranslatability of other cultures requires the recognition of them as cultures and therefore as within the same “life-world.” Husserl’s inclusion of time, being, and sense within the general horizon of concrete conscious life is, according to Derrida, the ethic of a necessarily transcendental tradition of philosophy. It is only with the notion of life in general, freed from any determined image of man, that there can be a) the ideality of mathematics and geometry and b) the transcendental phenomenology that accounts for how such ideal objects are constituted. For Derrida, though, this transcendental horizon of absolute consciousness as the history of all sense, or the transcendental history, which thinks of a truth in general, must always bear the traces of a determined, empirical, factual, or singular space. For Derrida, it is the assumption of an architectonic space, a space that can be formalized, a space whose sense is already oriented toward man as a logical and self-recognizing being that decides, in advance, the being of space.

     

    Against the idea that Husserl completes the project of the West and that all philosophy takes the form of this ideal comprehension of space within humanity in general, Foucault historicizes and politicizes Husserl’s project (Order 325). For Foucault the profound spatiality of the Husserlian gesture can be delimited, for its experience of man is not only modern but also marks a radical break with a history of thought that could think of differences experienced by (but not reducible to) the human knower, that could think of the surface of knowledge that time traversed, without seeing difference and space as the unfolding of the Same (279). Further, Foucault sees the modern point at which space is explained transcendentally as tied to a peculiar mode of the political. What I want to bring out here are three provocative implications of Foucault’s history of transcendental space.

     

    First is an idea we can borrow from Deleuze and which will allow us to move from Foucault to Deleuze; this is the opposition between univocity and equivocity.

     

    Second is the idea of a specifically political reorientation with the folding of space into time.

     

    Third is the relation between the affective genesis of space, or what Deleuze follows Husserl in calling “vague essences” (A Thousand Plateaus 367), and space’s formal neutralization and temporalization.

     

    Univocity and Equivocity

     

    Both Foucault’s The Order of Things and Deleuze and Guattari’s Anti-Oedipus historicize the emergence of man, pointing out that man is not just one being in the world among others, even if the human knower has always been somehow privileged. Man is defined through what Deleuze will refer to as an equivocal ontology, or what Foucault will describe as an “ontology without metaphysics” (Order 340). That is, there is no longer a world of inherent or intrinsic differences which human knowledge may either come to know and map (as in the classical era) or which can be recognized and reflected in the self’s relation to a cosmos. For Foucault, prior to modernity, space is the surface upon which knowledge and difference are placed, and time allows those dispersed spaces–not to be constituted and synthesized–but to be recognized. In modernity, however, this world of dispersed differences is now torn apart by a point of opacity and radical difference. Being does not bear its own truth or metaphysics; there is a point outside being–life–that is other than the world but which gives the world its truth, order, or differentiation (Order 265). Difference and unfolding are located within man. To go back to Husserl’s argument for transcendental consciousness: we can no longer naively use the truths of geometry as though they simply represented the truth of space. We have to recognize the temporal constitution of these truths by consciousness. Consciousness is just a capacity for spatialization through time that can be recognized as having no proper space, and that must at once be located in a specific culture and epoch, but also differentiated in its potential from any concrete locale. Here, the difference, space, and surface of the world are unfolded from one point within the world–life–a point that can never have its space within the horizon it unfolds:

     

    It is always against a background of the already begun that man is able to reflect on what may serve for him as origin. For man, then, origin is by no means the beginning--a sort of dawn of history from which his ulterior acquisitions would have accumulated. Origin, for man, is much more the way in which man in general, any man, articulates himself upon the already-begun of labour, life and language; it must be sought for in that fold where man in all simplicity applies his labour to a world that has been worked for thousands of years, lives in the freshness of his unique, recent and precarious existence a life that has its roots in the first organic formations, and composes into sentences which have never before been spoken (even though generation after generation has repeated them) words that are older than all memory. ... Far from leading back, or even merely pointing, towards a peak--whether real or virtual--of identity, far from indicating the moment of the Same at which the dispersion of the Other has not yet come into play, the original in man is that which articulates him from the outset upon something other than himself (Order 330-31).

     

    It is in equivocal ontologies, according to Deleuze, that man as a signifying animal is the point from which system, difference, and structure are given. Man everywhere is subjected to the same formal structure of differences, law, exchange, and signification–with the world and real being nothing more than the plane upon which system takes hold. In modernity, one moves from expression to signification: from a world where differences are real and distinct and give birth to signs, to a world where each event has its ground and origin in one organizing system. From real and distinct differences one moves to formal difference, and to an idea of humanity that is nothing more than a formal function. Man is not a being within the world so much as a capacity to signify, exchange, and communicate.

     

    It is not surprising that Deleuze, like Foucault, makes much of the pre-Kantian experience of multiple folds and spaces. In his book on Leibniz and the fold Deleuze draws attention to the ways in which the baroque played upon the intrinsic differences of possible perceptions. Each point in the world is a monad, a perception that unfolds the world from itself without the requirement of a shared and anticipated space that is synthesized into the future. To say that “monads have no windows” is to say that a world is perceived and unfolded without the assumption or presupposition of perception in general. One has not yet troubled oneself or given man the responsibility for the genesis of space from his own time; one has not yet seen each perceiver as the effect or sign of a perception in general. Perception is not the condition, genesis, or origin of the spatial and temporal world; there are spatialities and temporalities of each monad. At one end, God is the full and clear perception of all space; at the other, are the singular perceptions of infinity, each monad’s perceptual grasp of the infinite that transcends it. By contrast, modern “man” stands, not for one perceiver among others, but for a purely formal power to perceive that also bears the imperative to perceive as any subject whatever. The deterritorialization that frees the perception of space from its own locale is reterritorialized onto consciousness in general, the subject for whom space is everywhere subject to the same formal and geometric logic. Man speaks as one who is already subjected to a system that gives him being, and who must in essence already be tied to any other possible speaker:

     

    The classical image of thought, and the striating of mental space it effects, aspires to universality. It in effect operates with two "universals," the Whole as the final ground of being or all-encompassing horizon, and the Subject as the principle that converts being into being-for-us (A Thousand Plateaus 379).

     

    From univocity, where space and perception are spread across a time and surface that transcends the human knower, equivocity establishes a single and formalizable condition of spatiality–the logic of the subject–which is both inescapable and unmasterable. Both Foucault and Deleuze note that this historical shift does not just have political implications but needs to be seen as the very negation of the political. Although they both have a common target–the equivocal ontology whereby consciousness is the substance from which the world’s spaces are constituted–Foucault and Deleuze differ as to the possibility of the re-politicization of space. We will deal with their arguments in turn.

     

    In The Order of Things, Foucault argues that there have always been two ethical modes. The first takes the form of Stoicism or Epicureanism, which is civic and urban and decides how one ought to live according to who and where one is (Order 327-28). This yields a decided and specific morality of political identity, where the civic self is other than the bare or biological life from which he and the polis are distanced. In modernity, which is the second ethical mode, morality is no longer possible and man, far from being defined through a polity that sets itself off from mere life, now turns only to himself. Politics takes as its object life in general, or that which can and must be recognized in any body whatever. What had once been a spatial and explicitly political decision–the division between the civic body of law and the mere life of nature–is now a division within each self, with bare life or our biological and hidden being providing the ground or substance for the operation of power: “any imperative is lodged within thought and its movement toward the apprehension of the unthought” (Order 328). Political decisions, whether they be the liberal concerns for human life and rights, or the horrifying control of the human species at the level of race and ethnicity, now operate upon that which has no specific space or locale. Humanity as such, at the level of life, is the primary political object, which is to say that the political is no longer the polis or the space of decision but that supposed ground that precedes all decision and particularity: “modern thought is advancing towards that region where man’s Other must become the same as himself” (Order 328).

     

    We can read this shift in the relation between space and the political in Foucault’s emblematic epochal vignettes. In Discipline and Punish, he describes the construction of political space through sovereign terror. The public torture of Damiens the regicide establishes the law as a body with the power to act upon life, and it is this potential to intervene in life which establishes the border between the lawful space of the polis and its constituted outside. Such a moment is an historical threshold announcing the possibility and space of modern power. The political body is deterritorialized: the relation among bodies of the polity is governed by a body (or the sovereign) whose intervention in life and death opens the potential for life as such to be the locus of power, or the medium through which relations are distributed. The sovereign body is excepted or placed outside the political territory through this act, which also establishes the polis as other than bodily life by the very violence of acting upon this singular body which has transgressed the polis. In the modern panopticon, by contrast, the body of law no longer divides mere life from the political space of order; each body is exemplary and bears the law within itself. Space is now organized in order to monitor, know, or manage life; where each life exposes something of any life whatever. The criminal is not a transgressing body, so much as a being whose will must be referred back to the domain of life in general–intention, psychology, sociology. Power is reterritorialized on the interiority of human life, that which causes and determines our relations to space and others. In the panopticon (and the human sciences that also locate man within a general life from which relations unfold), it is not only intentionality or the hidden which becomes the basis for the operation of power, but an intentionality that has its law outside any particular body and can provide the receding ground for us all. The prisoner’s body is no longer exceptional, punished as a sign of the possible terror of the law, but exemplary, bearing the same intentional life in which we can all read ourselves. Now, in response to this new relation between space and power, Foucault makes no claim as to the radical or reactionary organizations of space per se. His metaphorical use of space–that different epochs produce different historical a priori, or fields of relations within which we think, act, and speak–does not yield the demand for an organization of literal space that would free us from our commitment to subjectivism, or the notion of one life as the ground for history, language, and politics. One can see spatial events as expressive of the relations of power, and one can write about other political relations–the bodily relations that produce the ancient polity, and that do not presuppose some already constituted humanity. But Foucault explicitly refuses to step outside the historical spaces he describes in order to describe a politics of space as such (“Space” 354).

     

    Deleuze offers a similar account of the genesis of the subject and humanity, but differs from Foucault in two crucial respects. First, Deleuze remains committed to the notion of life: the disciplines of evolutionary science, linguistics, and even a form of psychoanalysis which explain the relations or strata that produce terms or points or relative stability. Thinking life radically, however, involves freeing the movements that produce any single series of relations, or any plateau, from any single term. Thus, neither biology, nor geology, nor linguistics, nor sociology, can account for life as such. Indeed, life is just that which unfolds in all these distinct series. Second, one can see each of these series or plateaus as a problem, as one of many ways in which the striving of life creates, produces, expands, and expresses itself. The problem with modern power in its capitalist form is just the reduction of all these series to the single plane of capital, all these forms of stratification to the space of man. Here, Deleuze is in accord with Foucault’s genealogy but allows for the thought of life, the problem of life, to open up a new space, a virtual space or a space of sense.

     

    Husserl had already argued that the formalizing or idealizing power of geometry allows one to repeat the truths of space to infinity. One establishes a science through an orientation or problem that goes beyond the given to its future and repeatable potential. Sense, for both Husserl and Deleuze, is this radical incorporeal power to release what is essential in an event from its material locale. The constitution of formal geometrical space therefore emerges from a certain sense, striving, or project. For Husserl, this is the sense of one humanity, occupying a single territory and history of truth and knowledge. Whereas Foucault and Derrida are critical of this one conscious life, this presupposed “we” or ground of consciousness, Deleuze affirms the power of thought and philosophy to intuit life as the source of difference, folds, relations, and spaces. Sense, philosophy, intuition, thinking and concepts all name the power to unleash other territories by imagining the given as an expression of a life that exceeds any of its fixed terms, and imagining the potential that can be unfolded from that expressive power.

     

    “Man,” or the modern subject of psychoanalysis or linguistics, closes down thinking if he is seen as the point from which differences and relations unfold. Accordingly, space, seen as the field occupied, measured, and constituted by this man of consciousness, is a field of interiority–a space within which we think, a space reducible to perceptions of this specific organism. Such a space operates from a combination of sense and affect. First, there are the affects of western man, the images that organize a plateau or constitute the social unit: the white face of the viewing subject, the black holes of eyes expressing an interior, a body dominated by speech and identified through their familial position as either mother or father (Anti-Oedipus 96-97). That is, the investing perception of a certain body part–the apprehension of the power of the face as organizing center–unfolds a sense of space, a way of orienting a field crucial to the territory of man.

     

    The faciality function showed us the form under which man constitutes the majority, or rather the standard upon which the majority is based: white, male, adult, "rational," etc., in short, the average European, the subject of enunciation (A Thousand Plateaus 292).

     

    From the specific affect of speaking man as subject and center, Deleuze and Guattari then describe the expansion or extrapolation of this affect to form a sense of space and time in general. The central point enables equivocity, where one privileged term is the organizing ground of the other; man becomes the substance upon which other terms depend and he also enables a single temporal plane:

     

    Following the law of arborescence, it is this central Point that moves across all of space or the entire screen, and at every turn nourishes a certain distinctive opposition, depending on which faciality trait is retained: male-(female), adult-(child), white-(black, yellow, or red); rational-(animal). The central point, or third eye, thus has the property of organizing binary distributions within the dualism machines, and of reproducing itself in the principal term of the opposition; the entire opposition at the same time resonates in the central point. The constitution of a "majority" as redundancy. Man constitutes himself as a gigantic memory, through the position of the central point. (A Thousand Plateaus 292-93)

     

    And all this is achieved at the expense of the line, for movement, desires, and trajectories are subordinated to the terms or points they produce. The effects of relations and desires–points–are taken as original, and in the constitution of an origin, Memory supplants memories:

     

    What constitutes arborescence is the submission of the line to the point. Of course, the child, the woman, the black have memories; but the Memory that collects those memories is still a virile majoritarian agency treating them as "childhood memories," as conjugal, or colonial memories (A Thousand Plateaus 293).

     

    Deleuze’s project is the expansion of sense beyond its localization in man, the expansion of the potential of geometry beyond its purposive or architectonic sense. The transcendental project, the striving to think the sense of space, has yet to be carried out beyond its dependence on man. The space of humanity has been constituted from the perception of an upright man of reason who regards all others as potentially or ideally just like himself. A radical striving toward sense must be transcendental and empirical: transcendental in its refusal of any image of thought or consciouness, and empirical in its observation of the different perceptions opened from different affective encounters. Sense is the potential to imagine other perceptions of the infinite, and the striving to think space positively: not the link between two points, but the power of life in its striving to create trajectories that open series or plateaus.

     

    One might think here, positively, of sacred land. Claims for the sacredness of land by indigenous peoples are not just examples or instances of the various ways in which “we” (humanity) grant space significance. For the key difference is that space here is not “significant”–not seen as a marker, symbol, or image of cultural memory. Whereas western understandings of monument use space to mark an event, and do so in order to call future humanity to recognize and retain its past, sacred land is both infinite–demanding recognition from others–and inherently affective. The infinite it opens is deemed to be real, and not simply a relative cultural construction; but at the same time this infinite cannot be known or appropriated by just any other. Indigenous Australian claims to the sacredness of land locate memory or spirit in the land itself, which is not a signifier of the past, so much as the affirmation of the ways in which bodies and land are created through their affective connections. A people is a people because of this land, and this land bears its affect, resonance, and spirit because of the dreaming of this people. At the same time, in accord with the positive reality of sense, the dreaming, spirit, or genius of space transcends present individuals and opens up into the future, requiring further creation and demonstration. There is not a time or a space, which is perceived here in one sense, there in another. There are distinct modes of sense, different ways in which perceptions imagine, intuit, and constitute an infinite.

     

    Conclusion

     

    Deleuze’s project is both critical and affirmative. Like Foucault and Derrida he is critical of the assumed center of a constituting consciousness or single body from which relations emerge. But Deleuze also wants to argue that the transcendental project–the striving to think space or life in general–needs to be carried beyond its human territory.

     

    The subject as universal humanity who operates on the single spatial and temporal plane of capitalism represents a distinct passage from affect to formal function. The white man of reason has no race, no body, no beliefs; he is nothing more than a power to relate to and recognize others. Capitalism is cynical and axiomatic; no body, image, or desire governs its domain. Man is the communicating, rationalizing, and laboring potential in us all. There is an abstraction from all tribalism and affective relations: territories are no longer constituted through investment in certain bodies or images. But this is possible only because one affective body–the image of oedipal man who is nothing more than a power to abstract from his body and speak–now allows the axiom of one global humanity. The gender neutral subject of modernity is produced as other than his bodily desire and is the white, western man of reason.

     

    The body of signifying, capitalist man is the body of reason, speech, communication, and submission to a law that one recognizes as one’s own, and therefore also of all others. One’s true being is that of “any subject whatever,” an affective investment in a body whose desires are now pure functions, who can recognize in all others the same human life, the same potential to liberate oneself from mere life and become fully human. Man is that body or point of life liberated from life, a desire not for this or that image or affect, but a desire to be other than affect. On the one hand, then, this subject of formal geometry and the space of humanity is reactive: a desire that wills itself not to will and in so doing submits itself to the negation of desire. One constitutes oneself as a point in humanity across one universal space and time. In so doing, however, desire is deprived of its own power, reterritorialized, or subordinated to one of its affects. The power to intuit or sense perceptions beyond one’s own purview is halted by the inclusion of all other perceivers as already within one’s own space and time. Deleuze’s own project is neither the inhabitation of a specific text or event of space–determining the points from which a space is drawn or delimited–nor the assertion of an absolute deterritorialization. Rather, from the thought of the constitution of this or that space from this or that desire, or from the thought of the potential of sense, one can think space as such in its infinite divergence: a thousand plateaus.

     

    We need to be wary of simply situating Deleuze, as a philosopher of singularity and affect, against universalizing or deterritorializing potentials. Indeed, at least half the power of his thought lies in his emphasis on intuition, on the capacity of perception to open the singular to its infinite force. We need to acknowledge Deleuze’s opposition to the globalizing subjectivism of capitalism, while at the same time recognizing his affirmation of the potential that has been domesticated by capitalism. Doing so will allow us to approach the politics of space through the dimension of both sense and affect.

     

    Notes

     

    1. See Edmund Husserl’s Origin of Geometry 153; hereafter, this text will be referred to parenthetically as EH.

     

    2. On the distinction between intensive and extensive spaces, see DeLanda. An intensive space is not made up of points that are all accorded the same value; rather, as one traverses an intensive space the space itself differs by, for example, speeding up in terms of its curvature, or (as in a weather map) altering in its pressures or potentials to change.

     

    3. Accordingly, there is a quantitative distinction among beings that allows for intrinsic difference. All these numerically different instances of white are still of whiteness, a power to differ that is essential and can be seen as really distinct only because it expresses itself over and over again. Space as extension allows for “extrinsic individuation” or the difference of this from that; but space as intensive is just the power of essential differences to express themselves, to repeat themselves in all their difference and thereby establish one expressive plane:

     

    Only a quantitative distinction of beings is consistent with the qualitative identity of the absolute. And this quantitative distinction is no mere appearance, but an internal difference, a difference of intensity. So that each finite being must be said to express the absolute, ... according, that is, to the degree of its power. Individuation is, in Spinoza, neither qualitative nor extrinsic, but quantitative and intrinsic, intensive. (Deleuze, Expressionism 197).

     

    4. In Anti-Oedipus, Deleuze and Guattari argue that desire is always revolutionary. Desire is not the desire for this or that lost object, or this or that supposedly natural need. Desire is the power for life to act, where action, movement and striving are not determined in advance by any proper end or intrinsic relation (377).

     

    5. This is why it is a mistake, I believe, to correct Deleuze and Guattari’s philosophy on the grounds that they have mis-read biology. According to Mark Hansen, Deleuze and Guattari privilege flows of becoming and creation and ignore the significant self-organization of organisms and the order of organisms as a power of nature. But Deleuze and Guattari’s philosophy is not based on biology and does not then use biology to explain other strata, such as art, language, or history. Rather, biological organization is one of the ways in which the differing and expressing power of life is manifested, and it is in other strata–such as philosophy–that the power to extend beyond organization can perhaps tell us something about powers actualized to a lesser degree in biological orders. I would therefore argue that no discipline or strata can explain or provide the model for any other. In What is Philosophy?, however, Deleuze and Guattari stress that certain strata–the human brain and its power to undertake philosophy, art, and science–not only actualize virtual powers in life, but allow life’s virtual power to be thought.

     

    6. It is precisely this space–one freed from an architectonic of full actualization and universality–that Derrida affirms in a number of contemporary projects. In Edmund Husserl’s Origin of Geometry, Derrida contrasts Husserl’s univocity with James Joyce’s equivocity. Joyce’s writing does not assume a ground of translatable sense that precedes or legitimates different languages, although the project of Finnegans Wake seems to comprehend this equivocity, bringing it within the space of the book (103).

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Bergson, Henri. Matter and Memory. Trans. Nancy Margaret Paul and W. Scott Palmer. London: Swan Sonnenschein, 1911.
    • —. Creative Evolution. Trans. Arthur Mitchell. New York: Dover, 1988.
    • DeLanda, Manuel. Intensive Science and Virtual Philosophy. London: Continuum, 2002.
    • Deleuze, Gilles. Expressionism in Philosophy: Spinoza. Trans. Martin Joughin. New York: Zone, 1992.
    • —. Difference and Repetition. Trans. Paul Patton. New York: Columbia UP, 1994.
    • —. Foucault. Trans. Seán Hand. London: Athlone, 1988.
    • —. The Fold: Leibniz and the Baroque. Trans. Tom Conley. London: Athlone, 1993.
    • —. The Logic of Sense. Trans. Mark Lester with Charles Stivale. Ed. Constantin V. Boundas. New York: Columbia UP, 1990.
    • —. Negotiations: 1972-1990. Trans. Martin Joughin. New York: Columbia UP, 1995.
    • Deleuze, Gilles and Félix Guattari. Anti-Oedipus: Capitalism and Schizophrenia. Trans. Robert Hurley, Mark Seem, and Helen R. Lane. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1983.
    • —. A Thousand Plateaus: Capitalism and Schizophrenia. Trans. Brian Massumi. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1987.
    • —. What Is Philosophy? Trans. Hugh Tomlinson and Graham Burchell. New York: Columbia UP, 1996.
    • Derrida, Jacques. Dissemination. Trans. Barbara Johnson. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1981.
    • —. Of Grammatology. Trans. Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 1974.
    • —. Margins of Philosophy. Trans. Alan Bass. Sussex: Harvester, 1982.
    • —. Edmund Husserl’s Origin of Geometry: An Introduction. Trans. John P. Leavey, Jr. Lincoln: U of Nebraska P, 1989.
    • Foucault, Michel. The Order of Things. London: Tavistock, 1970.
    • — . “Space, Knowledge and Power.” Power: Essential Works of Foucault 1954-1984. Trans. Robert Hurley et. al. Ed. James D Faubion. Harmondsworth: Penguin, 2000: 349-64.
    • Hansen, Mark. “Becoming as Creative Involution?: Contextualizing Deleuze and Guattari’s Biophilosophy.” Postmodern Culture 11.1: 2001.
    • Heidegger, Martin. What is a Thing? Trans. W.B. Barton, Jr. and Vera Deutsch. Lanham: UP of America, 1967.
    • Tschumi, Bernard. Cinégramme Folie: Le Parc de la Villette. Princeton: Princeton Architectural, 1987.
    • Wigley, Mark. The Architecture of Deconstruction. Cambridge: MIT P, 1993.

     

  • The Différance of the World: Homage to Jacques Derrida

    Arkady Plotnitsky

    Theory and Cultural Studies Program
    Department of English
    Purdue University
    aplotnit@sla.purdue.edu

     

    With the death of Jacques Derrida, the world has lost one of its greatest philosophers, as well as one of the most controversial and misunderstood. But then, controversy and misunderstanding are part and parcel of philosophical greatness. Plato is still controversial and misunderstood, and is still our contemporary. So are René Descartes, Immanuel Kant, and Georg Wilhelm Friedrich Hegel, to name, by way of an Einsteinian metaphor, arguably the heaviest philosophical masses that define and shape, curve, the space of modern philosophy. Derrida is no exception, especially because his work in turn transforms the fabric of this space by its own mass and by its engagement with these figures. Modern physics no longer thinks of space as ever empty but instead as a kind of fabric or, to use the Latin word, textum of energy, or (once we think of the quantum fabric of this never empty space) that of energy and chance. So one might as well use this rather Derridean idea–of a textumof energy and chance–as a metaphor for the field of philosophy. The fortunes of Derrida’s philosophy, or “his chances,” lie partly in the controversy surrounding his work (“My Chances” 1).

     

    Derrida’s greatness, like that of Plato, Descartes, Kant, and Hegel, lies in the originality and power of his ideas, his lucidity and precision in expressing them, and in the rigor of his analysis–qualities his detractors often unjustly deny him. These are the qualities that primarily define his chances, in the play “of chance and necessity in calculations without end,” as Derrida said in 1967 in assessing the chances of différance, his most famous term, “neither a word nor a concept,” with which he was taking considerable philosophical risks at the time (Margins of Philosophy 7; emphasis added). Derrida has been appreciated for these qualities by a great many of his readers, his admirers and his fair-minded critics alike. It would only be faithful to the spirit and the letter of Derrida’s work and deconstruction to question, incessantly question his argument. But to be faithful to the spirit of true intellectual inquiry, one must do so in a fair-minded way in order, with and against Derrida, to move our thought forward.

     

    Derrida’s works are complex because they explore the ultimate complexity (intellectual, ethical, cultural, and political) of our world. One might even argue that a refusal to engage seriously with his thought and writing is often a refusal to confront this ultimate complexity, perhaps in particular insofar as this complexity is also that of the world that has moved from modernity to postmodernity and is defined by this transition. I would argue that, although extraordinary in many other respects, Derrida’s thought reflects, and reflects on, this movement wherever it occurs in our culture. “What has seemed necessary and urgent to me, in the historical situation which is our own,” Derrida said in 1971, in describing his earlier work, “is a general determination of the conditions for the emergence and the limits of philosophy, of metaphysics, of everything that carries it on and that it carries on” (Positions 51; emphasis added). Derrida’s concerns and domains of investigation change and extend to literature, ethics, politics, and elsewhere, although Derrida continued the philosophical project just described as well, a project that already involves many of these concerns and domains. The sense of what is “necessary and urgent . . . in the historical situation which is our own” was, however, to define the nature of all of his work for decades to come, decades we now see as the era of postmodernity.

     

    I am aware that it is difficult to assign an origin to or to demarcate either modernity or postmodernity, or their passing into each other, and indeed it is impossible to do so unconditionally, once and for all. I am also aware that Derrida expressly dissociated himself from some postmodernisms, even though he commented on the postmodern world itself on many occasions, for example, in The Other Heading: Reflections on Today’s Europe and in Specters of Marx: The State of the Debt, the Work of Mourning and the New International. Many of his proponents and some self-appointed defenders went quite far in trying to dissociate Derrida from all (all!) postmodernism and, and more generally, to bring Derrida back into the fold of traditionalist thinking. I would argue, however, that while, as does most other revolutionary work, Derrida’s work respects and upholds many traditions and what is best in them, this work itself is essentially revolutionary and not traditionalist. As such, his work, say, from the 1960s on, also marks and is marked by the culture of postmodernity, or the postmodernity of culture, and may, accordingly, be seen as postmodernist, although, of course, not contained by this rubric. (I use “postmodernity” to denote the culture of roughly this period, and “postmodernist” to denote certain modes of thought, such as Derrida’s, that are both the products of this culture and, often, reflections on it.) Indeed, many of his critics associate his thinking with postmodernism and its “dangers.” By contrast, I argue not only that Derrida’s thought is postmodernist but also, and even primarily, that both the culture of postmodernity and, at its best, postmodernist thought are Derridean, in part by virtue of being shaped by Derrida’s work.

     

    Deconstruction and Writing

     

    Derrida is most famous as the (one can safely say “the”) founder of deconstruction, a term that has by now been disseminated well beyond the ways it is used by Derrida or by his fellow-thinkers and followers. This is an achievement in itself on Derrida’s part, even apart from the fact that this dissemination is best understood in terms of Derrida’s own conception of dissemination or différance-dissemination, which I explain later. Would one, were it not for Derrida, find “deconstruction” already in spell-check word-processing programs or in half a million Google listings? Would one have heard Henry Kissinger speak of a “deconstructive” approach to understanding controversial political situations as “taking a clock apart to see how it is ticking,” or Zbigniew Brzezinski speak of “deconstructing” our received ideas regarding Europe?

     

    These uses of the term are not so much misunderstandings as simplifications, although it would be difficult to imagine that either Kissinger or Brzezinski has read Derrida’s The Other Heading or Specters of Marx, where such political situations are given their due deconstructive complexities. To use Kissinger’s metaphor, Derrida’s work deals with clocks that have special secrets, and sometimes clocks within clocks. The metaphor is also peculiarly apt given that temporality is always at stake in Derrida’s deconstruction, from his earliest work on Edmund Husserl on. Like Einstein’s argument in relativity theory (a deconstruction of Newtonism?), Derrida’s deconstruction tells us that time itself (or space, or their relationship) does not exist, physically or phenomenally, independently of observation and of our instruments of observation, so as to be then represented by means of these instruments, such as clocks and rulers, or even by our theories. Instead, time and space, in any way we can observe or conceive of them, are effects of instruments–technologies–of observation and, again, of our theories, and even represent or embody our experimental and theoretical practices. This process may be best understood in terms of what Derrida calls writing, in part by extending, via Martin Heidegger, the idea of technology, tekhne. For the moment, Derrida also sees these deconstructive and, as such, again technological in the broad sense, written, processes of taking those clocks apart, and of putting them together, as themselves requiring deconstruction. In principle such deconstructive work never ends, as it builds new technologies, new forms of writing. But neither does, in principle, almost any real theoretical work or its production of new forms of writing. Will we ever be finished with understanding nature in physics, life in biology, mind in philosophy, literature in criticism, or with understanding how we understand them? Not altogether inconceivable, but not very likely!

     

    That is not to say that deconstruction does not achieve positive results or make new discoveries. For Derrida, deconstruction is both a critical and a positive or, as he liked to call it, an affirmative practice. It does have what Friedrich Nietzsche, arguably the greatest precursor of deconstruction, saw as a tragic sense of life, or, as Derrida calls it, life-death, “living on,” and “living on border lines,” the border lines of life and death. The complexity of Derrida’s deconstruction reflects, and reflects on, the complexity of the life-death processes of our bodies, minds, and cultures, and their technologies of writing.

     

    The concept of writing is one of Derrida’s most original contributions, arising from his understanding of the role of language in these processes, but, as must be clear already, it expands well beyond these limits. Indeed this expansion is necessary, given Derrida’s analysis of the workings of language as writing, which requires that we reconceive the nature of language itself and of the relationships among thought, language, and culture, but also enables us to do so. (I italicize writing when I use it in Derrida’s sense.) One should more rigorously speak of “neither a word nor a concept” here, but I shall (Derrida sometimes does as well) use the phrase “the concept of writing” for the sake of convenience, presupposing this qualification, which I shall further explain, via différance, later. It would be difficult to do Derrida’s analysis of writing justice here (it took Derrida himself hundreds of pages to develop his analysis), and almost nothing in Derrida can be “summarized without being mistreated,” as he once said about Hegel (Writing and Difference 254). It may however be worth commenting on Derrida’s writing in more detail here, both as one of the earliest and still most graphic examples of deconstruction, and as a crucial concept in its own right. For at stake here is not only a deconstruction, let alone merely the overturning of previous regimes and hierarchies, such as speech above writing, in their conventional sense. As Derrida writes, “it is not a question of resorting to the same concept of writing and of simply inverting the dissymmetry that now has become problematical. It is a question, rather, of producing a new concept of writing,” of “the irruptive emergence of a new ‘concept,’ a concept that can no longer be, and never could be, included in the previous regime” (Positions 26, 42). This type of deconstructive machinery and the workings of writing never left Derrida’s work. It is not that his subsequent work could be translated into this early project: he moved on to new and sometimes quite different work. There are, however, often implicit but essential workings of both deconstruction (in this initial sense) and writing throughout his work.

     

    Derrida’s concept of writing emerges through a deconstruction of the conventional and, as Derrida shows, unrigorous concept of writing. The latter defines writing as a representation of speech, while speech itself is, concomitantly, seen in (and as ensuring) the greatest possible proximity to thought, a form of what Derrida famously called the “metaphysics of presence,” and a manifestation of its avatars, such as logocentrism, phonocentrism, or phallogocentrism. A certain “science” (operative in a deconstructed field, as opposed to strictly positive or positivistic science) of writing was proposed by Derrida under the name of “grammatology” in Of Grammatology. Eventually or even immediately, the practice became disseminated (again, in Derrida’s sense) in more heterogeneous fields. This new “science” of writing was juxtaposed to Saussurean linguistics, specifically as the science of speech conceived in metaphysical opposition to and privileged over writing. By the same token, writing is also seen as auxiliary and, in principle (even if not in practice), dispensable, a claim that Derrida’s deconstruction shows to be impossible to sustain rigorously. Derrida shows more generally that this opposition and hierarchy (of thought placed over speech, and speech over writing) characterizes most philosophy, from Plato to Hegel and beyond, as the metaphysics of presence. Accordingly, even though ostensibly designed in opposition to philosophy, and specifically to phenomenology, linguistics is shown to be complicit with philosophy as the metaphysics of presence. This deconstruction extends to other human or social sciences, such as anthropology (specifically that of Claude Lévi-Strauss), which are often, especially as part of the structuralist paradigm, modeled on linguistics. If, however, this conventional, philosophical concept of writing is shown to be uncritical, the same–and this is crucial–is also true of the conventional concept of speech or of thought. Derrida’s analysis of writing reconceptualizes all three as part of the same deconstructive-constructive process, strategically borrowing the name “writing,” “the old name,” from the subordinate member of the metaphysical opposition of speech and writing for his new concept (Margins 329).

     

    The argument just described offers a paradigmatic example of deconstruction. Its technique or tekhne applies to “all the pairs of opposites on which philosophy is constructed and on which our discourse lives” (Margins 17). Derrida’s deconstruction does not dispense with or merely reverse such opposites (they are usually hierarchical), but explains their necessity in their specificity within a given field, and resituates and re-delimits them in a new deconstructed conceptual field it creates (Margins 17). One must produce new concepts “that can no longer be, and never could be, included in the previous regime,” possibly by using a reversal as a phase of such an analysis and by, strategically, borrowing a name, such as that of writing, from a subordinate member of a given hierarchy. In other words, a given (old) configuration continues to function, both in re-delimited old regimes and in new regimes, rather than being simply abandoned, although some portions of it must be given up.

     

    In what I find to be his best single description, Derrida specifies the “nuclear traits of all writing,” writing that is at work “always and everywhere throughout language,” to borrow from Derrida on Heidegger (Margins 27):

     

    the break with the horizon of communication as the communication of consciousnesses and presences, and as the linguistic or semantic transport of meaning; (2) the subtraction of all writing from the semantic horizon or the hermeneutic horizon which, at least as a horizon of meaning, lets itself be punctured by writing; (3) the necessity of, in a way, separating the concept of polysemia [as a controlled or controllable plurality of meaning] from the concept I have elsewhere named dissemination [an uncontrollable plurality of meaning], which is also the concept of writing; (4) the disqualification or the limit of the concept of the "real" or "linguistic" context, whose theoretical determination or empirical saturation are, strictly speaking, rendered impossible or insufficient by writing. (Margins 316; emphasis on "writing" added)

     

    To the extent that one could use a single definition here, one might say that writing in Derrida’s sense disrupts and prevents the ultimate (but only ultimate) possibility of controlling the play of difference and multiplicity in any meaning production or communication. As this passage indicates, in the process of the deconstruction of conventional or narrow writing and the production of a new, Derridean, concept of writing, a network of new concepts is produced, a network that, by definition, cannot be closed: différance, dissemination, trace, supplement, etc. Indeed, this production and this interminable generation, “eruptive emergence,” of new concepts is necessary and unavoidable.

     

    The conceptual field thus emerging acquires tremendous theoretical potential and allows one to attach the reconfigurative operator (of Derrida’s) writing to other conventional denominations and to transform them accordingly. There could be writing-thinking, writing-speech, writing-writing, writing-philosophy, writing-literature, writing-criticism, writing-reading, writing-painting, and even writing-dancing, as in Stéphane Mallarmé’s Mimique, where indeed, according to Derrida, all these forms of writing interact (Dissemination 223). Writing-mathematics and writing-science become possible as well, and Derrida’s analysis relates the question of writing to the question of mathematical formalism via Descartes and Leibniz in a remarkable section of Of Grammatology, “Algebra: Arcanum and Transparence” (75-81). Derrida shows that there is writing in Derrida’s sense in mathematical algebra, and, reciprocally, a certain “algebra” in writing in the conventional sense: that algebra becomes part of the practice of writing in Derrida’s sense and is actively deployed by it.

     

    Deconstruction, then, is a work of rethinking a given concept or phenomenon, such as writing (in its conventional sense), which may appear familiar and simple, but is in fact constituted through complex intellectual, linguistic, psychological, or cultural processes. It is a discovery and exploration of the deeper layers of such processes, and a creation of new concepts, such as writing (in Derrida’s sense), which enables such discoveries and explorations.

     

    Beyond their analytical value, these discoveries, explorations, and creations of concepts have broad ethical, cultural, and political implications. Derrida examines these implications throughout his work, and his philosophical thought is inseparable from his remarkable contributions to many crucial cultural and political debates of our time. His ethical and political subjects–such as democracy, hospitality, friendship, responsibility, forgiveness, and capital punishment–and encounters–especially with Marx, Benjamin, and Levinas–powerfully manifest this inseparability in his philosophical work of the last decade. It would be difficult to overestimate Derrida’s significance for feminist and gender theory, where Derrida has such distinguished followers as Luce Irigaray, Hélène Cixous, and Judith Butler; postcolonial theory, where the work of such Derrideans as Gayatri Spivak played a major role; and Marxist and post-Marxist thought, where his ideas influence such authors as Ernesto Laclau and Chantal Mouffe, and Fredric Jameson, among others. On a more practical-political side (if one can separate sides here), Derrida made decisive interventions on such issues as apartheid in South Africa, on the Middle East, the new (post-Soviet) Europe, and the Iraq War (both Iraq Wars). His role on the French intellectual and political scene was of course essential, as Jacques Chirac (hardly a deconstructionist) admiringly acknowledged in his announcement of Derrida’s death as the death of a thinker who, “through his work . . . sought to find the free movement which lies in the root of all thinking.” Derrida’s work has shaped our world for a long time and it will continue to do so for a long time to come. I also argue that it has done and will continue to do so not in small part because it reflected on and shaped this world as the world of postmodernity, as these specifically cultural and political contributions would indicate as well. But then, again, they remain inseparable from Derrida’s philosophical thought and writing.

     

    Absolute Knowledge and Unnamable Différance

     

    There are, to use his term, many “junctures” of Derrida’s work to support an argument that Derrida is a thinker of the culture of postmodernity and (the inversion is appropriate) of the postmodernity of our culture–the différance of the postmodern–beginning with the juncture of “Structure, Sign, and Play in the Discourse of the Human Sciences” (Writing and Difference). That essay arguably initiated (and still defines) poststructuralist and, via poststructuralism, postmodernist thought, and many of the debates and controversies that surround them. Ironically, the essay was initially given in English in 1966 at a conference at Johns Hopkins University and published in The Structuralist Controversy: The Languages of Criticism and the Sciences of Man (eds. Richard Macksey and Eugenio Donato, Johns Hopkins UP, 1969). It is ironic because with this essay Derrida almost single-handedly ended the controversy, or not so much the controversy as structuralism itself, and moved the Western-philosophical landscape on to poststructuralism and postmodernism. The essay has remained uncircumventable ever since, to use Derrida’s word [incontournable], applied by him to “Heidegger’s meditation” but, by now, no less applicable to his own thought (Margins 22).

     

    One might, correlatively, consider “the juncture–rather than the summation” of différance, the juncture, Derrida also says, “of what has been most decisively inscribed in the thought of what is conveniently called our ‘epoch’” (“Differance,” Speech and Phenomena 130, a statement which does not appear in the text published in Margins of Philosophy). This “epoch” is also the postmodern “epoch” (using this term as a convenient abbreviation, as Derrida does by way of allusion to Husserl’s phenomenological reduction) and the postmodernist type of inscription: a juncture rather than a summation. Différance itself may be the most postmodernist of Derrida’s concepts, especially if coupled with dissemination, as it must be. Derrida most immediately mentions Friedrich Nietzsche, Ferdinand de Saussure, Sigmund Freud, Emmanuel Levinas, and Martin Heidegger, but Hegel, Husserl, Georges Bataille, and, more implicitly Jacques Lacan and Gilles Deleuze are part of this juncture as well. These, along with Derrida himself, are all figures, or, as Derrida would say, names of problems that define the movement of our thought from modernism to postmodernism and beyond (Of Grammatology 99).

     

    It may well be, however, that what reflects this movement more than anything in Derrida’s writing and, with Derrida, in general is a transformation of Hegelian Absolute Knowledge, the philosophical idea that is a paradigm of modernity and/asthe Enlightenment, into the irreducibly decentered and disseminating multiplicity, différance, of the postmodern. This différance replaces the claim for Absolute Knowledge, its very possibility, with a different economy, a marketplace or, as Derrida says, an auction of knowledge and claims upon it (Post Card 521).

     

    “Decentering” is one of Derrida’s earliest terms, made famous and controversial by “Structure, Sign, and Play.” It is worth noting at the outset that Derridean decentering is not defined by the absence of all centrality (a common misconception). Instead it is defined by multicentering, a potential emergence of many centers and claims upon one or another centrality in the absence of a single, absolute center that would define its alternatives as unconditionally marginal. To cite the uncircumventable “Structure, Sign, and Play”:

     

    Turned toward the lost or impossible presence of the absent origin, this structuralist thematic of broken immediacy is therefore the saddened, negative, nostalgic, guilty, Rousseauistic side of the thinking of play whose other side would be the Nietzschean affirmation, that is the joyous affirmation of the play of the world and of the innocence of becoming, the affirmation of a world of signs without fault, without truth, and without origin which is offered to an active interpretation. This interpretation then determines the noncenter otherwise than as loss of the center. And it plays without security. For there is a sure play: that which is limited to the substitution of given and existing, present, pieces. In absolute chance, affirmation also surrenders itself to genetic indetermination, to the seminal adventure of the trace. (Writing and Difference 292)

     

    Dissemination appears later, by way, in addition to Hegel, of Plato (pharmakon), Stéphane Mallarmé (hymen and undecidability), Lacan, Philippe Sollers, and several others. Dissemination is inherent in the movement of différance, and Derrida sometimes refers to it as “seminal différance” (Positions 45). Both are part of Derrida’s ensemble of interrelated but different neither-words-nor-concepts–différance, dissemination, trace, supplement, writing, etc., as this list, itself subject to the regime of différance and dissemination, has no termination, taxonomical closure, or center that could determinately organize it, for example, around any of its terms, such as différance. For, under these conditions, there cannot be “the unique word, . . . the finally proper name” (Margins 27). According to Derrida, in commenting on the relationships between différance and Heideggerian “difference,” which is governed by Heidegger’s concept of “Being,”

     

    "older" than Being itself, such a différance has no name in our language. But we "already know" that if it is unnameable, it is not provisionally so, not because our language has not yet found or received this name, or because we would have to seek it in another language, outside the finite system of our own. It is rather because there is no name for it at all, not even the name of essence or of Being, not even that of "différance," which is not a name, which is not a pure nominal unity, and unceasingly dislocates itself in a chain of differing and deferring substitutions. "There is no name for it": a proposition to be read in its platitude. This unnameable is not an ineffable Being which no name could approach: God, for example. This unnameable is the play which makes possible nominal effects, the relatively unitary and atomic structures that are called names, the chains of substitutions of names in which, for example, the nominal effect différance is itself enmeshed, carried off, reinscribed, just as a false entry or a false exit is still part of the game, a function of the system. (Margins 26-27)

     

    By the same token, “the efficacy of the thematic of différance may very well, indeed must, one day be superseded, lending itself if not to its own replacement, at least to enmeshing itself in a chain that in truth it never will have governed” (7). This is indeed what has happened, has always already happened, even in the very moment of this inscription, in Derrida’s own work, which is, again, the work of a rigorous proliferation, the dissemination of names. “Whereby,” he adds, “once again, it [différance] is not theological” (7; also Margins 6). This difference from all theology, positive or negative, is crucial for Derrida’s inscription of différance and, I would argue, for all of Derrida’s thought, earlier or later, some appearances in his later works and certain claims concerning them notwithstanding. It defines his work as materialist, even though and because it also juxtaposes this deconstructive materialism to all metaphysical materialism (all idealism of matter, one might say), from Positions to Specters of Marx (Positions 64).

     

    In closing “Différance,” Derrida extends and elaborates the Nietzschean themes of “Structure, Sign, and Play”:

     

    There will be no unique name, even if it were the name of Being. And we must think this without nostalgia, that is, outside of the myth of a purely maternal or paternal language, a lost native country of thought. On the contrary, we must affirmthis, in the sense in which Nietzsche puts affirmation into play, in a certain laughter and a certain step of the dance.From the vantage of this laughter and this dance, from the vantage of this affirmation foreign to all dialectics, the other side of nostalgia, what I will call Heideggerian hope, comes into question [a hope for finding a single word, the unique word, in order to name the essential nature of Being]. . . .

     

    Such is the question: the alliance of speech and Being in the unique word, in the finally proper name. And such is the question inscribed in the simulated affirmation of différance. It bears (on) each member of this sentence: "Being / speaks / always and everywhere / throughout / language." (Margins 27)

     

    Between Heidegger and Derrida, or Hegel (dialectic) and Derrida, and with Nietzsche and Derrida, Samuel Beckett’s The Unnamable may come close to this “simulated affirmation of différance.” It may be one of Derrida’s literary models, although he never expressly considers it (Acts of Literature 61-62).

     

    These Derridean themes figure significantly in many discussions and definitions of postmodernity and postmodernism, from Lyotard on. An important conceptual and epistemological determination of the postmodern is the concept of the uncontainable and multicentered multiplicity, which correlates to various forms of loss of knowledge, posited against the centered pyramid required or desired by the Enlightenment paradigm (Hegelian Absolute Knowledge), to echo Derrida’s themes of the pit and the pyramid of Hegel in “The Pit and the Pyramid: Introduction to Hegelian Semiology” and “Différance” (Margins 4, 69-108).

     

    Under these conditions of the irretrievable loss of “the unique word, the finally proper name,” différance refers to an in principle interminable play of differences, similarities, and interrelations in any meaning production. As part of this play, and as a modification of the French word “différer” (to differ), différance connotes a dynamics of difference and deferral or delay (in presentation). It is crucial, however, that Derrida conceives of différance and of the unconceivable of différance much more broadly:

     

    What is written as différance, then, will be the playing movement that "produces"--by means of something that is not simply an activity--these differences, these effects of difference. This does not mean that the différance that produces differences is somehow before them, in a simple and unmodified--in-different--present. Différance is the non-full, non-simple, structured and differentiating origin of differences. Thus, the name "origin" no longer suits it. . . . we will designate as différance the movement according to which language, or any code, any system of referral in general, is constituted "historically" as a weave of differences. "Is constituted," "is produced," "is created," "movement," "historically," etc., necessarily being understood beyond the metaphysical language in which they are retained, along with all their implications. (Margins 11-12)

     

    Accordingly, in working with its satellites and avatars, différance is productive of and responsible for manifest effects, “effect[s] without cause[s]” of difference, or identity, similarity, relationality, and so forth, or, as we have seen, effects of différance, effects that make us infer différance as their efficacy (Margins 12, 26-27). Différance itself, however, remains irreducibly inaccessible–unknowable, unrepresentable, inconceivable, unthinkable, and so forth (Margins 20-21). At the same time and by the same token, it is also never the same, is always disseminated. That is, while each time unknowable, unrepresentable, inconceivable, or unthinkable, it is each time different and reciprocal with its effects.

     

    Dissemination denotes that part of this play which entails an ultimately uncontrollable multiplicity, inherent, it follows, already in the workings of différance as each time different, disseminating itself, both in itself (i.e., under its own name) and into its proximates and avatars. As such, dissemination is juxtaposed to a controllable plurality of the Hegelian dialectical Aufhebung (Hegel’s favorite term, which has in German a triple meaning of negation, conservation, and supercession, and is accordingly untranslatable), and is analogous to conceptions of plurality or polysemia in philosophy, psychoanalysis, linguistics, and elsewhere. But then it also follows that différance already displaces Hegel in this way and that it entails dissemination, “seminal différance” (Margins 13-14; Positions 43-45). As Derrida says, “the operator of generality named dissemination inserted itself into the open chain of différance, ‘supplement,’ ‘pharmakon,’ ‘hymen,’ etc.”; it carries many features of différance and is defined in virtually the same terms, but with an emphasis on a multiplicity of effects or, again, multicentering (Positions 44-45). Both différance and dissemination, and their companion operators in the Derridean deconstructive field, enact a deconstruction of Hegel’s dialectic and of the Hegelian economy of Absolute Knowledge.

     

    Accordingly,

     

    if there were a definition of différance, it would be precisely the limit, the interruption, the destruction of the Hegelian relève [Aufhebung, thus read] wherever it operates. What is at stake here is enormous. I emphasize the Hegelian Aufhebung, such as it is interpreted by a certain Hegelian discourse, for it goes without saying that the double [triple] meaning of Aufhebung could be written otherwise. Whence the proximity of différance to all the operations conducted against Hegel's dialectical speculation. (Positions 40-41; translation modified)

     

     

    The difference (and sometimes différance) between Hegel and Hegelianism inscribed here requires a long discussion, and the stakes are indeed enormous. Might one read Hegel’s Absolute Knowledge along the lines of différance? Perhaps. This would be Derrida’s answer as well: Hegel is “the last philosopher of the book and the first thinker of writing” (Of Grammatology 26). For “the destruction of the Hegelian relève” notwithstanding, and indeed in order to enact it, “différance thus written, although maintaining relations of profound affinity with Hegelian discourse (such as it must be read), is also, up to a certain point, unable to break with that discourse (which has no kind of meaning or chance); but it [différance] can operate a kind of infinitesimal and radical displacement of it [Hegelian discourse]” (Margins 14; also Positions 43-44). By the time of Glas, this “displacement” reaches close to a thousand pages, and the delineation itself is never finished. The interminability of this encounter confirms Derrida’s statement in Positions: “it is still a question of elucidating the relationship to Hegel–a difficult labor, which for the most part remains before us, and which in a certain way is interminable, at least if one wishes to execute it rigorously and minutely” (43-44).

     

    The same type of “profound affinity and yet infinitesimal and radical displacement” defines nearly all of Derrida’s relationships to the major figures he engages. It is a long list, in itself reflecting the relationships–in turn a profound affinity and yet infinitesimal and radical displacement–between modernity and postmodernity, and the complexity of Derrida’s work and the magnitude of his achievement. An incomplete list includes, in roughly chronological order, Plato, Aristotle, Descartes, Rousseau, Kant, Hegel, Marx, Heidegger, Freud, Saussure, Husserl, Heidegger, Levinas, Bataille, Blanchot, and Lacan. If Nietzsche is conspicuous by his absence, it is because in this case it is difficult to speak of displacement, as Derrida’s assessment of and his encounters with Nietzsche indicate (Of Grammatology 19; Spurs: Nietzsche’s Style [throughout]). Literature is yet another story, yet another long list of proper names.

     

    The enormity of the Hegelian stakes appears to be ever undiminished in Derrida. Derrida returns to Glas in closing The Post Card: From Socrates to Freud and Beyond. He specifically addresses Freud and Lacan, and the economy, the political economy of psychoanalysis, a life-long engagement on Derrida’s part. Exposing the philosophical significance of psychoanalytic economy is one of Derrida’s major achievements. The implications of Derrida’s point at the end of The Post Card, however, are broader still. He writes:

     

    The question then becomes--and it is not only political, although it is also political, it is the question of general deconstruction . . . the question then becomes:Who will pay whom . . .?

     

    Or, if you prefer, the thing already having been broached, who has it paid to whom?

     

    The bidding has been opened–for some time.

     

    Let us say that what I write or what makes me write (for example, since there are not only the texts, this time I mean the publications) would represent in this respect only one offer.

     

    An offer on the scene in which the attempts to occupy the place of the Sa (that is, of the Savoir absolu stenographed in Glas) are multiplying, that is, simultaneously all the places, those of the seller, the buyer, and the auctioneer. (Post Card 520-51)

     

    It is worth noting, yet again, the multicentering of claims upon the center which accompany the structural decentering of the economy of knowledge at stake, which is also in part a political economy. We are and have been for quite a while on this scene. Always? Perhaps, at least to some degree, but never as much as now, in the postmodern intellectual, cultural, or political world. Derrida’s offer is (as he will say later, teleopoetically) that of a philosophical argument concerning or an inscription of the very condition, “the postmodern condition,” under which this offer is made. This argument is itself defined by a “profound affinity and yet infinitesimal and radical displacement” of Hegel’s Absolute Knowledge, in part via Freud and Lacan. It is crucial, however, that, in this view, Derrida can only make an offer, one offer among others, traditional and radical, modern and postmodern, and so forth, and various versions of absolute knowledge are still offered at this auction, if there is only one auction underway here.

     

    The question is whether any such offer can still dominate this marketplace and this auction. We recall, with Deleuze, that philosophy itself was born in such an agora, the marketplace of democracy (the first democracy?), at which Socrates offered, and Plato bought, his version of absolute knowledge. It is a version against which every argument and claim, philosophical, ethical, or political, and of course all literature, would have to be measured. The Socrates/Plato “deal” is of course crucially at stake in The Post Card (the post card sent from “from Socrates to Freud and Beyond”), but Hegel, Heidegger, Freud, and Lacan are all part of our own economy of knowledge. Derrida inscribes this bargain–Socrates speaks, Plato writes, or vice versa–in any of the relations between these figures, and others such as Kant, Descartes, and Rousseau can be added to the list. This Derridean condition transforms knowledge, in part as “the postmodern condition,” along the lines of Lyotard’s argument in The Postmodern Condition: A Report on Knowledge at about the same time (1979).

     

    Joyce, Derrida tells us, has already inscribed this new space of the claim(s) to occupy the space of absolute knowledge in “an immense postcard” of his own, Ulysses, which Derrida is always rewriting, including in The Post Card, all his life (Acts of Literature 260-262). One is, however, equally tempted to use Derrida’s passage as a reading of an auction, like the one in which Oedipa Maas awaits in the final scene of Thomas Pynchon’s The Crying of Lot 49, an icon of literary postmodernism. Still, writing in Derrida’s sense underwrites everything here, including literature, which modern and postmodern democracy authorizes–such is the literary contract we signed as a society, reflected in any given actual literary contract–to say everything and anything and collect our payments, as readers, for doing so (Acts of Literature, 37-49; On the Name 27-31). But then, again:

     

    Who will pay whom . . . ?
    Or, if you prefer, the thing already having been broached, who has it paid to whom?

    Chaosmic Différance and Funeral Rites

     

    We have been bidding on this offer, on all these offers, for quite a while, but the auction is far from over. “What is at stake here is enormous,” between philosophy and literature, each of which is already split into literature and philosophy from within. The columns–Plato’s Philebus, philosophy, on the left, Mallarmé’s Mimique, literature, on the right–of the opening pages of “The Double Session” anticipate Glas: “INTER Platonem and Mallarmatum,” (in) between Plato and Mallarmé, (in) between Hegel and Mallarmé, or indeed between Hegel and Plato (Dissemination 181). Each, as the name of a problem, is already between philosophy and literature, as is of course Derrida.

     

    Politics is inevitably inserted, entered into all these “in-betweens,” and many a specter of Marx hovers over the book. As an authorization (legal, political, and ethical) to say everything and anything, literature is fundamentally linked both to capitalism and to democracy, and to their relations, to begin with (On the Name 27-30). “The time is out of joint” (Derrida’s theme, via Hamlet, in Specters of Marx) already in early 1969, when Derrida delivered the original version of “The Double Session,” in the aftermath of 1968, one of the most out-of-joint years of the second half of the century, and a defining year of postmodernity. “The Paris spring,” “the Prague August” of the Soviet invasion (Prague, where he was arrested once, came to play a significant role in Derrida’s life), the Vietnam War, the assassination of Martin Luther King, Jr. and Robert Kennedy, were among its events (also in the sense of something unique, singular that Derrida gave this word later). The opening of “The End of Man,” given as a lecture in October 1968 in New York, is a powerful instance of Derrida’s response to these events (Margins 111-14). Hegel remains central to the essay as well, which, however, is hardly in conflict, quite the contrary, with its political urgency, then or now. Hegel’s Phenomenology, Derrida says, with Bataille, is “the slave(‘s) language, that is, the worker(‘s) language . . . [it] can be read from left to right or from right to left, as a reactionary movement or as a revolutionary movement, or both at once” (Writing and Difference 276).

     

    We can read the columns of Glas this way too, each often split in turn into further columns–between philosophy and literature, literature and politics, literature and revolution, between Hegel and Genet, between Kant and Hegel, in Rembrandt’s chiaroscuros (Glas 1b), between Derrida and all these names. (Derrida returns to Rembrandt in Memoirs of the Blind.) In general, Glas is to shape so much, perhaps (for the reasons set forward here) nearly everything, in later Derrida, but of course it does not define this later work altogether. On the left–or is it, at least politically, on the right, or between left and right?–we are between Kant and Hegel, on ethics, morality, and politics. We see both figures through ethics, morality, and politics (in part via Levinas): “the two sides face each other” (Glas 11a). On the right–or is it, politically, on the left, with literature and the acts of literature?–the column splits into two. On the left of the split, the left of the right, one finds:

     

    Colossal habitat: the masterpiece.
    He bands erect in his seing, but also occupies it like a sarcophagus. (Glas 11b)

     

    “Colossal habitat” is also the Universe itself, God’s masterpiece, envisioned by Kant’s analysis of the colossal, placed between, in between, the beautiful and the sublime (thus also between understanding and reason), a vision of the Universe as a colossal and perhaps innumerable assembly of galaxies. It is still Galileo’s and then Newton’s “book of nature written in the language of mathematics,” a point not missed in Of Grammatology (16; translation modified, emphasis added). Derrida fittingly closes his “Parergon” with this vision, where he also alludes to Glas and anticipates The Post Card (Truth in Painting 145-47).

     

    Now, although the point would require a long excursion into modern mathematics, science, and cosmology, and it could only be, to use Derrida’s language, telegraphed, tele-graphed here, I would argue that Derrida is also a philosopher of the Universe as we see it now, in the following sense. What his philosophy reflects and philosophically reflects on (however implicitly) is the transition from Copernicus to Kepler’s Harmonia Mundi to Galileo’s book of nature to Kant’s galactic colossal, and finally to post-Einsteinian relativistic cosmology. This cosmology still uses the language of mathematics, but it makes this language writing. The Universe itself, the visible and the invisible in it, looks more and more like a kind of différance, both on the largest and on the smallest (quantum) scales, especially when one combines, as modern physics must, nature’s smallest and largest scales. Thus both modern physics and Derrida bring us to the différance of the Universe–the chaosmic différance, a play of energy and chance–a différance that also makes speaking of the Universe rigorously impossible. In other words, Derrida can also be seen as a thinker of our material habitats (without claiming or even attempting to be one), as he is a philosopher of our cultural habitats. It would be tempting to link this différance of nature primarily to Kant, and the différance of politics and culture, as described above, to Hegel. But this never-one différance is just as much the différance in-between Kant and Hegel as it is in-between nature and culture, from “Structure, Sign, and Play” on, to which Derrida and we continue to return, eternally return, as Nietzsche (the main figure of the essay) would have it.

     

    On the right of the right column of Genet at this juncture of Glas is Genet’s conception of the ultimate major (“capitale,” but also decapitated) colossal masterpiece literature authorized by a contract, and by the contract we have signed with “the strange institution called literature” (Acts of Literature 33):

     

    Glory again, with which the syllabary is initiated, in the future perfect, in the publishing contract, signed with the institution (family and city), that is, with the funeral rite, the burial organization. Tearing up the contract, the literary operation reverts to no more than confirming it undefatigably, in the margin, with a siglum. "There is a book entitled I'll Have a Fine Funeral. We are acting with a view to a fine funeral, to formal obsequies. They will be the masterpiece, in the strict sense of the word, the major [capitale] work, quite rightly the crowning glory of our life. I must die in an apotheosis, and it doesn't matter whether I know glory before or after my death as long as I know that I'll have it, and I shall have it if I sign a contract with a firm of undertakers that will attend to fulfilling my destiny, to rounding it off." At the moment of the "theatrical stunt [coup]," in Funeral Rites, when they "slid" the coffin onto the catafalque--"the conjuring away of the coffin"--before its reduction, as with the coffin of "Saint-Osmose" (a fictive letter about the Golden Legend--published in Italian) into a box of matches, "Jean's death was duplicating itself in another death." (Glas 11b)

     

    Genet and Derrida may have been thinking (for glas means knell, to begin with), of Joyce’s Finnegans Wake, the funeral rite of literary modernism and yet another colossal postcard, replacing the book of absolute knowledge with writing in Derrida’s sense, just as Glas and The Post Card, perhaps all of Derrida’s books are, the “book[s] that will not have been book[s],” colossal postcards sent to Socrates and Freud and so many other writers between and beyond them, and to all of us.

     

    “There are more things in heaven and earth, Horatio, /Than are dreamt of in your philosophy,” in heaven and earth, in spirit and matter, in light and darkness, in space and time. “And therefore as a stranger give it welcome,” we may say with Hamlet (Hamlet, Act II. ii, 165-68). It is a welcome to Derrida’s philosophy, a philosophy, like Shakespeare’s literature, of the strangeness and complexity of life. Shakespeare appears in Derrida rarely enough, now and then, here and there, but often decisively, as in “My Chances,” where Derrida cites these very lines on the way to “How malicious is my fortune” from King Lear. “The sense of remorse or misfortune . . . the regret I [Derrida] feel in not having attempted with you, as I initially projected, an analysis of King Lear. . . . I would have followed” (“My Chances” 29). Never enough time! It is only a few lines below that Hamlet is to say, with the voice of the Ghost intervening from below, that “the time is out of joint” (ii, 189). These are of course the lines through which Derrida is to address, a few centuries later in the epoch of capitalism, our own time in Specters of Marx. The theme follows him politically through the end of his life, in his writings and in his interventions into the often tragic events that were to shape and reshape the world during the last decade. “To set it right” (“O cursed spite/That ever I was born to set it right” [ii, 189-90]): that is yet another story in which such notions as “right” and “setting” need to be rethought. Many specters, ghosts of Derrida will likely be the permanent guests of this rethinking, in which we must “go together” with our guests and ghosts alike. “Go together” are the words that Hamlet says to his companions, friends, waiting for him to go ahead of them, as befits courtly etiquette. With these words Shakespeare closes the scene (ii, 191).

     

    Derrida is no longer with us, but, in the différance of our chaosmic world, deconstruction will continue under many a name and in many a field, “if we live, and go on thinking,” as John Keats once said. Keats also used the occasion to invoke the “grand march of intellect” (Rollins, ed., Letters 1: 281-82). It would be difficult to find a better description of either Derrida’s own work or what it can help us to achieve–if we go on thinking together.

     

    Works Cited

    • Derrida, Jacques. Acts of Literature. Ed. Derek Attridge. New York: Routledge, 1997.
    • —. Adieu to Emmanuel Levinas. Trans. Pascale-Anne Brault and Michael Naas. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1999.
    • —. Dissemination. Trans. Barbara Johnson. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1981.
    • —. Glas. Trans. John P. Leavey, Jr. and Richard Rand. Lincoln: U of Nebraska P, 1986.
    • —. “Living on: Border Lines.” Trans. James Hulbert. Ed. Harold Bloom et al. Deconstruction and Criticism. New York: Continuum, 1979.
    • —. Margins of Philosophy. Trans. Alan Bass. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1982.
    • —. Memoirs of the Blind: The Self-Portrait and Other Ruins. Trans. Pascale-Anne Brault and Michael Naas. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1993.
    • —. “My Chances/Mes Chances: A Rendezvous with Some Epicurean Stereophonies.” Eds. Joseph H. Smith and William Kerrigan. Taking Chances: Derrida, Psychoanalysis and Literature. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 1984.
    • —. Of Grammatology. Trans. Gayatri C. Spivak. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 1974.
    • —. On the Name. Ed. Thomas Dutoit. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1995.
    • —. The Other Heading: Reflections on Today’s Europe. Trans. Pascale-Anne Brault and Michael Naas. Bloomington: Indiana UP, 1991.
    • —. Positions. Trans. Alan Bass. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1981.
    • —. The Post Card: From Socrates to Freud and Beyond. Trans. Alan Bass. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1987.
    • —. Specters of Marx: The State of the Debt, the Work of Mourning and the New International. Trans. Peggy Kamuf. New York: Routledge, 1994.
    • —. Speech and Phenomena, and Other Essays on Husserl’s Theory of Signs. Trans. David B. Allison. Evanston: Northwestern UP, 1973.
    • —. Spurs: Nietzsche’s Style. Trans. Barbara Harlow. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1979.
    • —. The Truth in Painting. Trans. Geoff Bennington and Ian McLeod. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1987.
    • —. Writing and Difference. Trans. Alan Bass. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1978.